en_tn/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv

1	Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
2	1CO	front	intro	e8ey			0		Introduction to 1 Corinthians Part 1: General Introduction Outline of the Book of 1 Corinthians Opening (1:1–9) Against divisions (1:10–4:15) Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20) On abstinence (7:1–40) On food (8:1–11:1) On head coverings (11:2–16) On the Lord’s Supper (11:17-34) On spiritual gifts (12:1–14:40) On the resurrection of the dead (15:1–58) On the collection and visits (16:1–12) Closing: final commands and greetings (16:13–24) Who wrote the Book of 1 Corinthians? Paul wrote 1 Corinthians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus. Paul started the church that met in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter. What is the Book of 1 Corinthians about? 1 Corinthians is a letter that Paul wrote to the believers who were in the city of Corinth. Paul had heard that there were problems among the believers there. They were arguing with each other. Some of them did not understand some of the Christian teachings. And some of them were behaving badly. In this letter, Paul responded to them and encouraged them to live in a way that pleased God. How should the title of this book be translated? Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “First Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts What was the city of Corinth like? Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes. What was the problem with meat sacrificed to idols? Many animals were slaughtered and sacrificed to the false gods in Corinth. Priests and worshipers kept some of the meat. Much of the meat was sold in markets. Many Christians disagreed with each other over whether it was right for them to eat this meat, because it had been dedicated to a false god. Paul writes about this problem in 1 Corinthians. Part 3: Important Translation Issues What do “knowledge” and “wisdom” mean in 1 Corinthians? How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 1 Corinthians in the ULT? The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, 1 Corinthians ULT uses the following principles: Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.” (See: 1:2; 3:17) Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 6:1, 2; 14:33; 16:1, 15) Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.” (See: 1:2; 6:11; 7:14, 34) The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions. What is the meaning of “flesh?” Paul frequently used the terms “flesh” or “fleshly” to refer to Christians who did sinful things. However, it is not the physical world that is evil. Paul also described Christians who lived in a righteous way as “spiritual.” This is because they did what the Holy Spirit taught them to do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]]) What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.? This kind of expression occurs in 1:2, 30, 31; 3:1; 4:10, 15, 17; 6:11, 19; 7:22; 9:1, 2; 11:11, 25; 12:3, 9, 13, 18, 25; 14:16; 15:18, 19, 22, 31, 58; 16:19, 24. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “those who have been dedicated in Christ Jesus” (1:2), where Paul specifically meant that Christian believers have been dedicated to Christ. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression. What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Corinthians? For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. Translators are advised to follow the modern versions of the Bible. However, if in the translators’ region there are Bibles that read according to older versions of the Bible, the translators can follow those. If so, these verses should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to 1 Corinthians. “Therefore glorify God with your body.” Some older versions read “Therefore glorify God with your body and in your spirit, which are God’s.” (6:20) “I did this even though I myself was not under the law” (9:20). Some older versions leave this passage out. “for the sake of conscience--the conscience of the other man.” Some older versions read “for the sake of conscience: for the earth and everything in it belong to the Lord: the conscience of the other man.” (10:28) “and that I give my body to be burned” (13:3). Some older versions read, “and that I give my body so that I might boast.” “But if anyone does not recognize this, let him not be recognized” (14:38). Some older versions read, “But if anyone is ignorant of this, let him be ignorant.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3	1CO	1	intro	ud5y			0		1 Corinthians 1 General Notes Structure and formatting Opening (1:1–9) Greetings and Blessing (1:1–3) Praise and Prayer (1:4–9) Against divisions (1:10–4:15) Divisions, Leaders, and Baptism (1:10–17) Wisdom, Foolishness, and Boasting (1:18–31) Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 19, which are from the Old Testament. Special concepts in this chapter Disunity In this chapter, Paul urges the Corinthians to stop dividing up into smaller groups that identify themselves with one specific leader. He mentions some of the leaders, including himself, in 1:12. The Corinthians probably chose these leaders themselves, since there is no evidence that any of the people mentioned in 1:12 were trying to create their own groups. People in the Corinthian church were probably trying to sound wiser or more powerful than other people, so they would choose a group and a leader and say they were better than others. Paul argues against these kinds of divisions first, and then he argues against anyone who tries to sound wiser and more powerful than others. Wisdom and foolishness Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks of both wisdom and foolishness. These words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. If someone creates plans and ideas that work out well, that person is wise. If someone creates plans and ideas that do not work out well, that person is foolish. The wise person makes good choices, and the foolish person makes bad choices. Use words in your language that indicate these ideas. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fool]]) Power and weakness Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks of both power and weakness. These words primarily refer to how much influence and authority a person has and to how much they can accomplish. Someone who has “power” has much influence and authority and can accomplish many things. Someone who has “weakness” does not have much influence and authority and is not able to accomplish many things. Use words in your language that indicate these ideas (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/power]]) Important figures of speech in this chapter Metaphors about Christ In this chapter, Paul says that “Christ is the power of God and the wisdom of God” (1:24) and that Christ “was made for us wisdom from God, righteousness, and also sanctification and redemption” (1:30). With these two verses, Paul is not saying that Christ is no longer a person and is instead these abstract ideas. Rather, Paul is speaking in this way because Christ and his work for believers include all of these abstract ideas. Christ’s work is powerful and wise, and gives those who believe in him wisdom, righteousness, sanctification, and redemption. For ways to translate these two statements, see the notes on these two verses. Rhetorical questions Paul asks many questions in this chapter. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter Positive and negative uses of “wisdom” Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks about wisdom in both positive and negative ways. He uses the same words throughout the chapter, and he distinguishes between positive and negative meanings by connecting the words to different people or ideas. For example, he speaks of wisdom negatively when it is the wisdom of the world, or the wisdom of humans. However, he speaks of wisdom positively when it is wisdom from God or wisdom given by God. If possible, translate the negative and positive meanings of wisdom with the same word, just as Paul uses one word for both negative and positive. If you must use different words, use positive words for God’s wisdom and negative words for human wisdom. Using different perspectives Sometimes, Paul speaks of God as if God were “foolish” and “weak” (1:25) and as if he chose “foolish” and “weak” things (1:27). Paul does not actually think that God is foolish and weak and chooses foolish and weak things. Rather, he is speaking from the perspective of normal human thinking. What God does, from a human perspective, is “weak” and “foolish.” He makes this clear in several verses. For example, in 1:26, Paul says that most of the Corinthians were not wise “according to the flesh.” This is Paul’s way of saying that they were not wise according to human thinking. If possible translate the times Paul speaks from a human perspective with the same words he uses for “weakness” and “foolishness” when he speaks from God’s perspective. If it is necessary to distinguish these uses, use a word or phrase that explains which perspective Paul is using. He does this himself sometimes, and if it is necessary, you can do it in other places as well. Information presented out of order The ULT puts parentheses around 1:16 because Paul is speaking about whom he baptized, an idea that fits logically with 1:14 and not as well after 1:15. Paul has remembered someone else that he baptized, and instead of going back and putting that information in 1:14, he includes it in 1:16, interrupting the flow of the argument. If possible, keep 1:16 where it is, and use a form in your language that indicates that Paul is interrupting his argument. If there is no way to do this in your language, you could move it between 1:14 and 1:15.
4	1CO	1	1	m3dd	figs-exclusive		0	General Information	Throughout this letter the words “we,” “us,” “our,” and “ours” include the Corinthian believers unless otherwise noted. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive)
5	1CO	1	1	lihg	figs-yousingular		0	General Information	The words “you,” “your,” and “yours” refer to the Corinthians believers and so are plural unless otherwise noted. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular)
6	1CO	1	1	o7ie	figs-123person	Παῦλος	1		In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, referring to themselves in the third person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can use the first person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “From Paul. I have been” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
7	1CO	1	1	e8j3	translate-names	Παῦλος	1	Paul	Here and throughout the letter, this is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
8	1CO	1	1	qp1n	figs-activepassive	κλητὸς ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	Sosthenes our brother	If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express called by Christ Jesus {to be} an apostle in active form. Alternate translation: “whom Christ Jesus called {to be} an apostle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9	1CO	1	1	qvn5	figs-possession	διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe the will that God has. If it would be misunderstood in your language that this phrase refers to what God wills, you could express the idea with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “because God desired this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
10	1CO	1	1	xfbo	figs-explicit	καὶ Σωσθένης	1		This phrase means that Sosthenes is with Paul, and Paul writes the letter for both of them. It does not mean that Sosthenes was the scribe who wrote the letter down. It also does not mean that Sosthenes dictated the letter with Paul, since Paul uses the first person singular more than the first person plural in the letter. If there is a way in your language to indicate that Paul writes in behalf of Sosthenes, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “and I write in behalf of Sosthenes” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
11	1CO	1	1	n9zv	translate-names	Σωσθένης	1		This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
12	1CO	1	2	r9kg	figs-123person	τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ…τῇ οὔσῃ ἐν Κορίνθῳ	1	to the church of God at Corinth	In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would name those to whom they sent the letter, referring to them in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you can use the second person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the recipient of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “This letter is for you who are members of the church of God at Corinth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
13	1CO	1	2	e75p	figs-activepassive	ἡγιασμένοις	1	those who have been sanctified in Christ Jesus	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express having been sanctified in active form with “God” as the subject. Alternate translation: “God having sanctified you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14	1CO	1	2	lp42	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Paul uses the spatial metaphor in Christ to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being in Christ, or united to Christ, explains: (1) the means by which God has sanctified the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “by means of your union with Christ Jesus” (2) the reason why God has sanctified the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “because of your union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15	1CO	1	2	e8jw	figs-activepassive	κλητοῖς ἁγίοις	1	who are called to be saints	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express called {to be} saints in active form with “God” as the subject. Alternate translation: “whom God has called {to be} saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
16	1CO	1	2	nz5s	figs-hyperbole	ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ	1		Here, Paul describes all believers as if they were in every place. He speaks this way to emphasize that believers can be found in many countries, towns, and villages. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could indicate that believers are found in many places around the world. Alternate translation: “in many places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
17	1CO	1	2	l21m	figs-idiom	ἐπικαλουμένοις τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	those who call on the name of our Lord Jesus Christ	“Calling on the name of” someone is an idiom that refers to worshiping and praying to that person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “who pray to and venerate our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
18	1CO	1	2	l9rq	figs-ellipsis	αὐτῶν καὶ ἡμῶν	1	their Lord and ours	In the phrase, Paul has left out words that may be needed in some languages to make a complete thought. If you cannot leave out these words in your language, you could supply words such as “who is” and “Lord” to make a complete thought. Alternate translation: “who is Lord over them and us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
19	1CO	1	3	gc2c	translate-blessing	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	General Information:	After stating his name and the name of the person to whom he is writing, Paul adds a blessing for the Corinthians. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness and peace within you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus the Messiah” or “I pray that grace and peace from God our Father and the Lord Jesus the Messiah will always be with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
20	1CO	1	4	zd7l	figs-hyperbole	πάντοτε	1		Here, always is an exaggeration that Paul uses to express how often he prays for the Corinthians. If always would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that indicates frequency. Alternate translation: “consistently” or “frequently” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole)
21	1CO	1	4	qoag	figs-distinguish	τῷ Θεῷ μου	1		When Paul speaks of my God, he does not mean that this is a different God than the one the Corinthians believe in. Rather, he simply wishes to state that this is God is his God. If my God in your translation sounds like it makes a distinction between Paul’s God and the Corinthians’ God, you could translate with a plural pronoun. Alternate translation: “to our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
22	1CO	1	4	t16d	figs-activepassive	τῇ δοθείσῃ	1	because of the grace of God that was given to you in Christ Jesus	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express that was given in active form with “God” or “he” as the subject. Alternate translation: “that he gave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
23	1CO	1	4	jjtn	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Paul uses the spatial metaphor in Christ to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being in Christ, or united to Christ, explains (1) the means by which God has given grace to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “by means of your union with Christ Jesus” (2) the reason why God has given grace to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “because of your union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
24	1CO	1	5	nl9z	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1		The word translated For introduces an explanation of “the grace of God that was given” in 1:4. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “That is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
25	1CO	1	5	qsc9		παντὶ	1		Alternate translation: “every way”
26	1CO	1	5	js7f	figs-metaphor	ἐπλουτίσθητε	1	you have been made rich in him	Here, Paul speaks as if the Corinthians had received a lot of money in him. With this language of being rich, Paul means that the Corinthians have received more than they need, and 1:7 shows that what they have received are spiritual blessings and gifts. If being made rich would be misunderstood by your readers, you could: (1) express this idea with a phrase that refers to how much God has given them. Alternate translation: “you were given many gifts” (2) clarify that Paul speaks of spiritual riches. Alternate translation: “you were made spiritually rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
27	1CO	1	5	kaie	figs-activepassive	ἐπλουτίσθητε	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express you were made rich in active form, with “God” as the subject. Alternate translation: “God has made you rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28	1CO	1	5	n9wn	writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐτῷ	1		The word translated him refers to Jesus, since God the Father is the one who makes the Corinthians rich. If him would be misunderstood in your language, you could use the words “Christ” or “Christ Jesus” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
29	1CO	1	5	j48t	figs-abstractnouns	παντὶ λόγῳ	1	in all speech	If you cannot use this form in your language, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun word with a verb. Alternate translation: “everything you speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
30	1CO	1	5	qy8c	figs-abstractnouns	πάσῃ γνώσει	1	all knowledge	If you cannot use this form in your language, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun knowledge with a verb. Alternate translation: “everything you know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
31	1CO	1	6	ef38	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καθὼς	1		The word translated just as could introduce: (1) the reason why the Corinthians were made rich. Alternate translation: “which is due to how” (2) a comparison that illustrates how the Corinthians were made rich. Alternate translation: “in the same way that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
32	1CO	1	6	ub5r	figs-exmetaphor	τὸ μαρτύριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐβεβαιώθη	1		In this verse, Paul speaks as if what he told the Corinthians about Christ was testimony he gave as a witness in a court of law. This testimony has been confirmed, just as if other evidence proved to the judge that his testimony was accurate. With this metaphor, he reminds the Corinthians that they have believed the message about Christ and that it is now an important part of their lives. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “our message about Christ has been firmly founded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
33	1CO	1	6	h9zk	figs-possession	τὸ μαρτύριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	the testimony about Christ has been confirmed as true among you	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to speak about a testimony that concerns Christ. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could make it explicit that Christ is the content of the testimony. Alternate translation: “the testimony about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
34	1CO	1	6	tfo3	figs-activepassive	τὸ μαρτύριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐβεβαιώθη	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this idea in active form with “God” as the subject. Alternate translation: “God has confirmed the testimony of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
35	1CO	1	7	t2hd	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥστε	1	Therefore	The word translated so that could introduce: (1) a result from “being made rich” in 1:5 and from the confirmation of the “testimony” in 1:6. Alternate translation: “God has made you rich and confirmed our testimony so that” (2) a result from just the confirmation in 1:6. Alternate translation: “God confirmed our testimony among you so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
36	1CO	1	7	p5y6	figs-litotes	ὑμᾶς μὴ ὑστερεῖσθαι ἐν μηδενὶ χαρίσματι	1	you lack no spiritual gift	Here, Paul uses two negative words, not and lack, to express a strong positive meaning. He means that the Corinthians have every spiritual gift that God gives. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea in positive form. Alternate translation: “you have every gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
37	1CO	1	7	ymph	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἀπεκδεχομένους	1		The word translated eagerly waiting for introduces something that happens at the same time as not lacking in any gift. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “while you eagerly wait for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
38	1CO	1	7	fe4q	figs-possession	τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ;	1	the revelation of our Lord Jesus Christ	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a revelation whose content is our Lord Jesus Christ. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this explicit by translating the phrase with a verb with “God” or our Lord Jesus Christ as the subject. Alternate translation: “God to reveal our Lord Jesus Christ” or “our Lord Jesus Christ to be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
39	1CO	1	7	o145	figs-explicit	τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		In this context, it is clear that Paul does not simply mean that knowledge about our Lord Jesus Christ will be revealed. Rather, he means that our Lord Jesus Christ himself will return to earth. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word such as “return” to make this idea clear. Alternate translation: “the return of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
40	1CO	1	8	cqpk	writing-pronouns	ὃς	1		This pronoun could refer to: (1) God, who is the implied subject of all the verbs in this section. Alternate translation: “It is God who” (2) Jesus, which is the closest name. Alternate translation: “It is Jesus who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
41	1CO	1	8	usci	translate-unknown	καὶ βεβαιώσει ὑμᾶς	1		The word translated confirm is the same word that Paul used in 1:6, also translated “confirmed.” Paul uses the word also to remind the reader that he has already used confirmed. If possible, translate confirmed as you did in 1:6. Just as there, here it refers to something or someone that is proved to be true or accurate. In this case, it means that God will make the Corinthians’ faith true to the end. Alternate translation: “will also firmly found your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
42	1CO	1	8	qtpq	figs-idiom	ἕως τέλους	1		The phrase translated to the end means that some activity or state will continue until a definable point in the future. Here, it means that God will confirm the Corinthians until their earthly lives end. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “until your race is run” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
43	1CO	1	8	pif5	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀνεγκλήτους	1	you will be blameless	The word translated blameless gives the result of God confirming them to the end. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this connection explicit. Alternate translation: “so that you will be blameless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
44	1CO	1	9	hp30	figs-activepassive	δι’ οὗ ἐκλήθητε	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “who called you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
45	1CO	1	9	u2z0	figs-possession	εἰς κοινωνίαν τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe fellowship that is with his Son. If this form would be misunderstood in you language, you could (1) use a word such as “with” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “into fellowship with his Son” (2) translate fellowship with a verb such as “share in” or “commune with.” Alternate translation: “to commune with his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
46	1CO	1	9	kx3z	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	his Son	Son is an important title for Jesus and describes his relationship with God the Father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
47	1CO	1	10	huz1	grammar-connect-words-phrases	παρακαλῶ δὲ	1		The word translated now indicates the beginning of a new section. Paul transitions from giving thanks to appealing to the Corinthians to avoid divisions. You could: (1) leave this word untranslated, and show the shift in topic by starting a new paragraph. Alternate translation: “I urge” (2) use a word or phrase that indicates the beginning of a new section. Alternate translation: “Next, I urge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
48	1CO	1	10	u1u1	figs-infostructure	παρακαλῶ δὲ ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ,	1		In this sentence, I urge you is far away from what Paul is urging. If it would be clearer in your language, you could move I urge you so that it comes right before that you all speak. Alternate translation: “Now brothers, through the name of our Lord Jesus Christ, I urge you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
49	1CO	1	10	k7gw	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although the word translated brothers is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
50	1CO	1	10	sw54	figs-metonymy	διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	through the name of our Lord Jesus Christ	Here, Paul uses the name of Jesus to refer to the authority of Jesus. With this language, he reminds the Corinthians that he is an apostle with authority from Jesus. If the meaning of name would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “on behalf of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
51	1CO	1	10	u4y2	figs-idiom	τὸ αὐτὸ λέγητε πάντες	1	that you all agree	In this language, to speak the same thing is an idiom that means that everyone is in agreement, not only in what they speak but also in what they believe and set as goals. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you all see eye to eye” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
52	1CO	1	10	j75c	translate-unknown	σχίσματα	1	that there be no divisions among you	The word translated divisions refers to when one group splits into multiple different groups because they have different leaders, beliefs, or opinions. If this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable noun or a short phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “opposing parties” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
53	1CO	1	10	tjkg	translate-unknown	κατηρτισμένοι	1		The word translated joined together refers to putting something into its proper position or state, often returning it to that state. Here, then, it refers to restoring the community to the unity it had and is supposed to have. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “restored to your previous unity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
54	1CO	1	10	emt2	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ νοῒ καὶ ἐν τῇ αὐτῇ γνώμῃ	1	be joined together with the same mind and by the same purpose	If you cannot this form in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns mind and purpose with verbs such as “think” and “decide” or “choose.” Alternate translation: “by thinking the same things and by choosing the same things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
55	1CO	1	11	dtsp	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		The word translated for introduces the reason why Paul is urging them to become united together. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a short phrase to express the idea. Alternate translation: “I speak this way because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
56	1CO	1	11	tayn	figs-activepassive	ἐδηλώθη…μοι περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί μου, ὑπὸ τῶν Χλόης	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could write this sentence in active form. Alternate translation: “those of Chloe have made it clear to me concerning you, my brothers,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
57	1CO	1	11	ur84	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί μου	1		Although the word translated brothers is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to both men or women. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “my brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
58	1CO	1	11	e8jb	figs-explicit	τῶν Χλόης	1	Chloe’s people	those of Chloe refers to people who are connected to Chloe and probably live in her house or work for her. Paul does not tell us whether they are family members, slaves, or employees. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that these people are related to or dependent on Chloe. Alternate translation: “people connected to Chloe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
59	1CO	1	11	fd71	translate-names	Χλόης	1		This is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
60	1CO	1	11	vbe6	translate-unknown	ἔριδες ἐν ὑμῖν εἰσιν	1	there are factions among you	The word translated factions refers to quarrels or strife within a community. These quarrels or fights are not physical but verbal. If possible, use a word that refers to verbal conflict or express the idea with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “you have verbal fights with each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
61	1CO	1	12	umbx	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Paul uses the word translated Now to introduce a further explanation of what he started talking about in 1:11. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave the word untranslated or use a word that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
62	1CO	1	12	tsn6	figs-idiom	λέγω…τοῦτο,	1		Here, Paul uses the phrase I say this to explain what he meant in the previous verse when he mentioned “factions” (1:11). If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom for explaining what has already been said or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “what I mean is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
63	1CO	1	12	a4lo	figs-explicitinfo	τοῦτο, ὅτι	1		Having both this and that in this sentence may be redundant in your language. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a simpler way to introduce what Paul wants to “say.” Alternate translation: “that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
64	1CO	1	12	wf0n	figs-hyperbole	ἕκαστος ὑμῶν λέγει	1		Here, Paul uses each of them to emphasize that many individuals within the Corinthian congregation are saying these kinds of things. He does not mean that each person says all four of these things. He also does not mean that every single person in the church is making these kinds of claims. Finally, he does not mean that these are the only four claims that they are making. If the form that Paul uses would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that singles out many individuals within a group, and you could add a phrase that indicates that these are examples of what they are saying. Alternate translation: “people in your group say are saying things like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
65	1CO	1	12	vpym	translate-names	Παύλου…Ἀπολλῶ…Κηφᾶ	1		These are the names of three men. Cephas is another name for Peter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
66	1CO	1	12	bfd0	figs-quotations	ἐγὼ μέν εἰμι Παύλου, ἐγὼ δὲ Ἀπολλῶ, ἐγὼ δὲ Κηφᾶ, ἐγὼ δὲ Χριστοῦ	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “that you are of Paul, or you are of Apollos, or you are of Cephas, or you are of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
67	1CO	1	12	a57r	figs-possession	ἐγὼ μέν εἰμι Παύλου, ἐγὼ δὲ Ἀπολλῶ, ἐγὼ δὲ Κηφᾶ, ἐγὼ δὲ Χριστοῦ	1	Each one of you says	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that these people claim to be part of a specific leader’s group. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a word such as “belong” or “follow.” Alternate translation: “‘I follow Paul,’ or ‘I follow Apollos,’ or ‘I follow Cephas,’ or ‘I follow Christ.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
68	1CO	1	13	iam2	figs-123person	μὴ Παῦλος ἐσταυρώθη ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν, ἢ εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Παύλου ἐβαπτίσθητε	1		In this verse, Paul speaks of himself in the third person. This could sound like he is speaking about a different Paul than himself. If this use of Paul would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that Paul is naming himself. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, was not crucified for you, was I? Or were you baptized in my name, that of Paul?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
69	1CO	1	13	wf6r	figs-rquestion	μεμέρισται ὁ Χριστός?	1	Is Christ divided?	Paul asks if Christ has been divided, but he is not really asking for information. Rather, the question assumes that the answer is “no,” and Paul uses a question to invite the Corinthians to think about how absurd their behavior is. If the meaning of this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “Christ has certainly not been divided!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
70	1CO	1	13	w175	figs-activepassive	μεμέρισται ὁ Χριστός?	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form, with an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “Have they divided Christ?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
71	1CO	1	13	aw2r	figs-metaphor	μεμέρισται ὁ Χριστός	1		Here, Paul speaks as if Christ could be divided into pieces and given to different groups. He speaks this way because he identifies the church with the body of Christ. If the church is divided into groups, then the body of Christ has been divided up as well. However, it is absurd to think that Christ’s body has been cut up into pieces, so it is also absurd to divide the church into pieces. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “Has Christ’s own body been divided, just as your church has been divided?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
72	1CO	1	13	g5qh	figs-rquestion	μὴ Παῦλος ἐσταυρώθη ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν	1	Was Paul crucified for you?	Paul asks if Paul was not crucified, but he is not really asking for information. Rather, the question assumes that the answer is “no,” and Paul uses a question to invite the Corinthians to think about how absurd their thinking is. If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “Paul was certainly not crucified for you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
73	1CO	1	13	lqsy	figs-activepassive	μὴ Παῦλος ἐσταυρώθη ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this idea in active form, with an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “They did not crucify Paul for you, did they?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
74	1CO	1	13	tb2i	figs-rquestion	ἢ εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Παύλου ἐβαπτίσθητε?	1	Were you baptized in the name of Paul?	Paul asks if they were baptized in the name of Paul, but he is not really asking for information. Rather, the question assumes that the answer is “no,” and Paul uses a question to invite the Corinthians to think about how absurd their thinking is. If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “You were certainly not baptized in the name of Paul!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
75	1CO	1	13	tii7	figs-activepassive	ἢ εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Παύλου ἐβαπτίσθητε?	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this idea in active form, with a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Or did they baptize you in the name of Paul?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
76	1CO	1	13	zi1y	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Παύλου	1	in the name of Paul	Here, Paul uses the word name to refer to authority. What he means is that, when they were baptized, no one used the name of Paul, and therefore they do not belong to his group. Instead, he implicitly asserts that they belong to God, whose name would have been used when they were baptized. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea by using the word “authority” or by a phrase that includes the language of “belonging.” Alternate translation: “under the authority of Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
77	1CO	1	14	hhh8	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐδένα ὑμῶν ἐβάπτισα, εἰ μὴ	1	none of you, except	If it would appear in your language that Paul is making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword the sentence to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “I baptized only two of you:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
78	1CO	1	14	vqq6	translate-names	Κρίσπον…Γάϊον	1	Crispus	These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
79	1CO	1	15	hv3m	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	This was so that no one would say that you were baptized into my name	The word translated so that introduces a purpose or result. In this case, it introduces what results from Paul not baptizing many of the Corinthians. Because he did not baptize almost any of them, they cannot say that they were baptized into his name. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that indicates result, and you could specify that it is the result of Paul not baptizing many of them. Alternate translation: “The result is that” or “Therefore,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
80	1CO	1	15	dwdv	figs-activepassive	εἰς τὸ ἐμὸν ὄνομα ἐβαπτίσθητε	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could state this in active form with an indefinite subject or with Paul as the subject. Alternate translation: “someone baptized you into my name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
81	1CO	1	15	u8f6	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ἐμὸν ὄνομα	1		Here, just as in 1:13, Paul uses the word name to refer to authority. What he means is that, when they were baptized, no one used Paul’s name, and therefore they do not belong to his group. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea by using the word “authority” or by a phrase that includes the language of “belonging.” Alternate translation: “under the my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
82	1CO	1	16	mq74	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, the word translated Now interrupts the argument and reintroduces the theme of 1:14, which is about whom Paul baptized. If this transition would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea by using punctuation that indicates a brief aside or parenthesis, or you could use a phrase that introduces when someone remembers something. Alternate translation: “Speaking of baptizing, I remember that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
83	1CO	1	16	ed59	translate-names	Στεφανᾶ	1	the household of Stephanas	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
84	1CO	1	16	nlzn	translate-unknown	οὐκ οἶδα εἴ τινα ἄλλον ἐβάπτισα	1		This statement could be more or less confident about how many people Paul baptized. It could be: (1) relatively confident that Paul has thought of everyone he baptized. Alternate translation: “I think that this is everyone that I baptized” (2) less confident that Paul has thought of everyone he baptized. Alternate translation: “I do not remember if I baptized any others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
85	1CO	1	16	qbjf	figs-hypo	εἴ	1		Paul here uses the condition introduced by if because he wishes to acknowledge that he thinks he has mentioned everyone that he baptized, but he is not sure. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that expresses uncertainty. Alternate translation: “whether” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
86	1CO	1	17	jkfj	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		The word translated For introduces an explanation for why Paul has baptized so few people. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that introduces an explanation, and you could clarify that it explains how little he baptizes. Alternate translation: “I only baptized a few people because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
87	1CO	1	17	ga5k	figs-infostructure	οὐ…ἀπέστειλέν με Χριστὸς βαπτίζειν, ἀλλὰ εὐαγγελίζεσθαι	1		If putting the negative statement before the positive statement would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse them and introduce not with wise speech by repeating proclaim. Alternate translation: “Christ sent me to proclaim the gospel, not to baptize. I proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
88	1CO	1	17	tg7i	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ εὐαγγελίζεσθαι	1	Christ did not send me to baptize	In this clause, Paul has omitted some words that might be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If this sentence would be misunderstood in your language, you could repeat the “sending” language. Alternate translation: “but he sent me to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
89	1CO	1	17	p3cf	figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ λόγου	1		In this clause, Paul has omitted some words that might be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If this sentence would be misunderstood in your language, you could repeat the “proclaiming” language. Alternate translation: “I do not proclaim it with wise speech” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
90	1CO	1	17	u60s	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The word translated so that introduces the purpose for which Paul does not use “wise speech.” Here, you could use a word or phrase that normally indicates purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
91	1CO	1	17	zn1n	figs-metaphor	μὴ κενωθῇ ὁ σταυρὸς τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	clever speech … the cross of Christ should not be emptied of its power	Here, Paul speaks as if the cross of Christ was a container that was full of power that he does not wish to empty of that power. By this, he means that he does not want to take away the power that the cross and the message about it have. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively, including the idea of power. Alternate translation: “the cross of Christ would not lose its power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
92	1CO	1	17	qdyj	figs-activepassive	μὴ κενωθῇ ὁ σταυρὸς τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this idea in active form, with Paul as the subject. Alternate translation: “I would not empty the cross of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
93	1CO	1	18	j7cw	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Connecting Statement:	The word translated For introduces an explanation of the last part of 1:17. In this verse, then, Paul explains further why he does not use wise speech. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that introduces an explanation, and you could briefly restate what Paul is explaining. Alternate translation: “I speak in this way because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
94	1CO	1	18	fq4x	figs-possession	ὁ λόγος…ὁ τοῦ σταυροῦ	1	the message about the cross	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to speak about a word that is about the cross. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that the cross is the content of the word. Alternate translation: “the word about the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
95	1CO	1	18	utr3	figs-metonymy	τοῦ σταυροῦ	1		Here, the word cross stands for the event in which Jesus died on the cross. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could include Jesus’ death in your translation. Alternate translation: “of Jesus’s death on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
96	1CO	1	18	p4wb	figs-abstractnouns	μωρία ἐστίν	1	is foolishness	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun foolishness by translating it as an adjective such as “foolish.” Alternate translation: “seems foolish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
97	1CO	1	18	lq5z	figs-activepassive	τοῖς…ἀπολλυμένοις	1	to those who are dying	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this in active form, with: (1) themselves as the subject. Alternate translation: “to those who will experience destruction” (2) God as the subject. Alternate translation: “to those whom God will destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
98	1CO	1	18	ao4m	figs-activepassive	τοῖς δὲ σῳζομένοις ἡμῖν	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this clause in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “but to us whom God is saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
99	1CO	1	18	m66w	figs-distinguish	τοῖς δὲ σῳζομένοις ἡμῖν	1		The description who are being saved distinguishes us from anyone else. It is not just adding information. Use a form in your language that shows that this is a distinguishing phrase. Alternate translation: “but to us, that is, the ones who are being saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
100	1CO	1	18	ji74	figs-possession	δύναμις Θεοῦ ἐστιν	1	it is the power of God	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe power that comes from God. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that God is the source of the power. Alternate translation: “power from God” or “God working in power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
101	1CO	1	19	fdhk	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1		Here, the word translated For introduces Paul’s evidence that what he said in 1:18 is true. You could use a word that introduces evidence for a claim or leave the word untranslated. Alternate translation: “As” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
102	1CO	1	19	wx5x	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this in active form, with: (1) the scripture or scripture author as the subject. Alternate translation: “Isaiah has written” (2) God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
103	1CO	1	19	tc6n	figs-quotations	ἀπολῶ τὴν σοφίαν τῶν σοφῶν, καὶ τὴν σύνεσιν τῶν συνετῶν ἀθετήσω	1	I will frustrate the understanding of the intelligent	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate this direct quote as an indirect quote, specifying that God is the subject and including an introductory word such as “that.” Alternate translation: “that God will destroy the wisdom of the wise, and he will frustrate the understanding of the intelligent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
104	1CO	1	19	kzb0	figs-possession	τὴν σοφίαν τῶν σοφῶν…τὴν σύνεσιν τῶν συνετῶν	1		In both of these clauses, Paul uses the possessive form to describe wisdom or understanding that belongs to the wise or the intelligent. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could indicate that wisdom and understanding belong to the wise or the intelligent. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that the wise have … the understanding that the intelligent have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
105	1CO	1	19	gft6	figs-nominaladj	τῶν σοφῶν…τῶν συνετῶν	1		Paul is using the adjectives wise and intelligent as nouns in order to describe groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “of the people who are wise … of the people who are intelligent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
106	1CO	1	19	pa5n	translate-unknown	τῶν συνετῶν	1		The word translated intelligent describes someone who is good at figuring problems out, understanding new ideas, and making smart decisions. Use a word in your language that gets this general idea across. Alternate translation: “of the smart” or “of the clever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
107	1CO	1	20	m6tf	figs-rquestion	ποῦ σοφός? ποῦ γραμματεύς? ποῦ συνζητητὴς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου?	1	Where is the wise person? Where is the scholar? Where is the debater of this world?	With these questions, Paul is not actually asking about the location of certain people. Rather, he is suggesting to the Corinthians that these kinds of people cannot be found. If these questions would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with statements that: (1) assert that these people do not actually have real wisdom, knowledge, or skill. Alternate translation: “The wise person does not really have wisdom. The scholar does not really know much. The debater of this age is not really good at arguing” (2) assert that these people do not exist. Alternate translation: “There is no wise person. There is no scholar. There is no debater of this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
108	1CO	1	20	h0qa	figs-genericnoun	σοφός…γραμματεύς…συνζητητὴς	1		Paul uses these singular nouns to identify types of people, but he does not mean just one wise person, scholar, or debater. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a form that identifies a type of person, or you could translate these nouns in plural form. Alternate translation: “the kind of person who has wisdom … the kind of person who is a scholar … the kind of person who is a debater” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
109	1CO	1	20	mzxx	figs-possession	συνζητητὴς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a debater who is part of this age. In fact, Paul may mean that the wise person and the scholar also belong to this age. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the debater, who belongs in this age” or “the debater? All these kinds of people belong to this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
110	1CO	1	20	u5j5	translate-unknown	συνζητητὴς	1	the debater	The word translated debater refers to someone who spends much of their time arguing about beliefs, values, or actions. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a short phrase or a term that expresses this idea better. Alternate translation: “the disputant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
111	1CO	1	20	a7zl	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ ἐμώρανεν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ κόσμου?	1	Has not God turned the wisdom of the world into foolishness?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a statement. Alternate translation: “ God has turned the wisdom of the world into foolishness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
112	1CO	1	20	y5wx	figs-possession	τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ κόσμου	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe wisdom that seems wise according to the standard of this world. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that this world values” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
113	1CO	1	21	cihg	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		The word translated For introduces an explanation of how God has turned the wisdom of the world into foolishness (1:20). You could use a word that introduces an explanation in your language or a short phrase that identifies that this verse explains the previous verse. Alternate translation: “That is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
114	1CO	1	21	eauj	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐπειδὴ…οὐκ ἔγνω ὁ κόσμος διὰ τῆς σοφίας τὸν Θεόν, εὐδόκησεν ὁ Θεὸς	1		The word translated since introduces the reason for the second half of the verse, beginning with God was pleased. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this more explicit or break the two pieces into two sentences and use a transition word that indicates result. Alternate translation: “because … the world did not know God through wisdom, therefore God was pleased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
115	1CO	1	21	tnez	figs-possession	ἐν τῇ σοφίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to speak of wisdom that God uses when he makes decisions or acts. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by adding “plans” or “thinking” and translating wisdom with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “in God’s wise plan” or ”in God’s wise thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
116	1CO	1	21	odyk	figs-synecdoche	ὁ κόσμος	1		Here, Paul uses the word translated world to refer to the humans that are part of the world. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate world with a word or phrase that refers to people who do not believe in Christ, or you could use a phrase like “people of the world.” Alternate translation: “the people of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
117	1CO	1	21	d7xw	figs-possession	τῆς μωρίας τοῦ κηρύγματος	1	those who believe	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to speak of preaching that is characterized by foolishness. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating foolishness as an adjective describing the preaching or the content of the preaching. Alternate translation: “the foolish preaching” or “the foolish message that we preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
118	1CO	1	21	lkk1	figs-irony	τῆς μωρίας	1		Paul describes the preaching as foolishness. He does not actually think his message is foolish. Instead, he speaks from the perspective of the world and its wisdom, because the message is foolish to the world. If this way of speaking would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that indicates that Paul is using irony or speaking from another person's perspective. Alternate translation: “the so-called foolishness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
119	1CO	1	22	j8nh	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἐπειδὴ καὶ	1		The word translated For sets up the contrast between this verse and what Paul preaches in the next verse. If your language has a way to begin a contrast, you could use it here. Otherwise, you could leave the word untranslated. Alternate translation: “It is indeed true that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
120	1CO	1	22	e1sy	figs-hyperbole	Ἰουδαῖοι…Ἕλληνες	1		By using the words translated Jews and Greeks, Paul is not saying that every single Jewish and Greek person does these things. Instead, he is generalizing, identifying common patterns among people who are Jewish and Greek. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that not all Jews and Greeks are meant. Alternate translation: “most Jews … most Greeks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
121	1CO	1	22	t32r	translate-unknown	Ἕλληνες	1		The word translated Greeks does not refer only to people who are ethnically Greek. However, it also does not refer to everyone who is not a Jew. Rather, it refers to people who speak the Greek language and who value the philosophy and education that are part of Greek culture. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies these people by their interests and values more than by their ethnicity. Alternate translation: “people who value Greek philosophy” or “people who had a Greek education” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
122	1CO	1	23	q8sj	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here, Paul continues the contrast he set up in 1:22. Jews seek signs, and Greeks seek wisdom, but Paul and those like him proclaim that the Messiah was crucified. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates a strong contrast between behavior or beliefs. Alternate translation: “In contrast with them,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
123	1CO	1	23	v9fa	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	General Information:	Here, the word we refers to Paul and others who proclaim the Gospel with him. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
124	1CO	1	23	ntu3	figs-activepassive	Χριστὸν ἐσταυρωμένον	1	Christ crucified	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could state this in active form, with: (1) Christ as the subject. Alternate translation: “that Christ laid down his life on the cross” (2) an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “that they crucified Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
125	1CO	1	23	krw3	figs-metaphor	σκάνδαλον	1	a stumbling block	Paul uses the word translated stumbling block to indicate that the message about “Christ crucified” causes offense or repulses many Jews. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “a repulsive concept” or “an unacceptable idea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
126	1CO	1	23	n6u2	figs-hyperbole	Ἰουδαίοις…ἔθνεσιν	1		By using the words translated Jews and Gentiles, Paul is not saying that every single Jewish and Gentile person responds to the Gospel in these ways. Instead, he is generalizing, identifying common patterns among people who are Jewish and Gentile. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that not all Jews and Gentiles are meant. Alternate translation: “to most Jews … to most Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
127	1CO	1	24	xgw1	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here, Paul uses the word translated But to contrast those who are called and the “Jews” and “Gentiles” in 1:23. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that contrasts people and their thinking. Alternate translation: “In contrast with them,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
128	1CO	1	24	i7l4	figs-infostructure	αὐτοῖς…τοῖς κλητοῖς, Ἰουδαίοις τε καὶ Ἕλλησιν, Χριστὸν Θεοῦ δύναμιν, καὶ Θεοῦ σοφίαν	1		Paul here puts the people he is talking about first before he makes a statement about them. If this is unnatural in your language, you could: (1) phrase the sentence so that those who are called is the subject of the whole sentence. Alternate translation: “those who are called, both Jews and Greeks, know that Christ {is} the power of God and the wisdom of God” (2) move to those who are called to the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Christ {is} the power of God and the wisdom of God to those who are called, both Jews and Greeks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
129	1CO	1	24	h7iw	figs-123person	αὐτοῖς…τοῖς κλητοῖς	1	to those whom God has called	Paul uses the third person to speak about those whom God has called because he is speaking of the group as a category in comparison with Jews who find the Gospel a stumbling block and Gentiles who find the Gospel to be foolish. He does not use the third person because he excludes himself or the Corinthians from this category. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with the first person. Alternate translation: “to those of us who are called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
130	1CO	1	24	appp	figs-activepassive	τοῖς κλητοῖς	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could write this in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “whom God has called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
131	1CO	1	24	pt5x	translate-unknown	Ἕλλησιν	1		The word translated Greeks does not refer only to people who are ethnically Greek. However, it also does not refer to everyone who is not a Jew. Rather, it refers to people who speak the Greek language and who value the philosophy and education that are part of Greek culture. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies these people by their interests and values more than by their ethnicity. Alternate translation: “people who value Greek philosophy” or “people who had a Greek education” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
132	1CO	1	24	hu1s	figs-metonymy	Χριστὸν	1	Christ as the power and the wisdom of God	Here, the word Christ could refer to: (1) the message about the work of Christ. Alternate translation: “the message about Christ” (2) the work of Christ, especially his death. Alternate translation: “Christ’s work” or “Christ’s death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
133	1CO	1	24	w9vm	figs-possession	Θεοῦ δύναμιν	1	the power … of God	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to speak of power that comes from God. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that God is the source of the power. Alternate translation: “power from God” or “God acting powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
134	1CO	1	24	p1hu	figs-possession	Θεοῦ σοφίαν	1	the wisdom of God	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to speak of wisdom that comes from God. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that God is the source of the wisdom. Alternate translation: “wisdom from God” or “God giving wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
135	1CO	1	25	fst8	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1		With the word translated For, Paul introduces the reason why the seemingly foolish message about Christ is power and wisdom (1:24). If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that introduces a reason or a short phrase that connects this verse to the previous verse or verses. Alternate translation: “God works through foolishness because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
136	1CO	1	25	h9hh	figs-irony	τὸ μωρὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ…τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the foolishness of God is wiser than people, and the weakness of God is stronger than people	Paul describes God as having foolishness and weakness. He does not actually think that God is weak and foolish, but he is speaking from the perspective of the world and its wisdom. From the perspective of the world, Paul’s God is indeed foolish and weak. What Paul means to say is that what the world sees as foolishness and weakness is still wiser and stronger than anything that humans have to offer. If this way of speaking would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that indicates that Paul is using irony or speaking from another person's perspective. Alternate translation: “the apparent foolishness of God … the apparent weakness of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
137	1CO	1	25	esc9	figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀνθρώπων	-1		The words translated men in both places in this verse do not refer just to male people. Rather, Paul means any human of any sex. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use both genders or a gender-neutral word. Alternate translation: “women and men … women and men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
138	1CO	1	25	jydy	figs-possession	τὸ μωρὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ…ἐστίν	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe foolishness that comes from God. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a phrase that indicates that God does foolishness. Alternate translation: “the foolish things that God does are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
139	1CO	1	25	uciw	figs-ellipsis	σοφώτερον τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἐστίν	1		Paul does not say everything that is needed in many languages to make a complete comparison. If the sentence would be misunderstood in your language, you could add whatever is needed to make the comparison complete, such “the wisdom.” Alternate translation: “is wiser than the wisdom of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
140	1CO	1	25	gnpe	figs-possession	τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe weakness that comes from God. If it this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this idea with a phrase that indicates that God does weakness. Alternate translation: “the weak things that God does {are}” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
141	1CO	1	25	i7pl	figs-ellipsis	ἰσχυρότερον τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1		Paul does not say everything that is needed in many languages to make a complete comparison. If this sentence would be misunderstood in your language, you could add whatever is needed to make the comparison complete, such “the strength.” Alternate translation: “stronger than the strength of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
142	1CO	1	26	je03	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word translated For introduces proof for or examples of what Paul has claimed so far about God choosing to work through foolishness and weakness. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces examples or support. Alternate translation: “For instance,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
143	1CO	1	26	c8sf	translate-unknown	τὴν κλῆσιν ὑμῶν	1		Here, the word translated calling primarily to who they were at the time of their calling. It does not primarily refer to God’s act in calling them. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood language, you can emphasize this aspect in your translation. Alternate translation: “who you were at your calling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
144	1CO	1	26	xq6b	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1		Here, the word translated brothers does not just refer to men but to people of any sex. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could: (1) use a non-gendered word. Alternate translation: “siblings” (2) use words for both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
145	1CO	1	26	w6l1	figs-litotes	οὐ πολλοὶ	-1	Not many of you	Here, Paul uses a form that can more easily be stated in inverse form in many languages. If: (1) your language would most naturally put not with the verb instead of many, you could do so here. Alternate translation: “many {were} not … many {were} not … and many {were} not” (2) your language would most naturally use a word that indicates a small number of people here, you could use it without not. Alternate translation: “few … few … and few” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
146	1CO	1	26	unig	writing-pronouns	οὐ πολλοὶ	-1		While Paul does not explicitly state that not many refers to the Corinthians, he is referring to the Corinthians when he says not many. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could insert “you.” Alternate translation: “not many of you … not many of you … and not many of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
147	1CO	1	26	camj	figs-infostructure	οὐ πολλοὶ σοφοὶ κατὰ σάρκα, οὐ πολλοὶ δυνατοί, οὐ πολλοὶ εὐγενεῖς	1		Paul here uses the phrase according to the flesh to clarify what he means by wise, powerful, and of noble birth, not just wise. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could move according to the flesh so that it is clear that it modifies all three of these statements. Alternate translation: “according to the flesh, not many {were} wise, not many {were} powerful, and not many {were} of noble birth (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
148	1CO	1	26	pws2	figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	wise according to the flesh	Here, Paul uses the phrase according to the flesh to refer to human ways of thinking. If the meaning of thsi phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idiom according to the flesh with a phrase that refers to human values or perspectives. Alternate translation: “according to human definitions” or “according to what humans value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
149	1CO	1	27	qjvd	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		Here, Paul introduces a contrast. hH is contrasting God chose the foolish things with what a person might expect about how God would treat foolish and weak people like the Corinthians. He is not contrasting how God chose the foolish things with the statements in the previous verse about the foolishness and weakness of the Corinthians. If this contrast would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that Paul writes But to contrast with what a person might expect about God. Alternate translation: “Despite what might be expected,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
150	1CO	1	27	qv5l	figs-parallelism	τοῦ κόσμου ἐξελέξατο ὁ Θεός, ἵνα καταισχύνῃ…τοῦ κόσμου ἐξελέξατο ὁ Θεός, ἵνα καταισχύνῃ	2	God chose … wise. God chose … strong	Here, Paul repeats the exact same words: God chose … in order that he might shame. He does this because repeating the same idea with different examples was more convincing than just one example in his culture. If possible, translate these words the same way in both parts of the sentence to preserve the parallelism. If it is necessary, you could remove or change some of the words if it makes the sentence sound more convincing, which is what Paul intended. Alternate translation: “God chose … of the world in order that he might shame … he chose … of the world to shame” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
151	1CO	1	27	r4ly	figs-possession	τὰ μωρὰ τοῦ κόσμου…τὰ ἀσθενῆ τοῦ κόσμου	1		Paul uses the possessive form twice to clarify that the foolish things and weak things are only foolish and weak from the perspective of the world. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a phrase such as “according to the world.” Alternate translation: “things that are foolish according to the world … things that are weak according to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
152	1CO	1	27	gdob	figs-synecdoche	τοῦ κόσμου	-1		When Paul uses the world in this context, he is not referring primarily to everything that God has made. Rather, he uses the world to refer to human beings. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that refers to human beings in general. Alternate translation: “of people … of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
153	1CO	1	27	iwho	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	-1		Here, the word translated in order that could introduce: (1) the purpose for which God chose the foolish things of the world and the weak things of the world. Alternate translation: “so that … so that” (2) what happened when God chose the foolish things of the world and the weak things of the world. Alternate translation: “with the result that … with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
154	1CO	1	27	vtzx	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς σοφούς…τὰ ἰσχυρά	1		Paul uses the adjective wise to describe a group of people, and he uses the adjective strong to describe a group of people and things. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these two adjectives with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are wise … people and things which are strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
155	1CO	1	28	tqxg	figs-parallelism	τοῦ κόσμου…ἐξελέξατο ὁ Θεός,…ἵνα	1		In this verse, Paul repeats many of the words from the parallel parts of previous verse. He does this because repeating the same idea with different examples was more convincing than just one example in his culture. If possible, translate these words the same way that you translated them in 1:27. If it is necessary, you could remove or change some of the words if it makes the sentence sound more convincing, which is what Paul intended. Alternate translation: “he chose … of the world … in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
156	1CO	1	28	k3kd	translate-unknown	τὰ ἀγενῆ	1	what is low and despised	The word translated base things is the opposite of the word translated “of noble birth” in 1:26. Paul uses it to refer to things and people that were not considered important or powerful in his culture. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to people and things that have low status or low importance. Alternate translation: “the marginalized things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
157	1CO	1	28	d5pa	translate-unknown	τὰ ἐξουθενημένα	1		While the word translated base things refers to a person's status or a thing's status, the word translated despised things refers to how people treat other people or things that have low status. Usually, people badly treat others whom they consider to be of lower status, ignoring them or mocking them. That is what Paul means when he says despised. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how people treat others of lower status badly. Alternate translation: “the scorned things” or “the things people treat with contempt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
158	1CO	1	28	wir6	figs-possession	τὰ ἀγενῆ τοῦ κόσμου καὶ τὰ ἐξουθενημένα	1		Here, Paul uses of the world to describe both the base things and the despised things. As in 1:27, he uses the possessive form to clarify that base things and the despised things are only base and despised from the perspective of the world. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a phrase such as “according to the world.” Alternate translation: “the base things and the despised things according to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
159	1CO	1	28	unyl	figs-synecdoche	τοῦ κόσμου	1		When Paul uses the world in this context, he is not referring primarily to everything that God has made. Rather, he uses the world to refer to human beings. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that refers to human beings in general. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche)
160	1CO	1	28	gj19	figs-hyperbole	τὰ μὴ ὄντα	1	nothing, to bring to nothing things that are held as valuable	Here, Paul further describes the base things and the despised things as if they were things that are not. He does not mean that the base and despised things do not exist. Instead, he is identifying how people often ignore the base and despised things, just as if they did not exist at all. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the things that people ignore” or “the nobodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
161	1CO	1	28	f11p	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	things that are held as valuable	Here, the word translated in order that could introduce: (1) the purpose for which God chose the base things and the despised things of the world, the things that are not. Alternate translation: “so that” (2) what happened when God chose the base things and the despised things of the world, the things that are not. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal)
162	1CO	1	28	f9s5	translate-unknown	καταργήσῃ	1		The word translated he might bring to nothing refers to making something ineffective, useless, or irrelevant. What Paul means is that God has made the things that are unimportant and without function because he instead worked through the things that are not. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that a person has acted so that something else is no longer important, useful, or effective. Alternate translation: “he might sideline” or “render ineffective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
163	1CO	1	28	etjg	figs-idiom	τὰ ὄντα	1		In this context, the things that are does not refer primarily to things that exist. Rather, it refers primarily to things that are important in society and culture. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that refers to important or significant things and people in your culture. Alternate translation: “the things that people care about” or “the somebodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
164	1CO	1	29	unr6	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ὅπως	1		The word translated so that introduces a final goal. In 1:28–29, Paul uses “in order that” to introduce immediate goals, but here, so that is the overall goal. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a final or overall goal, making sure to distinguish it from the words you used in 1:28–29, if possible. Alternate translation: “so that, in the end,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
165	1CO	1	29	q4gh	figs-idiom	μὴ…πᾶσα σὰρξ	1		Paul uses the word flesh to refer to humans. Unlike in other places in his letters, flesh does not indicate sinful and weak humanity. Instead, it simply refers to humans compared to their creator, God. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that commonly refers to people in general, especially if it includes the idea that people are created by God. Alternate translation: “no creature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
166	1CO	1	29	fdv5	figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul speaks of people not boasting before God, as if they were standing in front of God. With this way of talking, Paul means that people are acting as if they could see God and God could see them. This means that they recognize that God knows what they say and do. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that someone recognizes that God knows what they are doing and thinking. Alternate translation: “when they know that God sees them” or “while God looks on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
167	1CO	1	30	yk4y	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		The word translated But introduces a slight contrast between people who might boast and the Corinthians, who are united to Christ. However, But primarily means that Paul is moving to the next step in his argument. If But would not express this idea in your language, you could use a word that indicates that the author is moving on to the next step, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
168	1CO	1	30	fmr3	figs-activepassive	ἐξ αὐτοῦ…ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	because of him	While because of him, you are in Christ Jesus is not written the way most passive sentences are, this construction is like a passive sentence and may be difficult to represent in your language. What because of him means is that God is the source of how the Corinthians are in Christ Jesus. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could rephrase these words so that “God” is the subject who makes it so that you are in Christ Jesus. Alternate translation: “he puts you in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
169	1CO	1	30	alyj	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1		The word translated of him refers to God. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use the name “God” here. Alternate translation: “of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
170	1CO	1	30	a986	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Paul uses the spatial metaphor in Christ Jesus to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being in Christ Jesus, or united to Christ Jesus, explains how Christ Jesus can be wisdom, righteousness, sanctification, and redemption for the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
171	1CO	1	30	f1at	figs-metaphor	ὃς ἐγενήθη σοφία ἡμῖν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ, δικαιοσύνη τε, καὶ ἁγιασμὸς, καὶ ἀπολύτρωσις;	1	Christ Jesus, who was made for us wisdom from God	Here, Paul uses language and structure that is very similar to what he used in 1:24. Refer back to that verse to help you translate this verse. When Paul says that Jesus was made … wisdom and righteousness, and also sanctification and redemption, he does not mean that Jesus has become these abstract ideas. Instead, he means that Jesus is the source of wisdom, righteousness, sanctification, and redemption for us who are in Christ Jesus. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could include some clarifying words such as “the source of.” Alternate translation: “who was made for us the source of wisdom from God, the source of righteousness, and also the source of sanctification and redemption” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
172	1CO	1	30	lxpy	figs-activepassive	ὃς ἐγενήθη σοφία ἡμῖν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ	1		If you cannot write who was made for us wisdom from God in this form, you could state it in active form. Alternate translation: “whom God made for us wisdom from himself” or “whom God made for us wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
173	1CO	1	30	yyns	writing-pronouns	ὃς	1		The word who refers to Christ Jesus. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could write the name of Christ Jesus instead of using who or along with who. Alternate translation: “the Christ who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
174	1CO	1	30	g5um	figs-abstractnouns	σοφία…ἀπὸ Θεοῦ, δικαιοσύνη τε, καὶ ἁγιασμὸς, καὶ ἀπολύτρωσις	1		If you cannot write the abstract nouns wisdom, righteousness, sanctification, and redemption in your language, you could express their meaning by using verbs with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “a person through whom God taught us, judged us not guilty, and also set us apart for himself and set us free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
175	1CO	1	31	dm5h	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἵνα	1		Paul uses the word translated so that to introduce (1) the result of everything he has said about God being the one who chooses and acts. If you use one of the following alternate translations, you may need to add period before it. Alternate translation: “Because of all this” or “Therefore” (2) the purpose for which God chose the weak and foolish. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
176	1CO	1	31	gtv0	figs-ellipsis	ἵνα καθὼς γέγραπται	1		Here, Paul leaves out some words that might be required in your language to make a complete thought. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply the needed words, such as “we should do.” Alternate translation: “so that we should behave just as it is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
177	1CO	1	31	paga	figs-infostructure	καθὼς γέγραπται, ὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω	1		If it would be unnatural in your language to put just as it is written before the quotation, you could put just as it is written at the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “‘Let the one who boasts, boast in the Lord,’ just as it is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
178	1CO	1	31	ebvw	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		In Paul’s culture, just as it is written is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book written by Jeremiah the prophet. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament” or “according to Jeremiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
179	1CO	1	31	fym9	figs-imperative	ὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω	1	Let the one who boasts, boast in the Lord	Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could (1) translate this one as a conditional sentence, adding “if.” Alternate translation: “If people want to boast, they should boast in the Lord” (2) translate this one using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “Anyone who boasts should boast in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
180	1CO	1	31	mo0q	figs-idiom	ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω	1		When Paul says that someone can boast in the Lord, he does not mean that they are inside the Lord. Rather, he means that they are boasting about the Lord and what he has done. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that someone is boasting about someone else. Alternate translation: “Let … boast with reference to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
181	1CO	2	intro	k86p			0		1 Corinthians 2 General Notes Structure and formatting Against divisions (1:10–4:15) Paul’s attitude among the Corinthians (2:1–5) The wisdom of God, revealed by the Spirit (2:6–16) Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verses 9 and 16, which are from the Old Testament. Verse 9 quotes from Isaiah 64:4, and verse 16 quotes from Isaiah 40. Special concepts in this chapter Wisdom and foolishness Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both wisdom and foolishness. Just as in chapter one, these words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. Continue to use the words you chose in chapter one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fool]]) Power and weakness Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both power and weakness. Just as in chapter one, these words primarily refer to how much influence and authority a person has and to how much they can accomplish. Someone who has “power” has much influence and authority and can accomplish many things. Someone who has “weakness” does not have much influence and authority and is not able to accomplish many things. Continue to use the words that you chose in chapter one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/power]]) The Spirit Paul first mentions the “Spirit” in this chapter. In most places where this word appears, it refers to God’s Spirit (the Holy Spirit), who is the third person of the Trinity. However, in two places in this chapter, the word “spirit” refers to something else. First, “spirit of the world” in 2:12 refers to a “spirit” that is not God’s Spirit and that originates from within the world. Paul says that this kind of “spirit” is not the kind that believers in Jesus have received. Second, the “spirit of a man” in 2:11 refers to the non-physical part of a person. It does not refer to God’s Spirit or to something that God’s Spirit replaces. Sometimes Paul uses the adjective form “spiritual” (2:13; 2:15) and the adverb form “spiritually” (2:14). Both of these forms also refer to God’s Spirit. If someone or something is “spiritual,” that means that the person or thing has or is characterized by God’s Spirit. If something is done “spiritually,” that means that it is done by the power of God’s Spirit. Once, Paul uses the word “natural” (2:14), which is the opposite of “spiritual.” “Natural” means that the person or thing does not have and is not characterized by God’s Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]]) The Mystery Paul speaks of a “mystery” in 2:1; 2:7. This “mystery” is not some secret truth that is hard to understand and that only a few privileged individuals can learn about. Instead, it refers to God’s plans that once were unknown but are now known to all his people. As Paul has already stated in chapter one, these plans center around the cross, which seems to be foolishness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]]) Important figures of speech in this chapter The deep things of God In 2:10, Paul says that the Spirit searches “the deep things of God.” Paul talks about God as if he were a well or a lake with parts that are deep down in order to identify things about God that humans cannot understand or find it difficult to understand. He does not mean that God is a being or location with deep parts. See the note on this verse for translation options. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter The rulers of this age In 2:6; 2:8, Paul speaks about “the rulers of this age.” This phrase refers to individuals who have power in the created world during the time between Christ’s first and second comings. While Paul does not state whether these individuals with power are humans or spiritual beings, he does say that they were the ones who crucified Jesus (2:8). This suggests that they are humans, and they would be people like governors, emperors, and unfaithful religious leaders. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/ruler]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/age]]) Positive and negative uses of “wisdom” Just as in chapter one, Paul continues to speak about wisdom in both positive and negative ways. He uses the same words throughout the chapter, and he distinguishes between positive and negative meanings by connecting the words to different people or ideas. For example, he speaks of wisdom negatively when it is the wisdom of the world, or the wisdom of humans. However, he speaks of wisdom positively when it is wisdom from God or wisdom given by God. If possible, translate the negative and positive meanings of wisdom with the same word, just as Paul uses one word for both negative and positive. If you must use different words, use positive words for God’s wisdom and negative words for human wisdom. First person singular and plural Paul uses the first person singular in 2:1–5 because in these verses he speaks of his own time among the Corinthians. He switches to the first person plural in 2:6–16 because in these verses he is speaking more generally about everyone who proclaims the Gospel as he does. In 2:6–16, the first person plural sometimes includes the Corinthians and sometimes does not include the Corinthians. Throughout the chapter, the first person plural will include the Corinthians unless a note specifies that it does not include them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
182	1CO	2	1	pxmq	grammar-connect-words-phrases	κἀγὼ	1		Here, the word translated And I introduces how Paul himself fits into the pattern he introduced in the last chapter. Just as God chooses the weak and the foolish, Paul preaches the Gospel in weak and foolish ways. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that introduces an example or a comparison. Alternate translation: “In the same way, I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
183	1CO	2	1	qvj7	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although the word translated brothers is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to both men or women. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
184	1CO	2	1	koh8	figs-explicitinfo	ἐλθὼν πρὸς ὑμᾶς…ἦλθον οὐ	1		Here, Paul twice says that he has come to them. This is a structure that makes sense in Paul’s language. However, if this repetition would be misunderstood in your language, you could: (1) translate the first come with a different word, such as “visit.” Alternate translation: “having visited you, did not come” (2) combine these two phrases. Alternate translation: “did not come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
185	1CO	2	1	o0vw	grammar-connect-time-background	ἐλθὼν πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1		The phrase having come to you gives background information. It describes what happened before Paul did not come with superiority of speech or of wisdom. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify by using a word that introduces action that has already occurred. Alternate translation: “after I came to you” or “when I came to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
186	1CO	2	1	o3ks	figs-possession	ὑπεροχὴν λόγου ἢ σοφίας	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe speech and wisdom that have superiority. If the meaning of this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating superiority as an adjective. Alternate translation: “superior speech or superior wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
187	1CO	2	1	ikmt	translate-unknown	ὑπεροχὴν λόγου ἢ σοφίας	1		The word translated superiority refers to how something or someone has more authority, skill, knowledge, or power than something or someone else. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable word or a short description. Alternate translation: “greatness of speech or of wisdom” or “speech or wisdom that was better than what others have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
188	1CO	2	1	kxie	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	καταγγέλλων ὑμῖν τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		The phrase proclaiming to you the mystery of God gives the situation in which Paul did not come with superiority of speech or of wisdom. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could make it explicit by including a word that indicates that these things are happening at the same time. Alternate translation: “when I proclaimed to you the mystery of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
189	1CO	2	1	nam8	figs-possession	τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a mystery that is: (1) revealed by God. Alternate translation: “the mystery given by God” or “the mystery from God” (2) about God. Alternate translation: “the mystery about God” or “the mystery concerning God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
190	1CO	2	2	a2g9	figs-hyperbole	οὐ…ἔκρινά τι εἰδέναι ἐν ὑμῖν, εἰ μὴ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν	1	I decided to know nothing … except Jesus Christ	Here, Paul speaks as if he decides to forget all his knowledge and become ignorant of everything except for Jesus Christ. This is an exaggeration that Paul uses to emphasize his focus on Jesus Christ as the one thing he wished to tell the Corinthians about. If this exaggeration would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that it is an exaggeration or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I decided to speak among you only about Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
191	1CO	2	2	nk9r	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐ…ἔκρινά τι εἰδέναι ἐν ὑμῖν, εἰ μὴ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν, καὶ τοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον	1		If it would appear in your language that Paul makes a strong statement about knowing nothing and then contradicts it, you could reword this sentence so that there is no except. Alternate translation: “I decided that I would only know among you Jesus Christ and him crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
192	1CO	2	2	zvge	figs-activepassive	τοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form, using a phrase such as “he died on the cross” or adding a vague subject. Alternate translation: “how they crucified him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
193	1CO	2	3	xen3	grammar-connect-words-phrases	κἀγὼ	1		Here, the word translated And I is the same word Paul used to introduce 2:1. It again introduces how Paul himself fits into the pattern he introduced in the last chapter. Just as God chooses the weak and the foolish, Paul himself was weak and foolish. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that introduces an example or a comparison. Alternate translation: “Just as I did not use superior words and wisdom, I myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
194	1CO	2	3	s9lp		κἀγὼ…ἐγενόμην πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	I was with you	Alternate translation: “And I remained with you”
195	1CO	2	3	e8li	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ, καὶ ἐν φόβῳ, καὶ ἐν τρόμῳ πολλῷ,	1	in weakness	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the abstract nouns weakness, fear, and trembling with adjectives or verbs. Alternate translation: “as a weak, afraid, and frequently trembling person” or “while I ailed, feared, and often trembled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
196	1CO	2	4	lewv	figs-ellipsis	ὁ λόγος μου καὶ τὸ κήρυγμά μου, οὐκ ἐν πειθοῖς σοφίας λόγοις	1		Here, Paul does not use the verb were in his sentence. In English, this word is essential, so it has been included in the ULT. If you can translate this sentence without were, you could do so here. Otherwise, you could retain were as it appears in the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
197	1CO	2	4	g5my	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ λόγος μου καὶ τὸ κήρυγμά μου, οὐκ	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns word and proclamation with verbs. Alternate translation: “I spoke and proclaimed a message not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
198	1CO	2	4	m23e	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πειθοῖς σοφίας λόγοις	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun words with a verb such as “speak” and the idea behind the abstract noun wisdom with an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “based on speaking persuasively and wisely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
199	1CO	2	4	hl7e	figs-possession	σοφίας λόγοις	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to identify the words as containing wisdom. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating wisdom with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “wise words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
200	1CO	2	4	chtx	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀποδείξει Πνεύματος καὶ δυνάμεως;	1		Here, Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If the sentence would be misunderstood without these words, you could add them here, supplying the idea from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “but my word and my proclamation were with a demonstration of the Spirit and of power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
201	1CO	2	4	kgnb	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀποδείξει Πνεύματος καὶ δυνάμεως	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns demonstration and power with verbs. Alternate translation: “based on demonstrating the Spirit and how he works powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
202	1CO	2	4	qrfj	figs-possession	ἀποδείξει Πνεύματος καὶ δυνάμεως	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a demonstration that: (1) comes from the Spirit and power. Alternate translation: “a demonstration by the Spirit and by power” (2) proves that the Spirit and power are present. Alternate translation: “a demonstration of the presence of the Spirit and of power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
203	1CO	2	4	s83h	translate-unknown	ἀποδείξει	1		The word translated demonstration refers to proving or showing that something is true. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “a validation” or “a confirmation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
204	1CO	2	4	s6h6	figs-hendiadys	Πνεύματος καὶ δυνάμεως	1		This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word Spirit tells who is acting in power. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “of the Spirit’s power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
205	1CO	2	5	av3t	figs-idiom	ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν, μὴ ᾖ ἐν σοφίᾳ ἀνθρώπων, ἀλλ’ ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ	1		Here, the phrase translated faith … in refers to believing something (faith) based on (in) something else. It does not refer, as it does in many other places, to believing in or trusting in something. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use translate in with a word or phrase that indicates the basis of the faith. Alternate translation: “your faith might not be based on the wisdom of men but based on the power of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
206	1CO	2	5	ovoj	figs-activepassive	ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν, μὴ ᾖ	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form by translating faith with a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Alternate translation: “you might believe not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
207	1CO	2	5	rkoy	figs-possession	σοφίᾳ ἀνθρώπων	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe what men think is wisdom. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating men with an adjective such as “human.” Alternate translation: “in human wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
208	1CO	2	5	cdw7	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1		Although the word translated men is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
209	1CO	2	5	b29d	figs-possession	δυνάμει Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to speak of power that God has and shows. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating power as a verb or adverb with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God working powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
210	1CO	2	6	azm7	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Now we do speak	Here, the word translated Now introduces a contrast with what Paul has said in 2:4–5. In those verses, he said that he did not speak with wisdom. In this verse, however, he clarifies that he does speak with a kind of wisdom. If Now would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “In spite of this,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
211	1CO	2	6	uena	figs-exclusive	λαλοῦμεν	1		Here, we refers to Paul and others like him who preach the Gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
212	1CO	2	6	uka3	figs-abstractnouns	σοφίαν	-1	speak wisdom	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun wisdom by using an adverb such as “wisely” or an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “wisely … the wise speech” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
213	1CO	2	6	eq1q	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς τελείοις	1	the mature	Paul is using the adjective mature as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate mature with a noun phrase or a relative clause. Alternate translation: “those who are mature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
214	1CO	2	6	tm2e	figs-possession	σοφίαν δὲ, οὐ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου, οὐδὲ τῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe wisdom that fits with the standards and values of this age and that rulers of this age value. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “but not wisdom that fits with this age nor wisdom that the rulers of this age value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
215	1CO	2	6	xn85	figs-ellipsis	σοφίαν δὲ, οὐ	1		Here, Paul omits some words that may be needed in your language to make this a complete thought. If so, you could supply words from early in the verse. Alternate translation: “but we do not speak wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
216	1CO	2	6	xydl	figs-possession	τῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe rulers who are in power during this age. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using language about the time in which the rulers have power or the place in which they have power. Alternate translation: “of the rulers who have power now” or “of the rulers who control this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
217	1CO	2	6	endk	translate-unknown	τῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		The rulers of this age could refer to: (1) humans who have power. Alternate translation: “of the people who rule this age” (2) spiritual beings that have power. Alternate translation: “of the spiritual powers that rule this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
218	1CO	2	6	tbnh	translate-unknown	τῶν καταργουμένων	1		Paul has already used the word translated passing away in 1:28, where it is translated bring to nothing. Here, the word means that the rulers are becoming ineffective, useless, or irrelevant, which means that they will no longer have power. If possible, translate this word like you did in 1:28. Alternate translation: “who are becoming ineffective” or “who are losing their power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
219	1CO	2	7	l064	figs-exclusive	λαλοῦμεν…ἡμῶν	1		Here, the word we refers to Paul and anyone who preaches the Gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. However, the word our does include the Corinthians along with Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
220	1CO	2	7	bsme	figs-possession	Θεοῦ σοφίαν	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe wisdom that God would consider to be true wisdom. This also means that the wisdom comes from God. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that the wisdom comes from God. Alternate translation: “the wisdom from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
221	1CO	2	7	wy8u	figs-abstractnouns	σοφίαν	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun wisdom by using an adverb such as “wisely” or an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise message” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)
222	1CO	2	7	xbye	figs-explicitinfo	ἐν μυστηρίῳ τὴν ἀποκεκρυμμένην	1		Here, Paul uses both has been hidden and in a mystery. Both of these phrases refer to something that is secret. If using both of these phrases is redundant and would be misunderstood in your language, you could use only one. Alternate translation: “that has been hidden” or “that is a mystery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
223	1CO	2	7	fd3s	figs-activepassive	τὴν ἀποκεκρυμμένην	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “that God has hidden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
224	1CO	2	7	ctb4	writing-pronouns	ἣν	1		The word translated that refers to the wisdom, not a mystery. If what that refers to would be misunderstood in your language, you could repeat wisdom here. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
225	1CO	2	7	k2ct	figs-idiom	πρὸ τῶν αἰώνων	1	before the ages	Paul uses the phrase translated before the ages to say that God predestined before he made anything. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “before the beginning of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
226	1CO	2	7	q2z9	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς δόξαν ἡμῶν	1	for our glory	Here, the phrase translated for our glory introduces the purpose for which God predestined the wisdom. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “so that we might have glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
227	1CO	2	8	bw5i	writing-pronouns	ἣν	1		Just as in 2:7, the word translated which refers to “the wisdom,” not to “a mystery.” If what which refers to would be misunderstood in your language, you could repeat “wisdom” here. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns)
228	1CO	2	8	imbk	figs-possession	τῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		Just as in 2:6, Paul uses the possessive form to describe rulers who are in power during this age. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using language about the time in which the rulers have power or the place in which they have power. Alternate translation: “of the rulers who have power now” or “of the rulers who control this world” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession)
229	1CO	2	8	ur15	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		The word translated for introduces Paul’s proof that the rulers did not understand. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea using a word that customarily introduces proof or evidence. Alternate translation: “which is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
230	1CO	2	8	ji1o	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ…ἔγνωσαν, οὐκ ἂν τὸν Κύριον τῆς δόξης ἐσταύρωσαν;	1		Here, Paul uses if to introduce a scenario that he knows is not true. He wants to point out that the rulers were the ones who crucified Jesus, and this proves that they did not understand God’s wisdom. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by reversing the two clauses and making they understood it negative and they would not have crucified the Lord of glory positive. Alternate translation: “they crucified the Lord glory, which means that they did not understand it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
231	1CO	2	8	zc89	figs-possession	τὸν Κύριον τῆς δόξης	1	the Lord of glory	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe the Lord who has glory. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating glory with an adjective or a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the Lord who has glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
232	1CO	2	9	fu1y	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Things that no eye … arisen, the things … who love him	The word translated But introduces a contrast with the hypothetical statement in 2:8 about how the rulers would not have crucified the Lord if they had understood God’s wisdom. The But reminds the reader that this hypothetical statement is not true, and Paul wishes to introduce further statements about how people do not understand God’s wisdom. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave But untranslated or use a word or phrase that would signal that Paul is now longer speaking hypothetically. Alternate translation: “But no,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
233	1CO	2	9	wuar	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ καθὼς γέγραπται	1		Here, Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary in your language to form a complete thought. If necessary, you can supply a summary from 2:8 of what the rulers did not understand and how they acted. Alternate translation: “But the rulers did not understand, just as it is written” or “But the rulers did do these things, just as it is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
234	1CO	2	9	qcb2	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		In Paul’s culture,** just as it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book written by Isaiah the prophet. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament” or “according to Isaiah the prophet” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations)
235	1CO	2	9	pt3m	figs-infostructure	ἃ ὀφθαλμὸς οὐκ εἶδεν, καὶ οὖς οὐκ ἤκουσεν, καὶ ἐπὶ καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἀνέβη, ἃ ἡτοίμασεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς ἀγαπῶσιν αὐτόν	1		In this quotation, What eye has not seen, and ear has not heard, and has not arisen in the heart of man are the things God has prepared. If hearing What eye has not seen, and ear has not heard, and has not arisen in the heart of man before God has prepared would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse the order. Alternate translation: “God has prepared for those who love him what eye has not seen, and ear has not heard, and has not arisen in the heart of man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
236	1CO	2	9	j9ib	figs-synecdoche	ἃ ὀφθαλμὸς οὐκ εἶδεν, καὶ οὖς οὐκ ἤκουσεν, καὶ ἐπὶ καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἀνέβη	1	Things that no eye has seen, no ear has heard, no mind has imagined	Here, the words eye, ear, and heart refer to the parts of the person that see, hear, and think. In each case, the word means that the whole person sees, hears, and thinks. If this way of speaking would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that refers to a person as a whole instead of just a part of that person. Alternate translation: “What a person has not seen, and a person has not heard, and has not arisen when a person thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
237	1CO	2	9	xe03	figs-idiom	ἐπὶ καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἀνέβη	1		The phrase heart of man refers to the place where humans think. If something “arises” there, that means that a human has thought about that thing. If the meaning of arisen in the heart of man would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “man has not thought about” or “man has not imagined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
238	1CO	2	9	pigi	figs-possession	καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a heart that belongs to a man. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate man with an adjective such as “human.” Alternate translation: “the human heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
239	1CO	2	9	yw0a	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπου	1		Although the word translated man is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
240	1CO	2	9	us5y	grammar-collectivenouns	ἀνθρώπου	1		Here, even though man is written in singular form, it refers to anyone who would be considered a man, that is, any human. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you can make man plural. Alternate translation: “of men” or “of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
241	1CO	2	10	z472	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		The word translated For introduces an explanation of the last line of the quote from 2:9: “these things God has prepared for those who love him.” Paul wants to explain that these are the things that God has revealed to those who believe. If the meaning of For would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave the word untranslated or use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
242	1CO	2	10	hp6w	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	2		Here, the word translated For introduces an explanation for why God’s revelation is made to us through the Spirit. It is because the Spirit searches everything and knows everything that is revealed. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces this kind of explanation. Alternate translation: “He works through the Spirit because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
243	1CO	2	10	zccl	translate-unknown	ἐραυνᾷ	1		Here, the word translated searches refers to how someone can explore or know about something else. If the meaning of searches would be misunderstood in your language, you could use another word for “exploring” or “knowing.” Alternate translation: “comprehends” or “knows about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
244	1CO	2	10	bhyv	translate-unknown	τὰ βάθη τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		The phrase deep things of God refers to things about God that are hard to understand or things about God that no one can fully comprehend. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression or state the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “secrets about God” or “things about God that no one knows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
245	1CO	2	11	h4p8	figs-rquestion	τίς γὰρ οἶδεν ἀνθρώπων τὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, εἰ μὴ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ?	1	For who knows a person’s thoughts except the spirit of the person in him?	Here, Paul uses question because he thinks that everyone will agree with him, for this information is common knowledge in his culture. He does not use a question because he is not sure about the answer. If using a question here would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a form that presents information that everyone knows and agrees with. Alternate translation: “For it is a well-known fact that no one among men knows the things of a man except the spirit of the man that {is} within him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
246	1CO	2	11	gw3u	grammar-connect-exceptions	τίς γὰρ οἶδεν ἀνθρώπων τὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, εἰ μὴ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ? οὕτως καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐδεὶς ἔγνωκεν, εἰ μὴ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ.	1	no one knows the deep things of God except the Spirit of God	In both parts of this verse, Paul makes a negative claim and then gives an exception to that claim. If it would appear in your language that Paul is contradicting himself, you could use a different structure that also singles out one possibility and negates all other possibilities. Alternate translation: “For the spirit of the man that {is} within him is the only one among men that knows the things of a man, right? So also, the Spirit of God is the only one that knows the things of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
247	1CO	2	11	li8e	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων…ἀνθρώπου…τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ	1		Although the words translated men, man, and him are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “among people … of a person … of the person that {is} within that person” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
248	1CO	2	11	lmzi	figs-genericnoun	ἀνθρώπου…τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ	1		Paul uses the word man to speak of people in general, not one specific person. If the meaning of man would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a form that indicates people in general in your language. Alternate translation: “of a certain man … of that certain man that {is} within him” or “of men … of men that {is} within them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
249	1CO	2	11	wfr2	figs-idiom	τίς…ἀνθρώπων	1		The phrase who among men is a way of asking about people or things that belong to a specific category. Paul means to ask if there are any men who can know the things of a man. He uses this phrase because God also knows the things of a man, so he must limit his question to only men. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase that asks about people or things, but only those that belong in a specific category. Alternate translation: “which man” or “out of all men, who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
250	1CO	2	11	mi27	figs-idiom	τὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου…τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the phrases the things of a man and the things of God to refer to everything that makes up the person, including personality, thoughts, actions, desires, possessions, and many more similar categories. Paul is intentionally general and does not narrow down which of these categories he has in mind. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that refers to all the aspects of a person that makes that person unique. Alternate translation: “all the details about a man … all the details about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
251	1CO	2	11	i47d	translate-unknown	τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ	1	spirit of the person	The word translated spirit is the same word that Paul uses for the Holy Spirit. It refers to the interior life of a person, to the part of them that people cannot see, including their thoughts and desires. If possible, use the same word here that you will use later in the verse for the Spirit, since Paul is drawing an analogy between the human spirit and God’s Spirit. If you cannot use the word for God’s Spirit to describe a human being, you could: (1) refer simply to a human without specifying which part of the human knows. Alternate translation: “the man himself” (2) use an expression that refers to the interior life of a human. Alternate translation: “the consciousness of the man that {is} within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
252	1CO	2	11	to3t	figs-idiom	τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ	1		In this culture, people would speak of the non-physical part of human beings as if it were inside the physical part of human beings. Here, Paul speaks in this way when he says that the spirit of the man is within him. By using within him, Paul is identifying the spirit as the one that belongs to the man. It is not some other man’s spirit. If the meaning of within him would be misunderstood in your language, you could: (1) use a word or phrase that identifies that the spirit belongs to the man only. Alternate translation: “that man’s own spirit” (2) express the idea by using a phrase that describes where a human being’s non-physical part would be in your culture. Alternate translation: “the spirit of the man that permeates him” or “the spirit of the man that suffuses him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
253	1CO	2	12	zbv8	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	General Information:	Here, the word translated But introduces the next part of Paul’s argument. If the meaning of But would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave it untranslated or use a word or phrase that signifies that the argument is moving on. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
254	1CO	2	12	evts	figs-infostructure	ἡμεῖς…οὐ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κόσμου ἐλάβομεν, ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If stating the negative before the positive would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse the order of the not statement and the but statement. Alternate translation: “we received the Spirit who {is} from God, not the spirit of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
255	1CO	2	12	emse	translate-unknown	τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κόσμου	1		The phrase spirit of the world could refer to: (1) a spirit that does not actually exist. In other words, Paul is saying that the Spirit they received did not come from the world but rather came from God. Alternate translation: “a spirit that comes from the world” (2) human ways of thinking and understanding, which could be called a spirit. In other words, Paul is saying that they did not receive human ways of thinking but rather ways of thinking that God’s Spirit brings. Alternate translation: “human ways of thinking” ((See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
256	1CO	2	12	ev7j	figs-possession	τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κόσμου	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a spirit that comes from or has its source in the world. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that the world is the source or origin of this spirit. Alternate translation: “the spirit from the world” or “the spirit that comes from the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
257	1CO	2	12	vw4v	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα	1		Here, Paul omits some words that may be needed in your language to make a complete thought. If this shortened form would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply some words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but we received the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
258	1CO	2	12	w1qd	figs-activepassive	τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could make God the subject of the who statement. Alternate translation: “the Spirit whom God sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
259	1CO	2	12	n1c7	figs-activepassive	τὰ ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ χαρισθέντα ἡμῖν	1	freely given to us by God	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that God has freely given to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
260	1CO	2	13	nan2	figs-exclusive	λαλοῦμεν	1		Here, the word we refers to Paul and others who proclaim the Gospel with him. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive)
261	1CO	2	13	u797	figs-infostructure	οὐκ ἐν διδακτοῖς ἀνθρωπίνης σοφίας λόγοις, ἀλλ’ ἐν διδακτοῖς Πνεύματος	1	The Spirit interprets spiritual words with spiritual wisdom	If putting the negative statement before the positive statement would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse them, putting words with the positive statement. Alternate translation: “in words taught by the Spirit, not in those taught by human wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
262	1CO	2	13	yg45	figs-activepassive	διδακτοῖς ἀνθρωπίνης σοφίας λόγοις	1	The Spirit interprets spiritual words with spiritual wisdom	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “words that human wisdom teaches” or “words that humans teach as wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
263	1CO	2	13	ywbw	figs-activepassive	διδακτοῖς Πνεύματος	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “those that the Spirit teaches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
264	1CO	2	13	gueq	translate-unknown	πνευματικοῖς πνευματικὰ συνκρίνοντες	1		Here, the phrase combining spiritual things with spiritual words could mean: (1) that Paul and those with him interpret spiritual things and ideas with spiritual words. Alternate translation: “interpreting spiritual things with spiritual words” (2) that Paul and those with him explain spiritual things to spiritual people. Alternate translation: “explaining spiritual things to spiritual people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
265	1CO	2	13	kinz	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	συνκρίνοντες	1		Here, the word translated combining introduces an action that takes place at the same time as when we speak. The idea is that combining spiritual things with spiritual words is the way that we speak these things. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by including a word or phrase that indicates that combining is the way in which we speak. Alternate translation: “by means of combining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
266	1CO	2	13	mnpq	translate-unknown	συνκρίνοντες	1		The word translated combining could mean: (1) interpreting or explaining an idea. Alternate translation: “interpreting” (2) putting two things together, either to compare or blend them together. Alternate translation: “comparing” or “compounding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
267	1CO	2	14	i8jw	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		The word translated But introduces a new part of Paul’s argument, and it also introduces a contrast with how Paul and those with him speak by the power of the Spirit in 2:13. Unlike Paul and those with him, the natural person does not have the Spirit and does not use spiritual words. If the meaning of But would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave it untranslated or use a word that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
268	1CO	2	14	hq3u	translate-unknown	ψυχικὸς…ἄνθρωπος	1	unspiritual person	The phrase the natural person describes a person who does not have God’s Spirit. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that describes someone who has not received God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “the person without the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
269	1CO	2	14	cve2	figs-genericnoun	ψυχικὸς…ἄνθρωπος, οὐ δέχεται…αὐτῷ…οὐ δύναται	1	General Information:	Paul uses the words person, him, and he to speak of people in general, not one specific man. If the meaning of these words would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a form that indicates people in general in your language. Alternate translation: “any natural person does not receive … to him or her … he or she is not able” or “natural people do not receive … to them … they are not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
270	1CO	2	14	vvju	figs-gendernotations	αὐτῷ…οὐ δύναται	1		Here, the words translated him and he are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of he and him would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “to that person … that person is not able” or “to him or her … he or she is not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
271	1CO	2	14	fye5	figs-activepassive	μωρία…αὐτῷ ἐστίν	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could reverse the structure and make him the subject of a verb such as “think” or “consider.” Alternate translation: “for he thinks that they are foolishness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
272	1CO	2	14	gwe3	figs-activepassive	πνευματικῶς ἀνακρίνεται	1	because they are spiritually discerned	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form with vague or non-specific subject. Alternate translation: “people can only discern them spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
273	1CO	2	14	vznr		πνευματικῶς ἀνακρίνεται	1		Alternate translation: “they are discerned by the power of the Spirit” or “they are discerned by people who are indwelt by the Spirit”
274	1CO	2	15	w4q7	translate-unknown	ὁ…πνευματικὸς	1	the one who is spiritual	Here, Paul uses the spiritual one as the opposite of “the natural person” in 2:14. The phrase the spiritual one describes a person who does have God’s Spirit. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that describes someone who has received God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “the person with the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
275	1CO	2	15	gcv7	figs-genericnoun	ὁ…πνευματικὸς ἀνακρίνει…αὐτὸς…ἀνακρίνεται	1		Paul uses the words spiritual one and he himself to speak of people in general, not one specific man. If the meaning of these words would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a form that indicates people in general. Alternate translation: “any spiritual person discerns … he himself or she herself” or “spiritual people discern … they themselves are discerned” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun)
276	1CO	2	15	ap89	figs-hyperbole	τὰ πάντα	1		Here, Paul uses phrase translated all things as an exaggeration to emphasize that the spiritual one can discern God’s gifts and the message of the Gospel. He does not mean that every spiritual person is able to discern everything there is to know. If this exaggeration would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “many things,” and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “many things indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
277	1CO	2	15	ji5n	figs-activepassive	αὐτὸς…ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς ἀνακρίνεται	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “no one discerns him himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
278	1CO	2	15	ypl6	figs-gendernotations	αὐτὸς…ἀνακρίνεται	1		Here, the words translated he himself are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of he himself would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “that person is discerned” or “he himself or she herself is discerned” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
279	1CO	2	15	zg4b	figs-explicit	αὐτὸς…ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς ἀνακρίνεται	1		Here, Paul wishes to say that it is impossible for someone without the Spirit to properly understand or make judgments about the person who does have the Spirit. If this implication would be missed by your readers, you could make it more explicit that Paul speaking about the possibility of someone without the Spirit “discerning” someone with the Spirit. Alternate translation: “he himself cannot be discerned by anyone who is not spiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
280	1CO	2	16	ye98	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word translated For introduces proof from Scripture to support what Paul has said about the “natural person” and the “spiritual” person in 2:14–15. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is introducing proof. Alternate translation: “You can tell that these things are true because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
281	1CO	2	16	tj79	writing-quotations	γὰρ	1		The word translated For is the only word that Paul has used to introduce this quotation from the Old Testament, in this case, from the book written by Isaiah the prophet. If introducing a quotation in this way would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For, as it can be read in the Old Testament,” or “For, according to Isaiah the prophet,” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
282	1CO	2	16	m4pu	figs-rquestion	τίς…ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ὃς συμβιβάσει αὐτόν?	1	For who can know the mind of the Lord, that he can instruct him?	Here, the passage that Paul quotes from the book of Isaiah uses a question to indicate that no human has known the mind of the Lord, and no human will instruct him. The question is not asking for information. Instead, it assumes that the answer is “no one,” and the author uses a question to make a negative claim that is stronger than a simple statement. If the question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “no one has known the mind of the Lord—no one will instruct him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
283	1CO	2	16	wacc	figs-possession	νοῦν Κυρίου	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a mind that the Lord has or uses. If it would be misunderstood that the Lord is one who is thinking with the mind, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “the thoughts that the Lord thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
284	1CO	2	16	r18k	figs-metaphor	νοῦν Χριστοῦ ἔχομεν	1		Here, Paul speaks as if we are people who possess the mind of Christ. Paul means that we are able to understand what Christ thinks and share the same ways of thinking with him. He does not mean that we have taken Christ’s mind from him or that we no longer have our own mind. If “having someone else’s mind” would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or with a verb such as “share.” Alternate translation: “think the same thoughts as Christ does” or “share in the mind of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
285	1CO	2	16	pr9b	figs-possession	νοῦν Χριστοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a mind that Christ has or uses. If it would be misunderstood that Christ is one who is thinking with the mind, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “the thoughts that Christ thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
286	1CO	3	intro	g6ku			0		1 Corinthians 3 General Notes Structure and formatting Against divisions (1:10–4:15) Paul identifies the divisions (3:1–5) Farming metaphor (3:6–9a) Building metaphor (3:9b–15 Temple metaphor (3:16–17) Wisdom and folly (3:18–20) All things are yours (3:21–23) Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verses 19 and 20. Verse 19 quotes from Job 5:13, and verse 20 quotes from Psalm 94:11. Special concepts in this chapter Fleshly people In 3:1–4, Paul calls the Corinthian believers “fleshly.” In 3:3, he defines “fleshly” as “walking according to men.” The word “fleshly” thus refers to people who think and behave from a merely human point of view, without thinking and behaving from God’s perspective. The opposite of “fleshly” is “spiritual,” which refers to those who think and behave by the power of the Spirit (see 3:1). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]]) Fire and judgment In Paul’s culture, fire was commonly associated with the day when God would come to judge everyone. Paul uses this association when he makes use of the metaphor of a building. When a building catches on fire, it shows how well it was build. Similarly, when the fire of God’s judgment comes, it will show who has taught the gospel correctly. Fire fits within the metaphor of a building, but it is not just a part of that metaphor. If it is possible, retain the language of fire for God’s judgment. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judgmentday]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]]) Wisdom and Foolishness Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both wisdom and foolishness. Just as in chapters one and two, these words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. Continue to use the words you chose in chapters one and two. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fool]]) Important figures of speech in this chapter Infants and food metaphor In 3:1–2, Paul speaks as if the Corinthians are infants who were, and still are, unable to eat any solid food but can only drink milk. By speaking about them as if they were infants, Paul wishes to tell the Corinthians that they are spiritually immature. They are immature enough that they can only drink milk. Paul uses “milk” to refer to the very basic teachings about Christ, while he uses “solid food” to refer to the more advanced teachings. In translating this metaphor, use words that identify what very small children can eat (milk) and what they cannot eat (solid food). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) Farming metaphor In 3:6–9a, Paul speaks as if he and Apollos were farmers. Paul first proclaimed the gospel to the Corinthians, so he is like a farmer who plants seeds. Apollos taught the Corinthians more about the gospel, so he is like a farmer who waters the plants when they start to grow. However, God is the one who makes seeds grow into plants and the one who enables believers to accept and learn more about the gospel. With this metaphor, Paul wishes to emphasize that he and Apollos are equal in that they both teach about the gospel. However, neither one of them is significant in comparison to God, who is the one who actually enables people to accept and believe in the gospel. If possible, preserve the farming metaphor, even if you need to adjust some of the details. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) Building metaphor In 3:9b–15, Paul speaks of the Corinthians as if they were a house. Paul is the one who laid the house's foundation, because he was the one who first proclaimed the gospel to them. Other people, whom Paul does not name, build on the foundation. They are the ones who are teaching the Corinthians more, whether what they teach is correct or not. Paul then says that the building will catch on fire, and what each of these builders used to construct the house will become clear. If they built with durable materials, they will be rewarded, but if they built with materials that burn, they will suffer loss, and the builders themselves will barely escape from the fire. In speaking this way, Paul is warning those who teach more about the gospel that God himself will judge whether what they teach is correct or not. If it is incorrect, those teachers will lose everything and barely be saved themselves. If it is correct, God will honor and reward those teachers. If possible, preserve the building metaphor, even if you need to adjust some of the details. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) Temple metaphor In 3:16–17, Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were God’s temple. By speaking this way, he identifies the Corinthian believers as a place where God is specially present. Paul then notes that anyone who does anything to harm God’s temple will be punished by God. Since the Corinthians are like God’s temple, God will punish anyone who does anything to harm them, including if anyone tries to divide them up into different groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) Rhetorical questions Paul asks many questions in this chapter (3:3–5; 16). He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter Christ is God’s In 3:23, Paul says that “Christ is God’s.” He does not mean that Christ is a person who belongs to God, but is not God. Rather, he means that Christ is part of who God is. Christ belongs to the being of God. In your translation, you should to try to preserve this meaning. However, if possible, do not make your translation into a statement about the divinity of Christ, since that is not the main point that Paul is trying to make.
287	1CO	3	1	zfdg	grammar-connect-words-phrases	κἀγώ	1		The word translated And I is the same word that appears at the beginning of 2:1. Just as there, Paul uses And I here to introduce how his own experience visiting the Corinthians fits into the general pattern he has outlined at the end of chapter 2. Here, however, his experience with the Corinthians is the opposite of what he would have liked. Therefore, the words And I introduce a contrast with what he said in 2:16 about having the mind of Christ. If the meaning of And I would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that introduces a specific example or a word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “But I” or “As for me, I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
288	1CO	3	1	r4iw	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although the word translated brothers is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If brothers would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
289	1CO	3	1	jn0q	figs-infostructure	οὐκ ἠδυνήθην λαλῆσαι ὑμῖν ὡς πνευματικοῖς, ἀλλ’ ὡς σαρκίνοις, ὡς νηπίοις ἐν Χριστῷ.	1		If stating the negative before the positive would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse the order of the not statement and the but statements. Alternate translation: “had to speak to you as to fleshly, as to infants in Christ, not as to spiritual” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
290	1CO	3	1	jx17	figs-nominaladj	πνευματικοῖς…σαρκίνοις	1	spiritual people	Paul is using the adjectives spiritual and fleshly as nouns in order to describe groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “to spiritual people … to fleshly people” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj)
291	1CO	3	1	r5w5	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ὡς σαρκίνοις, ὡς νηπίοις	1	fleshly people	Here, Paul leaves out some words that might be required in your language to make a complete thought. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply the needed words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but I spoke to you as to fleshly, I spoke to you as to infants” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
292	1CO	3	1	ja6t	figs-metaphor	νηπίοις ἐν Χριστῷ	1	as to little children in Christ	Here, Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were infants. He wants the Corinthians to think about how infants are immature, do not have much knowledge, and are unable to understand most things. By calling the Corinthians infants in Christ, he means that in their relationship with Jesus, they were immature, had little knowledge, and were unable to understand very much. If calling the Corinthians infants would be misunderstood in your language, you could a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “to beginners in Christ” or “to those who could understand very little about their faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
293	1CO	3	1	m588	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1		Paul uses the spatial metaphor in Christ to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being in Christ, or being united to Christ, explains in what area of their lives they were like infants. They acted like infants in their relationship with Christ. If the meaning of in Christ would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by referring to their “faith” in Christ or their “relationship” with Christ. Alternate translation: “in their faith in Christ” or “in their relationship with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
294	1CO	3	2	vg2v	figs-metaphor	γάλα ὑμᾶς ἐπότισα, οὐ βρῶμα	1	I fed you milk, not solid food	Paul refers to milk because it is the food of “infants,” whom Paul already mentioned in 3:1. The milk is the only thing that the “infants” can eat, and Paul thus uses milk to refer to the very simplest things that the Corinthians were able to understand about the Gospel. “Infants” do not eat solid food, because they are not yet able to properly chew or digest it. So, Paul uses solid food to refer to the more complex things about the Gospel that he could not teach the Corinthians because they were “infants,” that is, people who could not understand such complex teachings. If that metaphor about milk and solid food would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I taught you the basics, not the full picture” or “I taught you things that are easy to understand, not things that are hard to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
295	1CO	3	2	fujt	figs-ellipsis	οὐ βρῶμα	1		Here, Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If the sentence would be misunderstood without these words, you could add a phrase such as “to eat.” Alternate translation: “not solid food to eat” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
296	1CO	3	2	d2x5	figs-ellipsis	οὔπω…ἐδύνασθε…οὐδὲ νῦν δύνασθε	1		Here, Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If the sentence would be misunderstood without these words, you could add them here, supplying the idea from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “you were not yet able to eat solid food … even now, you are not able to eat solid food” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
297	1CO	3	2	i3r5	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1		The word translated Indeed functions to contrast the time when Paul visited the Corinthians with the time when Paul is writing this letter. He speaks of these two different times to say that the Corinthians could not to eat the solid food at either time. If the meaning of Indeed would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that contrasts two times or a word that introduces additional information. Alternate translation: “But” or “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
298	1CO	3	3	m712	figs-nominaladj	σαρκικοί	-1	still fleshly	Paul is using the adjective fleshly as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this adjective with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “fleshly people … fleshly people” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj)
299	1CO	3	3	o618	figs-abstractnouns	ὅπου…ἐν ὑμῖν ζῆλος καὶ ἔρις	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns jealousy and strife by using verbs such as “being jealous” and “fighting.” Alternate translation: “where you are jealous and fight with one another” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)
300	1CO	3	3	s1uy	figs-metonymy	ὅπου	1		The word translated where often refers to space. However, here Paul uses it to refer to time. Instead of identifying a specific location, it identifies a specific time. If the meaning of where would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that refers to time. Alternate translation: “when there is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
301	1CO	3	3	k5ll	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ σαρκικοί ἐστε καὶ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖτε?	1	are you not living according to the flesh, and are you not walking by human standards?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information or for agreement or disagreement. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a statement that draws a conclusion from the jealousy and the strife. Alternate translation: “you are fleshly and walking according to men” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
302	1CO	3	3	oz5v	figs-hendiadys	καὶ	2		Here, Paul uses the word translated and to introduce a definition of what fleshly means. It means walking according to men. If you cannot use and to introduce a definition or explanation, you could use another word or phrase that does introduce a definition or explanation. If you use one of the following alternate translations, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “that is, are you not” or “which means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
303	1CO	3	3	as2u	figs-metaphor	κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖτε	1		Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were walking. If walking would not be understood as a description of a person’s way of life in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “behaving as men do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
304	1CO	3	3	ljri	figs-idiom	κατὰ ἄνθρωπον	1		Here, Paul speaks of behavior that is according to men. By using this phrase, he wishes to identify behaviors that people who think and act in only human ways do. These people do not have God’s Spirit, so they “walk” according to the values and goals of this world. If the phrase according to men would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that refers to things and behaviors that people who do not believe value. Alternate translation: “according to what mere humans value” or “according to this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
305	1CO	3	3	y8b4	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον	1		Although the word translated men is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “humans” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
306	1CO	3	4	cidr	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word translated For introduces further evidence for Paul’s argument that the Corinthians in acting in merely humans ways. If that meaning for For would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave For untranslated or express the idea using a word or phrase that introduces more evidence or examples. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
307	1CO	3	4	g8zt	writing-pronouns	λέγῃ τις…ἕτερος	1		Here, Paul uses the pronouns one and another to give two examples of some people in the Corinthian church who are sayings these kinds of things. He does not mean that only two people are saying these things. He also does not mean that these are the only things that people in the church are saying. If the form that Paul uses would be misunderstood in your language, you could use words that introduce examples of a larger pattern, and you could add a phrase that indicates that the words I am of Paul and I am of of Apollos are two examples of the kinds of things that they are saying. Alternate translation: “some people among you say things like … other people among you say things like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
308	1CO	3	4	rmtq	figs-quotations	ἐγὼ…εἰμι Παύλου…ἐγὼ Ἀπολλῶ	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “that he or she is of Paul … that he or she is of Apollos” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations)
309	1CO	3	4	g68p	figs-possession	ἐγὼ…εἰμι Παύλου…ἐγὼ Ἀπολλῶ	1		Just as in 1:12, Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that people are claiming to be part of a specific leader’s group. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a word such as “belong” or “follow.” Alternate translation: “‘I follow Paul’ … ‘I follow Apollos’” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession)
310	1CO	3	4	zsby	translate-names	Παύλου…Ἀπολλῶ	1		These are the names of two men. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
311	1CO	3	4	s96g	figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἄνθρωποί ἐστε?	1	are you not living as human beings?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information or for agreement or disagreement. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a statement that draws a conclusion from what Paul says the Corinthians are saying. Alternate translation: “you are men” or “this shows that you are men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
312	1CO	3	4	mmlq	figs-explicit	ἄνθρωποί	1		When Paul says that the Corinthians are men, he means that they are “only” or “merely” men. He is not identifying them as humans. Rather, he means that they are acting and speaking from “merely human” perspective rather than from God’s perspective, a perspective they can share if they have God’s Spirit. If the meaning of men would be misunderstood in your language, you could add a word or phrase that clarifies that men refers to a “merely human” view of the world. Alternate translation: “merely men” or “speaking from a human perspective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
313	1CO	3	4	te5r	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωποί	1		Although the word translated men is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If men would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “humans” or “men and women” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
314	1CO	3	5	typo	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὖν	1		The word translated then introduces a further stage in Paul’s argument. He has argued in 3:3 that Paul and Apollos should not be treated as leaders of groups. In this verse, he goes on to explain how he thinks that Paul and Apollos should be treated, which is as servants of Christ. Thus, the word translated then introduces who Paul and Apollos really are. If how then functions would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave it untranslated or use a word that introduces the next step in an argument. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “therefore,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
315	1CO	3	5	m463	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐστιν Ἀπολλῶς? τί δέ ἐστιν Παῦλος? διάκονοι	1	Who then is Apollos? And who is Paul?	Here, Paul uses these questions to do two things. First, the questions imply that Apollos and Paul are not very important. Therefore, an implied answer to these questions would be that Apollos and Paul are “not very much.” Second, Paul uses the questions to introduce his own answer to these questions. After using the questions to imply that he and Apollos are not much, he then states that they are servants. If using questions in these ways would be misunderstood in your language, you could express them as a statement about the status of Apollos and Paul as servants, and you could use a word such as “only” or “merely” to express the idea that they are not very important. Alternate translation: “Apollos and Paul are merely servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
316	1CO	3	5	i9d0	translate-names	Ἀπολλῶς…Παῦλος	1		These are the names of two men. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
317	1CO	3	5	lq6n	figs-123person	ἐστιν Παῦλος?	1	And who is Paul?	In this verse, Paul speaks of himself in the third person. This could sound like he is speaking about a different Paul than himself. If this use of Paul would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that Paul is naming himself. Alternate translation: “am I, Paul” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
318	1CO	3	5	qmy2	figs-ellipsis	διάκονοι δι’ ὧν ἐπιστεύσατε	1	Servants through whom you believed	Here, Paul omits several words that may be required in your language to make a complete thought. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could include the words needed to make a complete thought, such as “we are” or “they are.” Alternate translation: “We are servants through whom you believed” or “They are servants through whom you believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
319	1CO	3	5	edod	figs-explicit	διάκονοι δι’ ὧν ἐπιστεύσατε	1		When Paul says that he and Apollos are those through whom the Corinthians believed, he is implying that the Corinthians believed in someone other than Paul and Apollos. That is, they believed in Christ. If this implication about whom the Corinthians believed in would be misunderstood in your language, you could make it explicit by including what the Corinthians believed in, which is “Christ” and not Apollos or Paul. Alternate translation: “Servants through whom you believed in Christ” or “Servants through whom you believed in Christ, not in us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
320	1CO	3	5	h2jv	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ…ὡς	1		Here, the words translated even as introduce the way in which Apollos and Paul act as servants. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that could introduce the ways in which Apollos and Paul asre servants. Alternate translation: “who do what” or “serving just as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
321	1CO	3	5	f6wm	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ἑκάστῳ ὡς ὁ Κύριος ἔδωκεν	1	Servants through whom you believed, to each of whom the Lord gave tasks	Here, Paul omits what the Lord gave because it would be clear that he means that the Lord gave a specific job or task to each one of them. If the Lord gave to each one would be misunderstood in your language, you could add a word or phrase that indicates that the Lord gave a specific job or task. Alternate translation: “even as the Lord gave a task to teach one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
322	1CO	3	5	e8tb	writing-pronouns	ἑκάστῳ	1		The word translated to each one directly refers back to Apollos and Paul. However, it also probably refers to everyone who serves the Lord. If you can refer to multiple individuals considered separately in your language, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “to each and every one who serves him” or “per person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
323	1CO	3	6	iah7	figs-exmetaphor	ἐγὼ ἐφύτευσα, Ἀπολλῶς ἐπότισεν, ἀλλὰ ὁ Θεὸς ηὔξανεν.	1	I planted	Paul speaks about the roles that God gave to him and to Apollos as if they were farmers who planted and watered their crops. The one who “plants” is the person who begins the farming process, just like Paul first introduced the Corinthians to the gospel. The one who “waters” is the person who continues the farming process by making sure the plants receive what they need to grow, just like Apollos continued to proclaim the gospel to the Corinthians. It is a well-known fact in Paul’s culture that plants grow because God enables them to do so, just like God enabled to the Corinthians to receive the gospel and learn more about God. If the way Paul uses farming language to describe how the Corinthians received the Gospel would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I invested the money, Apollos managed the portfolio, but God gave the return on investment” or “I introduced you to the gospel, Apollos taught you more about the gospel, but God enabled you to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
324	1CO	3	6	ic6x	figs-ellipsis	ἐγὼ ἐφύτευσα, Ἀπολλῶς ἐπότισεν, ἀλλὰ ὁ Θεὸς ηὔξανεν.	1		Paul never states what it is that he planted, that Apollos watered, and that God caused to grow. He does not state what it is because he wishes to use a general statement about farming practices. If you need to state what is planted and watered, you could include a general word or words such as “seed,” “plant,” or “crop.” Alternate translation: “I planted the seeds, Apollos watered the plants, but God caused the them to grow” or “I planted the crop, Apollos watered it, but God caused it to grow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
325	1CO	3	6	gyi5	translate-names	Ἀπολλῶς	1	Apollos watered	This is the name of a man. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
326	1CO	3	6	iq9n	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἐφύτευσα, Ἀπολλῶς ἐπότισεν, ἀλλὰ ὁ Θεὸς	1	but God gave the growth	Here, Paul uses but to contrast himself and Apollos with God. The point is that what he did and what Apollos did are at the same level of importance, but God’s work is the most important. Another way to understand this contrast is to notice that Paul and Apollos assist in the process of plants growing, but God is the only one who actually makes them grow. Again, the main point is that Paul and Apollos are simply “servants” of God (3:5) in a process that God oversees. If but would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that puts Paul and Apollos together in contrast with God. Alternate translation: “planted, and Apollos watered. However, it was God who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
327	1CO	3	7	g78n	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1		Paul uses the word translated so then to introduce a conclusion or inference from what he said about watering, planting, and growth in 3:6. Here, he wishes to explain that the difference between God who causes the growth and anyone who plants or waters is about their importance in the process. It is God who is important, because he is the only one who causes the growth, just as he stated in 3:6. If that meaning of so then would be misunderstood in your language, you could a comparable word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or an inference. Alternate translation: “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
328	1CO	3	7	c4wy	figs-exmetaphor	οὔτε ὁ φυτεύων ἐστίν τι, οὔτε ὁ ποτίζων, ἀλλ’ ὁ αὐξάνων, Θεός.	1		Paul now speaks in general about the tasks that God has given to those who proclaim the gospel. He continues to speak as if those who proclaim the gospel were farmers who planted and watered their crops. The one who plants is the person who begins the farming process, just like the person who first proclaims the gospel. The one who waters is the person who continues the farming process by making sure the plants receive what they need to grow, just like the person who continues to teach the gospel. It is a well-known fact in Paul’s culture that plants grow because God enables them to do so, just like God enables those who believe to receive the gospel and learn more about God. If the way Paul uses farming language to describe how people proclaim the gospel and how God enables others to receive it would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “neither the one who invests the money nor the one who manages the portfolio is anything, but God {is} the one who gives the return on investment” or “neither the person who introduces believers to the gospel nor the person who teaches believers more about the gospel is anything, but God {is} the one who enables believers to have faith” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor)
329	1CO	3	7	dl3z	figs-genericnoun	ὁ φυτεύων…ὁ ποτίζων	1	neither he who plants is anything … but God is the one who causes the growth	When Paul speaks of the one who plants, he has himself in mind. When he speaks of the one who waters, he has Apollos in mind. This is clear from what he says in the last verse (3:6). However, he is now speaking in more general terms. He does not mean just one person who does “planting” and one person who does “watering.” Rather, he wishes to refer to anyone who does either of these tasks. If the phrase the one who would not be understood to mean that in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person who does the task. Alternate translation: “any person who plants … any person who waters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
330	1CO	3	7	uutk	figs-ellipsis	ὁ φυτεύων…ὁ ποτίζων	1		Paul never states what it is that someone plants and that someone else waters. He does not state what it is because he wishes to use a general statement about farming practices. If you need to state what is planted and watered, you could include a general word or words such as “seed,” “plant,” or “crop.” Alternate translation: “the one who plants the seeds … the one who waters the plants” or “the one who plants the crop … the one who waters it” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
331	1CO	3	7	jrb1	figs-hyperbole	τι	1		Here, the word translated anything is an exaggeration that emphasizes how unimportant the people who plant and water are. It is as if they are nothing, as if they do not exist. Paul does not mean that they do not exist. Instead, he uses this exaggeration to show how unimportant the people who plant and water are compared to God. If the meaning of anything would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates “importance.” Alternate translation: “important” or “significant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
332	1CO	3	7	hmk6	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ὁ αὐξάνων, Θεός.	1		Here, Paul does not directly finish the contrast between the people who plant and water and God. What he means is that God is the one who is important because he causes the growth. If the meaning of this contrast would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply the words that Paul omits, including a word or phrase about how God is “important.” Alternate translation: “but God, who is the one who causes the growth, is the important one” or “but God is the significant one because he causes the growth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
333	1CO	3	7	c68g	figs-abstractnouns	αὐξάνων	1	but God is the one who causes the growth	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun growth with a verb such as “grow.” Alternate translation: “who makes it grow” or “who causes things to grow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
334	1CO	3	8	dmfs	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, the word translated Now introduces the next step in Paul’s argument. If the meaning of Now would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave it untranslated or use a word or phrase that introduces the next step in an argument. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
335	1CO	3	8	s16b	figs-exmetaphor	ὁ φυτεύων…καὶ ὁ ποτίζων, ἕν εἰσιν; ἕκαστος δὲ τὸν ἴδιον μισθὸν λήμψεται, κατὰ τὸν ἴδιον κόπον.	1	he who plants and he who waters are one	Here, Paul continues to speak as if those who proclaim the gospel were farmers who planted and watered their crops. The one who plants is the person who begins the farming process, just like the person who first proclaims the gospel. The one who waters is the person who continues the farming process by making sure the plants receive what they need to grow, just like the person who continues to teach the gospel. The one who plants and the one who waters will receive wages that match the kind of labor they did. In the same way, those who first proclaim the gospel and those who teach more about the gospel will receive rewards from God that match the task they accomplished. If the way Paul uses farming language to describe how people proclaim the gospel and how God rewards those who do so, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the one who invests the money and the one who manages the portfolio are one, and each will receive his own paycheck according to his own job” or “the person who introduces believers to the gospel and the person who teaches believers more about the gospel are one, and each will receive his own reward from God according to his own task” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor)
336	1CO	3	8	ydx8	figs-genericnoun	ὁ φυτεύων…ὁ ποτίζων	1		Just as in 3:7, when Paul speaks of the one who plants, he has himself in mind. When he speaks of the one who waters, he has Apollos in mind. This is clear from what he says in 3:6. However, he is now speaking in more general terms. He does not mean just one person who does “planting” and one person who does “watering.” Rather, he wishes to refer to anyone who does either of these tasks. If the phrase the one who would not be understood to mean that in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person who does the task. Alternate translation: “any person who plants … any person who waters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
337	1CO	3	8	fsj6	figs-ellipsis	ὁ φυτεύων…ὁ ποτίζων	1		Paul never states what it is that someone plants and that someone else waters. He does not state what it is because he wishes to use a general statement about farming practices. If you need to state what is planted and watered, you could include a general word or words such as “seed,” “plant,” or “crop.” Alternate translation: “the one who plants the seeds … the one who waters the plants” or “the one who plants the crop … the one who waters it” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
338	1CO	3	8	za43	figs-metaphor	ἕν εἰσιν	1	are one	Paul here speaks as if the one who plants and the one who waters are the same person. He speaks in this way in order to: (1) show that the one who plants and the one who waters do the same kind of work with the same goal in mind. Alternate translation: “share a common goal” or “do the same kind of work” (2) state that the one who plants and the one who waters have equal status. Alternate translation: “are of equal importance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
339	1CO	3	8	dfhn	figs-gendernotations	τὸν ἴδιον	-1		Here, the words translated his are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of his would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her own … his or her own” or “that person’s own … that person’s own” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
340	1CO	3	9	vphl	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1		Here, the word translated For introduces a summary statement that concludes the whole section in which Paul compares those who proclaim the gospel to farmers (3:5–8). If this meaning of For would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that introduces a summary statement. Alternate translation: “Thus,” or “In the end,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
341	1CO	3	9	gj26	figs-exclusive	ἐσμεν	1	we are brutally beaten	Here, we refers to Paul, Apollos, and others who proclaim the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
342	1CO	3	9	r9sn	figs-possession	Θεοῦ…συνεργοί	1	God’s fellow workers	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe: (1) fellow workers who work for God. Alternate translation: “coworkers under God’s leadership” (2) workers who join God in God’s work. Alternate translation: “people who work with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
343	1CO	3	9	iaan	figs-infostructure	Θεοῦ γεώργιον, Θεοῦ οἰκοδομή ἐστε.	1		Here, Paul switches from a metaphor about farming to a metaphor about building. He makes this switch without using any connecting words, and he makes the switch within one sentence. Consider whether your language would include the introduction of a new topic at the end of the previous section or at the beginning of a new section, and put God’s building where it would be understood as introducing a new section, including you are again if it would be necessary. Additionally, if beginning a new section without using a connecting word or phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use such a word or phrase here. Alternate translation: “you are God’s field. In fact, you are also God’s building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
344	1CO	3	9	lqg1	figs-metaphor	Θεοῦ γεώργιον	1	God’s garden	Here, Paul concludes the farming metaphor he began in 3:6. He identifies the Corinthians as a field that is owned by God. It is in this field that those who proclaim the gospel “plant” and “water” the crop. By calling the Corinthians a God’s field, Paul means to say that they belong to God and that they are the people among whom those who proclaim the gospel work. If the meaning of this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “God’s portfolio” or “people who belong to God and among whom we work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
345	1CO	3	9	l2fq	figs-exmetaphor	Θεοῦ οἰκοδομή	1	God’s building	Here, Paul introduces a new metaphor that compares the Corinthians to a building. This building belongs to God, and those who proclaim the gospel, including Paul, help to construct the building. He uses this metaphor and variations of it in 3:9–17. Here, he calls the Corinthians God’s building, by which he means basically the same thing as when he calls them God’s field. They belong to God, and he and others who proclaim the gospel work among them. If the meaning of this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “God’s movie” or “people who belong to God and among whom we work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
346	1CO	3	10	iln9	figs-activepassive	τοῦ Θεοῦ τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι	1	According to the grace of God that was given to me	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “that God gave me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
347	1CO	3	10	a69q	figs-exmetaphor	ὡς σοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων θεμέλιον ἔθηκα, ἄλλος δὲ ἐποικοδομεῖ. ἕκαστος δὲ βλεπέτω, πῶς ἐποικοδομεῖ.	1	I laid a foundation	Paul began using the metaphor of a house in 3:9. Here he continues that metaphor by speaking about himself as a wise master builder who lays a foundation. By speaking in this way, he means that he is the one who first introduced them to the gospel, just like a master builder first lays a foundation. He then speaks of people who build on that foundation. By speaking in this way, he means that others who proclaim more about the gospel can only do this by using and continuing from the good news that Paul already proclaimed. If this extended metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I proposed an idea for a movie as a skilled script writer, and another is filming that movie, but let each person be careful how they film that movie” or “as a wise church planter, I first proclaimed the gospel to you, and another is teaching you more about that gospel, but let each one be careful how he teaches you more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
348	1CO	3	10	nw8f	figs-infostructure	ὡς σοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων θεμέλιον ἔθηκα	1		The phrase as a wise master builder could describe: (1) the way in which Paul laid a foundation. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “I laid a foundation as a wise master builder” (2) the specific grace that God gave to Paul. Alternate translation: “to be a wise master builder, I laid a foundation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
349	1CO	3	10	mpxl	translate-unknown	σοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων	1		Here, the word translated master builder refers to the person who is in charge of an entire construction project, including designing it and making sure that the building is constructing according to the design. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase. Alternate translation: “a wise architect” or “a wise construction manager” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
350	1CO	3	10	mqb8	writing-pronouns	ἄλλος…ἐποικοδομεῖ	1		Here, the word translated another refers to anyone who is building on the foundation, including Apollos. However, Paul does not mean to identify one specific person who is building. If it would be misunderstood that another refers to any builder, you could use a word or phrase that identifies any person who does a specific task. Alternate translation: “other people are building on it” or “someone else is building on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
351	1CO	3	10	pwi7	figs-imperative	ἕκαστος…βλεπέτω	1	another is building on it	Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “each one should be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
352	1CO	3	10	px9c	writing-pronouns	ἕκαστος	1	each man	Here, the word translated each one refers to any person who builds on the foundation. If the meaning of each one would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies any person who falls into a certain category. Alternate translation: “every person who builds on it” or “each builder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
353	1CO	3	10	krd6	writing-pronouns	ἐποικοδομεῖ	2		Here, the word translated he is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of he would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she builds on it” or “each one builds on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
354	1CO	3	11	m4j2	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word translated for introduces the reason why the people who build on the foundation should “be careful how” they build “on it” (3:10). They need to “be careful” because what they build must match the only foundation that exists, which is Jesus Christ. If for would not indicate this connection in your language, you could express the idea with a word that gives a reason or basis for a command. Alternate translation: “This is because” or “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
355	1CO	3	11	qd1o	figs-exmetaphor	θεμέλιον…ἄλλον οὐδεὶς δύναται θεῖναι, παρὰ τὸν κείμενον, ὅς ἐστιν Ἰησοῦς Χριστός.	1		In this verse, Paul continues the metaphor about houses by continuing to speak about a foundation. Here, he reminds the Corinthians that each house has only one foundation, and once that foundation has been laid, no one lays another foundation for the house. He speaks in this way to remind them that only one person can introduce them to the gospel, and anyone who tries to introduce them to another gospel is building a different house, not the same house. Paul then directly states that the foundation refers to the message about Jesus Christ that he preached to them. Paul speaks in this way to indicate that the message about Jesus Christ that he proclaimed to them should be the starting point and basis for everything else they learn about the gospel. If the meaning of this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “no one can write a script other than the one that has already been written, that is, Jesus Christ” or “no one can first proclaim a gospel to you other than the one that I already proclaimed to you, which is Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
356	1CO	3	11	jt2b	figs-activepassive	τὸν κείμενον	1	no one can lay a foundation other than the one that has been laid	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form, with Paul as the person who is doing the “laying.” Alternate translation: “the one that I already laid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
357	1CO	3	11	yh1f		ὅς ἐστιν Ἰησοῦς Χριστός.	1		If you use the second alternate translation, you may need to add period before it. Alternate translation: “which is Jesus Christ” or “That foundation is Jesus Christ”
358	1CO	3	11	azm0	figs-metonymy	Ἰησοῦς Χριστός	1		Here, Paul uses the words translated Jesus Christ to refer to the message he proclaimed to them about Jesus Christ. If the meaning of Jesus Christ would be misunderstood in your language, you could include a word or phrase that refers to Paul’s message about Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
359	1CO	3	12	nuza	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δέ	1		Here, the word translated Now introduces the next step in Paul’s argument. If the meaning of Now would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave it untranslated or use a word or phrase that introduces the next step in an argument. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
360	1CO	3	12	nbu2	figs-exmetaphor	εἰ…τις ἐποικοδομεῖ ἐπὶ τὸν θεμέλιον χρυσόν, ἄργυρον, λίθους τιμίους, ξύλα, χόρτον, καλάμην	1	Now if anyone builds on the foundation with gold, silver, precious stones, wood, hay, or straw	Here, Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. He compares those who teach more about the gospel with builders who construct a house on its foundation. These builders can use a variety of different materials to construct the house, and Paul lists six. The first three, gold, silver, precious stones, are more durable, while the last three, wood, hay, straw, are less durable. It is clear that Paul is interested in durability because of the next verse, where he states that all of these materials will be tested with fire (3:13). By speaking this way, he indicates that those who proclaim more about the gospel can teach things that are more or less true and acceptable to God. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “if anyone films the movie with expensive and sturdy cameras and film or with cheap and fragile cameras and film” or “if anyone teaches you more about the gospel with words that are acceptable to God or words that are not acceptable to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
361	1CO	3	12	f8oa	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ…τις ἐποικοδομεῖ ἐπὶ τὸν θεμέλιον	1		Here, Paul uses a conditional if, but he does not think that this is a hypothetical situation or something that is likely not true. Instead, Paul thinks that people are “building” on the foundation, and he wants to talk about how they are doing so. Additionally, the “then” part of the if statement does not begin until the next verse. If this form and structure would be misunderstood in your language, you could rephrase the condition into a circumstance or an assumption. Alternate translation: “people build on the foundation, using” or “when anyone builds on the foundation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
362	1CO	3	12	tzgf	translate-unknown	χρυσόν, ἄργυρον, λίθους τιμίους, ξύλα, χόρτον, καλάμην,	1		These six things are all materials that could be used in constructing buildings. The first three will survive if the building catches on fire, but the last three will not (for the fire, see 3:13–15). In your culture, you may not use all of these materials for constructing buildings. In that case, you could include just some of these materials or include materials that you do use for constructing buildings in your culture, making sure to include some materials will not burn up and others that will burn up. Alternate translation: “steel, concrete, lumber, or cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
363	1CO	3	13	ndu3	figs-exmetaphor	ἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον φανερὸν γενήσεται; ἡ γὰρ ἡμέρα δηλώσει, ὅτι ἐν πυρὶ ἀποκαλύπτεται; καὶ ἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον, ὁποῖόν ἐστιν, τὸ πῦρ αὐτὸ δοκιμάσει	1	For it will be revealed in fire. The fire will test the quality of what each one had done	Here, Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. He speaks as if the day of God’s judgment is like a fire that will test the building and show what kind of building materials the builders used. Paul speaks in this way to illustrate how God’s judgment will reveal whether what those who proclaim more about the gospel teach is pleasing to him or not. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the work of each one will become evident, for opening night will display it; for opening night always draws critics, and the critics will test of what value is the work of each one” or “the truth of what each one has taught you will become evident, for God will show how true it is when he comes to judge everyone; when he comes, he will judge everyone, and his judgment will reveal whether what each person has taught is true or not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
364	1CO	3	13	wv4h	figs-synecdoche	ἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον	1		Here, Paul uses the word translated work to refer to the product or result of the work, not the action of “working.” If that meaning for work would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to the product of the work. Alternate translation: “what each one has made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
365	1CO	3	13	t2mk	figs-activepassive	ἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον φανερὸν γενήσεται	1	his work will be revealed	If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea using words such as “God will reveal.” Alternate translation: “God will reveal the work of each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
366	1CO	3	13	mv14	figs-explicit	ἡ…ἡμέρα δηλώσει	1	for the daylight will reveal it	Here, Paul uses the word translated day in the same way the Old Testament uses it: to refer to an event in which God saves his people and punishes his enemies. Paul specifically refers to the event in which Jesus returns to judge everyone. If that meaning of day would be misunderstood in your language, you could include more words that clarify what Paul means by day. Alternate translation: “the day of Christ’s return will display” or “when Christ returns, he will display it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
367	1CO	3	13	lyny	figs-activepassive	ἐν πυρὶ ἀποκαλύπτεται	1		If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God reveals it in fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
368	1CO	3	13	x48s	writing-pronouns	ἀποκαλύπτεται	1		Here, it refers to the day. It does not refer to the work. If the meaning of it would be misunderstood in your language, you clarify that it refers to the day. Alternate translation: “that day is revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
369	1CO	3	13	ozx6		ἀποκαλύπτεται	1		Here, Paul speaks as if the day is revealed right now. In his language, he can use the present tense to speak about the way in which something happens in general, even if it is not happening in the present moment. If this use of the present tense would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using the future tense. Alternate translation: “it will be revealed”
370	1CO	3	13	rgfy		ἐν πυρὶ	1		Alternate translation: “with fire” or “in a fiery way”
371	1CO	3	14	wexj	figs-hypo	εἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον μενεῖ, ὃ ἐποικοδόμησεν, μισθὸν λήμψεται.	1		Here and in 3:15, Paul uses if to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person’s work might remain, or it might not. He then specifies the result for each possibility. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the if statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “Anyone whose work that he built will remain will receive a reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
372	1CO	3	14	ygva	figs-exmetaphor	εἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον μενεῖ, ὃ ἐποικοδόμησεν, μισθὸν λήμψεται.	1		Here, Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. In this verse, he notes that builders whose structures survive a fire receive rewards. He speaks in this way to indicate that God will reward those who proclaim more about the gospel if God finds their teachings to be accurate and acceptable to him when he judges everyone. The reward includes public recognition and other blessings. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “If anyone's film that he created receives good reviews on opening night, he will receive an award” or “If anyone teaches you more about the gospel with words that are acceptable to God, he will be honored by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
373	1CO	3	14	iddt	figs-explicitinfo	τινος τὸ ἔργον…ὃ ἐποικοδόμησεν	1		Here, Paul speaks both of work and what he built. If using both of these terms would be misunderstood or redundant in your language, you could combine the ideas into one expression. Alternate translation: “anyone’s building project” or “what anyone built” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
374	1CO	3	14	s4u3	figs-synecdoche	τὸ ἔργον	1	work remains	Here, Paul uses the word translated work to refer to the product or result of the work, not the action of “working.” If that meaning for work would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to the product of the work. Alternate translation: “project” or “house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
375	1CO	3	14	tec9		μενεῖ	1		Alternate translation: “does not burn up”
376	1CO	3	14	ge6s	figs-gendernotations	τινος…ἐποικοδόμησεν…λήμψεται	1		Here, the word translated he is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of he would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “anyone’s … he or she built … he or she will receive” or “people’s … they built … they will receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
377	1CO	3	15	vax6	figs-hypo	εἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον κατακαήσεται, ζημιωθήσεται	1		Here, just as in 3:14, Paul uses if to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person’s work might remain, or it might not. He then specifies the result for each possibility. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the if statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “Anyone whose work will be burned up will suffer loss” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
378	1CO	3	15	ysjz	figs-exmetaphor	εἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον κατακαήσεται, ζημιωθήσεται; αὐτὸς δὲ σωθήσεται, οὕτως δὲ ὡς διὰ πυρός.	1		Here, Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. In this verse, he notes that builders whose structures do not survive a fire suffer loss. The builders themselves do not die, but they are in trouble, almost as if they were in the building and barely escaped as it burned to the ground. Paul speaks in this way to indicate that God will not reward those who proclaim more about the gospel if God finds their teachings to be inaccurate and unacceptable to him when he judges everyone. The loss includes lack of honor and rewards from God. However, those who proclaim more about God in inaccurate and unacceptable ways are not condemned to punishment by God. Instead, just like someone escaping from a burning building, they are just barely accepted by God. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “If anyone's film that he created receives bad reviews on opening night, he will lose money on the film, but he himself will not face financial ruin, but as though through bankruptcy” or “If anyone teaches you more about the gospel with words that are not acceptable to God, he will receive no honor or blessing when God judges everyone, but he himself will be accepted by God, although just barely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
379	1CO	3	15	c2xj	figs-activepassive	τινος τὸ ἔργον κατακαήσεται	1	if anyone’s work is burned up	If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with “fire” as the subject. Alternate translation: “fire burns up anyone’s work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
380	1CO	3	15	fyfr	figs-activepassive	τὸ ἔργον	1		Here, Paul uses the word translated work to refer to the product or result of the work, not the action of “working.” If that meaning for work would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to the product of the work. Alternate translation: “project” or “house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
381	1CO	3	15	b2l8	figs-gendernotations	τινος…ζημιωθήσεται…αὐτὸς…σωθήσεται	1		Here, the words translated he and himself are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of he and himself would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “anyone’s … he or she will suffer loss … he himself or she herself will be saved” or “people’s … they will suffer loss … they themselves will be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
382	1CO	3	15	ups4	translate-unknown	ζημιωθήσεται	1	he will suffer loss	The phrase he will suffer loss expresses the opposite of “receiving a reward.” Instead of gaining honor and money, the person loses honor and money. If the phrase he will suffer loss would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to losing honor and money. Alternate translation: “he will lose honor and money” or “he will be deprived of any reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
383	1CO	3	15	w1zv	figs-activepassive	αὐτὸς δὲ σωθήσεται	1	but he himself will be saved	If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with he saving himself or he not perishing. Alternate translation: “but he will save himself” or “but he will not perish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
384	1CO	3	16	uq2g	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐστε, καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ οἰκεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν?	1	Do you not know that you are God’s temple and that the Spirit of God lives in you?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information or for agreement or disagreement. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing by reminding them of something that they should already know. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “you know that you are a temple of God, and you know that the Spirit of God lives in you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
385	1CO	3	16	yc1g	figs-exmetaphor	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐστε, καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ οἰκεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν?	1		Here, Paul develops the metaphor about constructing a building in a new way. First, he says that the Corinthians together are a temple of God, which is a specific type of building. The temple of God was the place where God was present in a special way. Paul is thus identifying the Corinthians as people among whom God is present in the same kind of special way. Second, he says that the Corinthians together are the house or city in which the Spirit of God lives. The house or city in which someone lives is where they are always present. Paul is thus saying that the Holy Spirit is always present with the Corinthians. If the meaning of Paul’s metaphors would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea in non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “Do you not know that you are the sacred shrine where God dwells, and you are the country in which the Spirit of God has residency?” or “Do you not know that God is present among you, and the Spirit of God is always with you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
386	1CO	3	17	pc0d	figs-exmetaphor	εἴ τις τὸν ναὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ φθείρει, φθερεῖ τοῦτον ὁ Θεός; ὁ γὰρ ναὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ ἅγιός ἐστιν, οἵτινές ἐστε ὑμεῖς.	1		Here, Paul finishes the metaphor about the temple that he began in 3:16. He notes that, because God’s temple is holy, God will destroy anyone who destroys the temple. He then again repeats that the Corinthians are the temple. By speaking in this way, Paul wishes to remind everyone among the Corinthian believers that “destroying” the unity of the believers is like “destroying” the temple, and God will act in response to this like he would if someone “destroyed” his temple. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “If anyone desecrates God’s sacred shrine, God will punish that person. For the sacred shrine is holy, and you are God’s sacred shrine” or “If anyone divides the place of God’s presence, God will punish that person. For wherever God’s presence can be found is holy, and you are the place where God’s presence can be found” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
387	1CO	3	17	pv8w	figs-hypo	εἴ τις τὸν ναὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ φθείρει, φθερεῖ τοῦτον ὁ Θεός	1		Here, Paul uses if to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person might destroy God’s temple, or that person might not. He then specifies the result for if someone does destroy God’s temple. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the if statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “God will destroy anyone who destroys the temple of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
388	1CO	3	17	vcuv	writing-pronouns	οἵτινές ἐστε ὑμεῖς	1		Here, the word translated which could refer to: (1) the temple of God. Alternate translation: “which temple you are” (2) holy. Alternate translation: “and you too are holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
389	1CO	3	18	glg8	figs-imperative	μηδεὶς ἑαυτὸν ἐξαπατάτω…μωρὸς γενέσθω	1	Let no one deceive himself	In this verse, Paul uses two third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “No one should deceive himself … he should become a ‘fool’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
390	1CO	3	18	s57s	figs-gendernotations	μηδεὶς ἑαυτὸν ἐξαπατάτω; εἴ τις δοκεῖ σοφὸς εἶναι ἐν ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ, μωρὸς γενέσθω, ἵνα γένηται σοφός.	1		Here, the words translated himself, he, and him are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of himself, he, and him would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using words that do not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “Let no one deceive himself or herself. If anyone among you thinks he or she is wise in this age, let him or her become a ‘fool,’ that he or she may become wise” or “Let no people deceive themselves. If any people among you think they are wise in this age, them become ‘fools,’ that they may become wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
391	1CO	3	18	p3wi	figs-hypo	εἴ τις δοκεῖ σοφὸς εἶναι ἐν ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ, μωρὸς γενέσθω	1	in this age	Here, Paul uses if to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person might think that he is wise, or that person might not think this. He then specifies the result for if someone does think that he is wise. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the if statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “Let whoever among you thinks he is wise in this age become a ‘fool’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
392	1CO	3	18	p53y		ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ	1		Alternate translation: “according to the standards of this age”
393	1CO	3	18	s7xi	figs-irony	μωρὸς γενέσθω, ἵνα γένηται σοφός	1	let him become a “fool”	Here, Paul commands any wise person among the Corinthians to become a fool. He does not actually think that doing what he commands makes a person a fool, which is why fool appears in quotation marks. Rather, he knows that many will call doing what he commands becoming a fool. To make this clearer, he then says that becoming what many will call a “fool” will actually lead to becoming truly wise. If Paul’s use of the word fool would be misunderstood by your readers, you could use a form in your language that indicates that Paul is speaking from the perspective of other people. Alternate translation: “let him become a so-called ‘fool,’ that he may become truly wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
394	1CO	3	18	pvt3	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		Here, the word translated that introduces the goal or purpose for which a person should become a “fool”. If the meaning of that would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that introduces a goal or purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
395	1CO	3	19	m0gd	figs-possession	ἡ…σοφία τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe what this world considers to be wisdom. If the wisdom of this world would be not be understood in your language as wisdom from the perspective of this world, you could use a different form that makes this meaning clear. Alternate translation: “what this world considers to be wisdom” or “worldly wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
396	1CO	3	19	uqb3	figs-idiom	παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1		Here, Paul uses the phrase with God to identify God’s perspective. If with God would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that identifies that this is foolishness according to how God views the world. Alternate translation: “from God’s perspective” or “in God’s eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
397	1CO	3	19	ayvv	writing-quotations	γέγραπται γάρ	1		In Paul’s culture, For it is written is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Job.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it can be read in the Old Testament” or “For the book of Job says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
398	1CO	3	19	zws3	figs-quotations	γέγραπται…ὁ δρασσόμενος τοὺς σοφοὺς ἐν τῇ πανουργίᾳ αὐτῶν	1	He catches the wise in their craftiness	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “it is written that God catches the wise in their craftiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
399	1CO	3	19	wxz2	figs-metaphor	δρασσόμενος τοὺς σοφοὺς ἐν τῇ πανουργίᾳ αὐτῶν	1		Here, Paul speaks as if God reaches out and grabs the wise as they act in craftiness. By speaking in this way, he means that even “crafty” or clever people cannot avoid God when he wishes to “catch” them. God is not deceived, and he can disrupt their clever plans. If catches would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “interrupts the clever plans of the wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
400	1CO	3	19	j0ga	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς σοφοὺς	1		Paul is using the adjective wise as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this adjective with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “wise people” or “those who are wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
401	1CO	3	19	x6ts	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πανουργίᾳ	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun craftiness by using a phrase such as “crafty plans” or “clever planning.” Alternate translation: “crafty plans” or “clever planning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
402	1CO	3	20	n5pu	writing-quotations	καὶ πάλιν	1		In Paul’s culture, And again is a normal way to introduce another quotation from an important text that supports the same point. In this case, Paul quotes from the Old Testament book titled “Psalms.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is introducing another quotation from an important text. Alternate translation: “It can be read in another place in the Old Testament” or “And the book of Psalms also says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
403	1CO	3	20	la6x	figs-quotations	Κύριος γινώσκει τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς τῶν σοφῶν, ὅτι εἰσὶν μάταιοι	1	The Lord knows that the reasoning of the wise is futile	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “that the Lord knows the reasonings of the wise, that they are futile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
404	1CO	3	20	gvyq	figs-explicitinfo	γινώσκει τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς τῶν σοφῶν, ὅτι εἰσὶν μάταιοι	1		If the form the reasonings of the wise, that they would be redundant in your language, you could express the idea without the redundant words. Alternate translation: “knows that the reasonings of the wise are futile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
405	1CO	3	20	ot38	figs-abstractnouns	τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς τῶν σοφῶν	1		If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun reasonings with a verb such as “reason” or “plan.” Alternate translation: “the things that the wise reason” or “the things that the wise plan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
406	1CO	3	20	tlk9	figs-nominaladj	τῶν σοφῶν	1		Paul is using the adjective wise as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this adjective with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of wise people” or “of those who are wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
407	1CO	3	20	kz2u		εἰσὶν μάταιοι	1	futile	Alternate translation: “they will come to nothing” or “they are worthless”
408	1CO	3	21	molu	figs-imperative	μηδεὶς καυχάσθω ἐν ἀνθρώποις	1		Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “no one should boast in men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
409	1CO	3	21	xyti	figs-idiom	μηδεὶς καυχάσθω ἐν ἀνθρώποις	1		The phrase boast in men means that a person is boasting “about” humans. If boast in would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clarifies that the “boasting” has men as its content. Alternate translation: “let no one boast about men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
410	1CO	3	21	k9i3	figs-explicit	ἐν ἀνθρώποις	1		The next verse makes it clear that here Paul specifically has leaders in mind. He wishes to tell the Corinthians that they should not boast about having a specific leader that they follow. If this meaning of in men would not be understood in your language, you could include some words that clarify that it refers to following leaders. Alternate translation: “in men that they follow” or “in men whose group they are part of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
411	1CO	3	21	ogfq	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1		Although the word translated men is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “in people” or “in men or women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
412	1CO	3	21	g0hr	figs-explicit	πάντα…ὑμῶν ἐστιν	1		Here, all things are yours also implies that boasting in men is foolish. If the Corinthians have everything, then boasting about following a specific leader does not make sense. All the Corinthians have all the leaders, and much more beyond that (see 3:22). If it would be misunderstood in your language that all things are yours implies these conclusions, you could include a phrase that states these conclusions. Alternate translation: “all things are yours, including all leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
413	1CO	3	22	lrlg	translate-names	Παῦλος…Ἀπολλῶς…Κηφᾶς	1		These are the names of three men. They are the same men who were mentioned in 1:12 as leaders whom the Corinthians were claiming to follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
414	1CO	3	22	x1w6		εἴτε Παῦλος, εἴτε Ἀπολλῶς, εἴτε Κηφᾶς, εἴτε κόσμος, εἴτε ζωὴ, εἴτε θάνατος, εἴτε ἐνεστῶτα, εἴτε μέλλοντα;	1		Paul does not want his readers to think that this list tells the Corinthians everything that they have. Rather, he uses the list to give examples. If the use of this list would be misunderstood in your language, you could include a word or phrase that shows that the list gives examples. Alternate translation: “including Paul and Apollos and Cephas and the world and life and death and things present and things to come”
415	1CO	3	22	o3k5	figs-explicit	εἴτε ζωὴ, εἴτε θάνατος	1		When Paul says that life and death are theirs, he means that neither life nor death has control over the Corinthians. Rather, they have control over life and death. What this means is that they can live their lives without being afraid of what will happen while they are alive or afraid of losing their lives when they die. If the meaning of the life and death would be misunderstood in your language, you could add some words that clarify their meaning. Alternate translation: “or confidence in life or peace in death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
416	1CO	3	22	pyir	figs-explicit	εἴτε ἐνεστῶτα, εἴτε μέλλοντα	1		Here, Paul refers to things present because it refers to what was happening at the time when Paul wrote this letter. On the other hand, things to come refers to what is going to happen in the future, specifically when Jesus comes back. The things present is the way the world works right now. The things to come is the way the world will work when Jesus returns. If the meaning of these phrases would be misunderstood in your language, you could add some words that clarify their meaning. Alternate translation: “or the current order or the order that Jesus will bring” or “or what happens now or what will happen soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
417	1CO	3	22	jt0x	figs-infostructure	πάντα ὑμῶν	1		Here, Paul uses the same phrase he used at the end of 3:21: all things are yours. He repeats the phrase here to explain that the list provides examples of all things and also to introduce the point he is about to make in the next verse. Because all things are yours ends the list and also introduces the next idea, the ULT begins a new sentence with all things are yours. Use whatever form in your language most clearly identifies a conclusion that also introduces the next statement. Alternate translation: “Thus, all things are yours,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
418	1CO	3	23	nj48	figs-possession	ὑμεῖς…Χριστοῦ	1	you are Christ’s, and Christ is God’s	Here, Paul uses the possessive form to show the Corinthians that they belong to Christ. If the meaning of this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “belong to” or a verb such as “has.” Alternate translation: “you belong to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
419	1CO	3	23	dc6v	figs-possession	Χριστὸς…Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to show the Corinthians that Christ belongs to who God is. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “belongs to” or a verb such as “includes.” Alternate translation: “Christ belongs to God” or “who God is includes Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
420	1CO	4	intro	vg5z			0		1 Corinthians 4 General Notes Structure and Formatting Against divisions (1:10–4:15) God alone is judge (4:1–5) Present weakness (4:6–15) Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20) Paul’s planned visit (4:16–21) Special concepts in this chapter Judgment In 4:3–5, Paul refers to three different judgments. The first judgment is what humans think of each other, including what they think of Paul. The second is Paul’s own judgment of himself. The third is God’s judgment, which occurs when the Lord returns. Paul argues that the first two judgments are not important and carry no weight. Rather, the only judgment that matters is God’s judgment. Therefore, Paul argues that no one should issue a final verdict about anything until God has performed his judgment (4:5). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/discernment]]) Pride Paul mentions the Corinthians’ pride many times in this chapter. He speaks specifically of being “puffed up” (4:6; 4:18–19), and boasting (4:7). In contrast, Paul describes himself and the other apostles as humble and weak (4:9–13). By making this contrast, Paul wants the Corinthians to rethink their opinions about themselves. If the apostles, the leaders of the church, are weak and humble, they need to think again about whether they really are as great as they think they are. Word and power In 4:19–20, Paul contrasts “word” with “power.” This is common comparison in his culture that contrasts talk and deeds. Anyone can say they are capable of doing something, but only those with “power” can actually do what they claim. Paul introduces this contrast because he is coming to see if those who claim greatness (“word”) can do what they claim (“power”). He argues that “power” is what matters more than “word” because God’s kingdom is a matter of “power,” not “word.” It is about action, not just talk. If your language has a standard comparison between “talk” and “deeds,” you could use it in these verses. Important figures of speech in this chapter Paul as father In 4:14–15, Paul identifies the Corinthians as his children, which makes him their father. He became their father when he preached the gospel to them. Thus, he is their spiritual father, the one who helped bring them into the Christian life. In the metaphor, Paul does not specify who the mother is, and he does not intend his audience to make an inference as to who it might be. In 4:17, Paul continues this metaphor by claiming Timothy as his spiritual child. If possible, use words in your language that do not always require biological relationships. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/father]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/children]]) The spectacle In 4:9, Paul speaks of the “spectacle” that he and the other apostles participate in. The “spectacle” could be a victory parade in which Paul and the other apostles are prisoners who will be killed, or it could be a gladiatorial performance in an arena in which Paul and the other apostles are destined to die. See the notes on the verse for translation options. Whichever “spectacle” Paul refers to, he is presenting himself and the other apostles as people who are going to be humiliated and killed in public. With this metaphor he continues the theme of Christ working in power through his and others’ weakness. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Irony In 4:8, Paul says that the Corinthians are satisfied, rich, and reigning. In the second half of the verse, however, he says that he “wishes” that they were actually reigning. The first part of the verse, then, presents how the Corinthians think about themselves. Paul speaks from their perspective in order to show them that their views are foolish and impossible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) Rhetorical questions In 4:7 and 4:21, Paul uses several questions. All the questions in these two verses are not seeking answers that provide information or further knowledge. Rather, all the questions are meant to make the Corinthians think about what they are thinking and doing. For translation options, see the notes on these two verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “Not beyond what is written” In 4:6, Paul quotes a phrase: “Not beyond what is written.” This is not a quote from Scripture, and Paul does not say where the phrase comes from. However, the way he quotes it shows that both he and the Corinthians were familiar with this saying. Most likely, the phrase is a well-known proverb or wise saying that Paul uses to strengthen his argument. For the meaning of the phrase and translation options, see the notes on that verse. Paul’s coming In 4:18–21, Paul speaks many times about how he will “come” to them. He intends to visit them again, and he speaks in these verses about what his visit might be like. Use words in your language that refer to someone temporarily visiting someone else.
421	1CO	4	1	nkda	figs-explicitinfo	οὕτως ἡμᾶς λογιζέσθω ἄνθρωπος ὡς	1		If the form In this manner let a man regard us: as would be redundant in your language, you could express the idea without the redundant words. Alternate translation: “Let a man regard us as” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo)
422	1CO	4	1	k1v5	figs-imperative	ἡμᾶς λογιζέσθω ἄνθρωπος	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “a man should regard us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
423	1CO	4	1	xt4u	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος	1		Although the word translated man is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “man or woman” or “human” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
424	1CO	4	1	fk8c	figs-genericnoun	ἄνθρωπος	1		Paul uses the word man to speak of people in general, not one specific person. If the meaning of man would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a form that indicates people in general in your language. Alternate translation: “everybody” or “any person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
425	1CO	4	1	px42	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1		Here, us refers to Paul, Apollos, and others who proclaim the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
426	1CO	4	1	if6t	figs-possession	οἰκονόμους μυστηρίων Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe stewards who are in charge of the mysteries of God. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “manage” or “oversee.” Alternate translation: “stewards who manage the mysteries of God” or “stewards who oversee the mysteries of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
427	1CO	4	1	duab	figs-possession	μυστηρίων Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe mysteries that are: (1) revealed by God. Alternate translation: “of the mysteries given by God” or “of the mysteries from God” (2) about God. Alternate translation: “of the mysteries about God” or “of the mysteries concerning God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
428	1CO	4	2	th8e	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὧδε λοιπὸν	1	what is required of stewards	Here, Paul uses the phrase In this case to introduce further information about what it means to be stewards. Since he is talking about himself and others who proclaim the gospel as stewards, it is important to understand what it is that stewards are required to do. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces more information about a topic. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Speaking of stewards,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
429	1CO	4	2	de61	figs-explicit	ζητεῖται ἐν τοῖς οἰκονόμοις, ἵνα πιστός τις εὑρεθῇ	1		While Paul does not directly apply this sentence to himself and others who proclaim the gospel, it is clear that he intends the reader to apply it to him and these others. Paul then means that he and others who proclaim the gospel are required to do so faithfully by God. If this implication would not be understood by your readers, you could a word or phrase that makes it clear by identifying Paul as one of the stewards. Alternate translation: “it is required in stewards like us that we be found faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
430	1CO	4	2	qek0	figs-activepassive	ζητεῖται	1		If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with a vague subject or “masters” as the subject. Alternate translation: “people require” or “a master requires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
431	1CO	4	2	dpeo	figs-activepassive	πιστός τις εὑρεθῇ	1		If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with a vague subject or “masters” as the subject. Alternate translation: “people find one faithful” or “a master finds one faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
432	1CO	4	2	yesr	writing-pronouns	τις	1		Here, Paul uses one to refer to any of the stewards. If one would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a plural pronoun such as “they.” Alternate translation: “they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
433	1CO	4	3	t133		ἐμοὶ…ἐστιν	1		Alternate translation: “I consider it” or “from my perspective”
434	1CO	4	3	fspp	figs-idiom	εἰς ἐλάχιστόν ἐστιν	1		When Paul says that it is a very small thing for him to be examined, what he means is that their “examination” of him is unimportant to him. Whether they think he has been faithful or not does not matter to him at all. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “it is no big deal” or “it has no significance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
435	1CO	4	3	k6nc	figs-activepassive	ὑφ’ ὑμῶν ἀνακριθῶ, ἢ ὑπὸ ἀνθρωπίνης ἡμέρας;	1	it is a very small thing that I should be judged by you	If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “you or a human court would examine me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
436	1CO	4	3	l2tt	translate-unknown	ἀνθρωπίνης ἡμέρας	1		Here, the words translated a human court refer to an official legal proceeding where whether Paul was faithful or not could be judged by those in charge. Here, he uses the words primarily to refer to any people who are in charge of this legal proceeding. If this language would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to an official meeting to decide whether someone is innocent or guilty or a word or phrase that refers to who is in charge at such a meeting. Alternate translation: “a court of law” or “a human jury” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
437	1CO	4	3	skwh	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἀλλ’	1		Here, the word translated For introduces an even stronger statement about how little Paul cares about being examined by humans. He cares so little that he does not even examine himself. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that normally introduces a further, stronger statement. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
438	1CO	4	4	u9jd	figs-idiom	οὐδὲν…ἐμαυτῷ σύνοιδα	1	I am not aware of any charge being made against me	Paul says that he is aware of nothing against himself. By this, he means that he does not know about anything that could be used to accuse him. He is not aware of anything he has done wrong. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I have a clear conscience” or “I cannot think of any wrong things I have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
439	1CO	4	4	h3wl	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐν τούτῳ δεδικαίωμαι;	1	that does not mean I am innocent. It is the Lord who judges me	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “this does not justify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
440	1CO	4	4	bulo	writing-pronouns	τούτῳ	1		The word translated this refers back to the whole idea that Paul is aware of nothing against himself. If the meaning of this would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that it refers back to the whole previous statement. Alternate translation: “what I am aware of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
441	1CO	4	4	hjob	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Paul uses the word translated but to introduce a contrast with everyone else who might “examine” Paul (see 4:3–4). If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast with several previous statements. Alternate translation: “Instead,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
442	1CO	4	4	f6bb		ὁ…ἀνακρίνων με Κύριός ἐστιν.	1		Alternate translation: “the Lord is the one who judges me”
443	1CO	4	5	qi3g	figs-explicitinfo	πρὸ καιροῦ…ἕως ἂν ἔλθῃ ὁ Κύριος	1	Therefore	If the form before the time, until the Lord comes contains redundant information that would be unnatural to state in your language, you could express the idea without the redundant words. Alternate translation: “before the Lord comes” or “until the Lord comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
444	1CO	4	5	wl3i	figs-metaphor	ὃς καὶ φωτίσει τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους	1	He will bring to light the hidden things of darkness and reveal the purposes of the heart	Here, Paul speaks as if the Lord will bring a flashlight or torch when he comes, and he will use that torch or flashlight to shine light on things that are currently hidden in the darkness. By speaking in this way, Paul means that the Lord will reveal what no person knows right now. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “who will both disclose what people do not know about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
445	1CO	4	5	dcje	figs-possession	τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe things that are hidden in darkness. If the hidden things would not be understood to be in darkness in your language, you could express the idea by using a word such “in” or “within.” Alternate translation: “the things hidden in darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
446	1CO	4	5	ywuk	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους	1		If your language does not use the abstract noun darkness, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that describes something that cannot be seen because there is no light, such as “in shadow.” Alternate translation: “the hidden things in shadow” or “the things hidden where no light shines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
447	1CO	4	5	spwh	figs-possession	τὰς βουλὰς τῶν καρδιῶν	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe purposes that come from or are created in the hearts. If it would be misunderstood in your language that the purposes are located in the hearts, you could express the idea by using a word such as “from” or “in.” Alternate translation: “the purposes in the hearts” or “the purposes from the hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
448	1CO	4	5	tgdg	translate-unknown	τὰς βουλὰς	1		Here, purposes refers to how humans have specific goals in mind and plan ways of attaining those goals. If the meaning of purposes would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word such as “plans” or “intentions.” Alternate translation: “the plans” or “the intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
449	1CO	4	5	tgox	figs-metonymy	τῶν καρδιῶν	1		In Paul’s culture, hearts are the places where humans think and plan. If that meaning of hearts would be misunderstood in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “of the minds” or “that humans plan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
450	1CO	4	5	pw6r	figs-idiom	ὁ ἔπαινος γενήσεται ἑκάστῳ ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul speaks as if praise were something that could come or travel from God to humans. Paul means that God is the source of the praise that each one will receive. If the meaning of this sentence would be misunderstood in your language, you could make God the person who gives the praise. Alternate translation: “God will give praise to each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
451	1CO	4	5	kcya	figs-explicit	ὁ ἔπαινος γενήσεται ἑκάστῳ ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, Paul seems to say that every person will receive some praise from God. However, Paul does not mean this. Instead, he only gives the example of the person who has been faithful to God, not the example of the person who has not been faithful to God. If using only one example would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that this example is only about those who are faithful, or you could include the opposite example about those who have been unfaithful. Alternate translation: “the praise from God will come to each faithful one” or “the praise and blame from God will come to teach one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
452	1CO	4	6	agfz	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1		The word translated these things refers back to everything Paul has said about himself and Apollos in 3:4–23. If what these things refers to would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that it refers to what Paul has said about farming and building. Alternate translation: “what I have said about farming and building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
453	1CO	4	6	ijn5	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although the word translated brothers is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
454	1CO	4	6	xxp2	translate-names	Ἀπολλῶν	1		This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
455	1CO	4	6	ymxi	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1		Here, the word us refers to Paul and Apollos only. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
456	1CO	4	6	ziz9	figs-quotations	μάθητε, τό μὴ ὑπὲρ ἃ γέγραπται	1	for your sakes	If you your language does not use this form, you could translate this statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “you might learn not to go beyond what is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
457	1CO	4	6	o02a	figs-explicit	τό μὴ ὑπὲρ ἃ γέγραπται,	1		Here, Paul quotes a short phrase that is not from the Old Testament but that would have been well-known to the Corinthians. The phrase what is written could refer to: (1) the Old Testament scriptures. Paul is telling the Corinthians that they should only act in ways that the Old Testament approves of. Alternate translation: “Not beyond what the scriptures say” (2) general principles of life that everyone knows about. Paul is telling the Corinthians that they should only act in ways that are generally approved and accepted. Alternate translation: “Not beyond proper standards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
458	1CO	4	6	hk55	figs-infostructure	ἵνα	2		The statement introduced by so that could be the purpose of (1) learning that they should not go beyond what is written. Alternate translation: “with the goal that” (2) Paul applying these things to himself and Apollos. Alternate translation: “so that, in the end,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
459	1CO	4	6	e79m	figs-activepassive	μὴ εἷς…φυσιοῦσθε	1		If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with no one as the subject and the object. Alternate translation: “no one would puff himself or herself up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
460	1CO	4	6	hjfu	writing-pronouns	τοῦ ἑνὸς…τοῦ ἑτέρου	1		The words translated the one and the other refer to any specific leaders the Corinthians might praise or blame. Perhaps Paul specifically has himself and Apollos in mind, but he intentionally uses words that would include any leader whom the Corinthians could praise or blame. If the meaning of the one and the other would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is speaking generally of any leaders here. Alternate translation: “of any leader … any other leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
461	1CO	4	7	fnu3	figs-yousingular	σε…ἔχεις…ἔλαβες…ἔλαβες…καυχᾶσαι…λαβών	1	between you … do you have that you did not … you have freely … do you boast … you had not	In this verse, Paul uses the singular form for you. He does this in order to directly address each specific person among the Corinthian believers. In the next verse, he again uses the plural form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
462	1CO	4	7	gtb5	figs-rquestion	τίς…σε διακρίνει?	1	For who makes you superior?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no one.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is no one who makes you superior.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
463	1CO	4	7	r6yw	figs-rquestion	τί…ἔχεις ὃ οὐκ ἔλαβες?	1	What do you have that you did not freely receive?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nothing.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is nothing that you have that you did not receive.” or “you received everything that you have.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
464	1CO	4	7	eixw	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ δὲ καὶ ἔλαβες	1		Paul is speaking as if “receiving it” were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “And since you indeed received it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
465	1CO	4	7	e8l2	figs-rquestion	τί καυχᾶσαι ὡς μὴ λαβών?	1	why do you boast as if you had not done so?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. Here, there is no answer to the question, since that is exactly Paul’s point. There is no reason for them to boast. If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea as an imperative or a “should” statement. Alternate translation: “do not boast as if you did not receive it.” or “you should not boast as if you did not receive it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
466	1CO	4	7	p0hg	writing-pronouns	ἔλαβες…λαβών	2		Here, both uses of it refer back to what the Corinthians have. If your language does not use it to refer to an unstated “thing,” you could use a word or phrase that does refer clearly back to what the Corinthians have. Alternate translation: “you received everything … you did … receive everything” or “you received what you have … you did … receive what you have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
467	1CO	4	8	yp8s	figs-irony	ἤδη κεκορεσμένοι ἐστέ, ἤδη ἐπλουτήσατε, χωρὶς ἡμῶν ἐβασιλεύσατε	1	General Information:	With these statements, Paul is stating what he thinks the Corinthians would say about themselves. He does not mean that he believes that these things are true. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could include some words that clarify that Paul is speaking from the Corinthians’s perspective, such as “it is as if” or “you say.” Alternate translation: “Already it is as if you are satisfied! Already it is as if you have become rich! It is as if you began to reign apart from us” or “Already you say that you are satisfied! Already you say that you have become rich! You say that you have begun to reign apart from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
468	1CO	4	8	v77u	figs-metaphor	κεκορεσμένοι ἐστέ	1		Here, Paul speaks as if the Corinthians have had more than enough food to eat and beverages to drink. By this, he means that (they think that) they have so many spiritual blessings that there are no more that they can receive. If the meaning of satisfied would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you are stuffed with blessings” or “you have every spiritual gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
469	1CO	4	8	uc7s	figs-metaphor	ἐπλουτήσατε	1		Here, Paul speaks as if the Corinthians have become wealthy people. He speaks in this way to again emphasize that (they think that) they have more spiritual blessings than they need. If the meaning of become rich would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you have become fat” or “you have an excess of spiritual gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
470	1CO	4	8	mpir	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν…ἡμεῖς	1		Here, us and we refer to Paul and others who proclaim the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
471	1CO	4	9	bb41	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1	God has put us apostles on display	Here, the word translated For introduces evidence that Paul and the other apostles are not “reigning” right now. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a contrast word such as “rather” or use a word or phrase that indicates that this sentence provides evidence that Paul is not “reigning.” Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “You can tell we are not reigning, since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
472	1CO	4	9	v0bg	translate-unknown	δοκῶ	1		Here, the word translated I think introduces Paul’s own opinion of what he and other apostles are meant to do and experience. If the meaning of I think would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that introduces a person’s interpretation or opinion. Alternate translation: “in my opinion,” or “it seems to me that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
473	1CO	4	9	lz8v	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς…ἐγενήθημεν	1		Here, we and us refer to Paul and his fellow apostles. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
474	1CO	4	9	vfq3	figs-metaphor	ἡμᾶς τοὺς ἀποστόλους ἐσχάτους ἀπέδειξεν, ὡς ἐπιθανατίους	1	has put us apostles on display	Here, Paul uses a metaphor that identifies himself and other apostles as those who receive public humiliation and are put to death. The metaphor itself: (1) could refer to a Roman gladiatorial contest. The apostles, then, would be exhibited in the arena as part of the last event. As those who are sentenced to death, they would then die in this last event. Alternate translation: “has exhibited us apostles in the last event of the gladiatorial games, in which we are destined to die” (2) could refer to a victory parade. The apostles, then, would be exhibited at the end of the parade, or last. As the last prisoners, they are sentenced to death, and will be killed soon after the parade ends. Alternate translation: “has exhibited us apostles at the end of the victory parade, in the place where prisoners who are sentenced to death march” (3) could be misunderstood in your language. If this is the case, you could express the idea in non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “has chosen us apostles to be humiliated, and we are destined to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
475	1CO	4	9	ayu9	translate-unknown	ἐσχάτους	1		The word translated last of all could identify: (1) the time when the apostles are exhibited, which would be as the last event held in the arena. Alternate translation: “at the end” (2) the place where the apostles are exhibited, which would be at the end of the victory parade. Alternate translation: “last in line” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
476	1CO	4	9	e4i1	figs-metaphor	θέατρον ἐγενήθημεν τῷ κόσμῳ, καὶ ἀγγέλοις καὶ ἀνθρώποις	1		Here, Paul speaks as if he and other apostles were part of a gladiatorial game or a theatrical show. He speaks in this way to show that the humiliation and death he and other apostles suffer happens in public, with everyone watching to see what happens. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “we live in full view of the world—both of angels and of men” or “we undergo these things publicly, before the world—both angels and men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
477	1CO	4	9	cqh4	figs-infostructure	τῷ κόσμῳ, καὶ ἀγγέλοις καὶ ἀνθρώποις	1	to the world—to angels, and to human beings	This structure could mean that: (1) Paul wants to define the world as angels and men. Alternate translation: “to the world, that is, both to angels and to men” (2) Paul is listing three different things. Alternate translation: “to the world, to angels, and to men.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
478	1CO	4	9	d8da	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1		Although the word translated men is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether men or women. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to men and women” or “to people” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
479	1CO	4	10	ds54	figs-ellipsis	ἡμεῖς μωροὶ διὰ Χριστόν, ὑμεῖς δὲ φρόνιμοι ἐν Χριστῷ; ἡμεῖς ἀσθενεῖς, ὑμεῖς δὲ ἰσχυροί; ὑμεῖς ἔνδοξοι, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἄτιμοι	1		In Paul’s language, he did not need to include the word translated {are}. However, many languages, including English, must add {are}, which is why the ULT includes it in brackets. If your language would not use {are} here, you could leave it unexpressed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
480	1CO	4	10	johq	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	-1		Here, the word we refers to Paul and the other “apostles.” It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
481	1CO	4	10	fkw2	figs-irony	ἡμεῖς μωροὶ…ἡμεῖς ἀσθενεῖς…ἡμεῖς…ἄτιμοι	1	We are fools … in dishonor	With these statements, Paul identifies what he and the other apostles are like from the perspective of this world. They are fools, weak, and dishonored. Paul does know that from God’s perspective they are actually “wise,” “strong,” and “honored.” However, he speaks from the perspective of this world to help the Corinthians change their thinking. Instead of wanting to be wise, strong, and honored, the Corinthians need to realize that following God will instead make them appear to this world as fools, weak, and dishonored. If the meaning of these statements would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clarifies that they are spoken from a different perspective. Alternate translation: “We {seem to be} fools … We {seem to be} weak … we {seem to be} dishonored” or “According to the world, we {are} fools … According to the word, we {are} weak … according to the world, we {are} dishonored’ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
482	1CO	4	10	ufj2	figs-irony	ὑμεῖς δὲ φρόνιμοι…ὑμεῖς δὲ ἰσχυροί…ὑμεῖς ἔνδοξοι	1		With these statements, Paul identifies what the Corinthians think about themselves. They think they are wise, strong, and honored from the perspective of this world. Paul contrasts what the Corinthians think about themselves and how he and other apostles look from the world’s perspective in order to make the Corinthians reconsider what they think about themselves. If these statements would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies that they are spoken from the perspective of the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “but you consider yourselves wise … but you consider yourselves strong … You consider yourselves honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
483	1CO	4	10	wqh7	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1	You are held in honor	Paul uses the spatial metaphor in Christ to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being in Christ, or united to Christ, explains: (1) the means by which God has made the Corinthians wise. Alternate translation: “by means of your union with Christ” (2) the reason why God has made the Corinthians wise. Alternate translation: “because of your union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
484	1CO	4	10	d1s9	figs-infostructure	ὑμεῖς ἔνδοξοι, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἄτιμοι.	1		Paul changes the order of the last item in the list, putting You in front of we. In his culture, this is one way to identify the last item in a list. If the change in order would be misunderstood in your language, you could change the order to match the order Paul uses for the first two items. Alternate translation: “We {are} dishonored, but you {are} honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
485	1CO	4	11	i298	figs-idiom	ἄχρι τῆς ἄρτι ὥρας	1	Up to this present hour	In Paul’s culture, the phrase Up to this present hour means that what Paul is about to say has been happening and continues to happen up to the time when he writes this letter. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “To this very day” “All the time we serve Christ,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
486	1CO	4	11	k3f1	figs-exclusive	πεινῶμεν	1		Here, the word we refers to Paul and the other “apostles.” It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
487	1CO	4	11	hqco	translate-unknown	γυμνιτεύομεν	1		The word translated are poorly clothed means that the clothing is old and worn and barely covers a person’s body. If the meaning of are poorly clothed would be misunderstood in your language, use a word or phrase that identifies clothing that barely covers a person. Alternate translation: “are clothed in rags” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
488	1CO	4	11	jj2y	figs-activepassive	καὶ κολαφιζόμεθα, καὶ	1	we are brutally beaten	If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form with a vague or indefinite subject. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “and people brutally beat us, and we” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
489	1CO	4	11	yhf4	translate-unknown	ἀστατοῦμεν	1	we are homeless	The word translated are homeless means that Paul and the other apostles do not have a permanent residence or a house that they own. It does not mean that they never had a place to stay. If the meaning of are homeless would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that Paul and the other apostles do not have a permanent residence. Alternate translation: “do not own homes” or “are always on the move” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
490	1CO	4	12	exfo	figs-exclusive	ἰδίαις…εὐλογοῦμεν…ἀνεχόμεθα	1		Here, the words our and we refer to Paul and other “apostles.” They do not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
491	1CO	4	12	ushf	figs-doublet	κοπιῶμεν, ἐργαζόμενοι	1		Here, the words working hard and working mean basically the same thing. Paul uses both words to emphasize how hard he is working. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these words and indicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “are working very hard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
492	1CO	4	12	e0mz	figs-idiom	ἐργαζόμενοι ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσίν	1		In Paul’s culture, the phrase with our own hands indicates that Paul and other apostles were doing manual labor. In fact, we know that Paul himself made tents (see Acts 18:3), so that is probably the manual labor which he refers to here. If with our hands would not refer to manual labor in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or an expression that refers to manual labor. Alternate translation: “doing physically demanding work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
493	1CO	4	12	z6fg	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	λοιδορούμενοι…διωκόμενοι	1		The phrases Being reviled and being persecuted identify the situations in which Paul and other apostles bless and endure. If this relationship would be misunderstood in your language, you could (1) include a word such as “when” to indicate that these actions happen at the same time. Alternate translation: “Any time we are reviled … any time we are persecuted” (2) include a word such as “although” to indicate that these actions are in contrast with each other. Alternate translation: “Although we are reviled … although we are persecuted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
494	1CO	4	12	n389	figs-activepassive	λοιδορούμενοι	1	When we are reviled, we bless	If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Others reviling us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
495	1CO	4	12	o7jz	translate-unknown	λοιδορούμενοι	1		Here, the word translated Being reviled refers to someone abusing another person with words. If that meaning for Being reviled would not be obvious in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does refer to using abusive words about another person. Alternate translation: “Being slandered” or “Being attacked verbally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
496	1CO	4	12	l71q	figs-explicit	εὐλογοῦμεν	1		Here, Paul does not state whom or what they bless. He could mean that they bless: (1) the people who “revile” them. Alternate translation: “we bless in return” (2) God, even though they are suffering. Alternate translation: “we bless God anyway” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
497	1CO	4	12	kue7	figs-activepassive	διωκόμενοι	1	When we are persecuted	If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Others persecuting us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
498	1CO	4	13	xvn4	figs-exclusive	παρακαλοῦμεν…ἐγενήθημεν	1		Here, the word we refers to Paul and other “apostles.” It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
499	1CO	4	13	l3ns	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	δυσφημούμενοι	1		The phrase being slandered identifies the situation in which Paul and other apostles comfort. If this relationship would be misunderstood in your language, you could (1) include a word such as “when” to indicate that these actions happen at the same time. Alternate translation: “Any time we are slandered” (2) include a word such as “although” to indicate that these actions are in contrast with each other. Alternate translation: “Although we are slandered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
500	1CO	4	13	a6hp	figs-activepassive	δυσφημούμενοι	1	When we are slandered	If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “others slandering us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
501	1CO	4	13	p0fd	figs-simile	ὡς περικαθάρματα τοῦ κόσμου ἐγενήθημεν, πάντων περίψημα	1		Here, Paul says that he and other apostles are like scum and refuse, both of which are words that describe garbage. Paul speaks in this way to show that the world considers him and other apostles to be worthless, just like garbage is worthless and should be thrown away. If the meaning of this simile would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable image or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “We have no value according to the world’s perspective” or “We have become like a heap of garbage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
502	1CO	4	13	uubg	figs-doublet	περικαθάρματα τοῦ κόσμου…πάντων περίψημα	1		Here, Paul uses two different words for garbage. The word scum refers to what people throw away after they clean something. The word refuse refers to dirt or filth that people wipe or scrub off an object. Paul uses two very similar words in order to emphasize that the world thinks that he and other apostles are like garbage. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “the filthy scum of all the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
503	1CO	4	13	gqxj	figs-possession	περικαθάρματα τοῦ κόσμου	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe what the world identifies as scum. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a short phrase to clarify that scum is what the world thinks he and other apostles are. Alternate translation: “what the world considers scum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
504	1CO	4	13	flf9	figs-synecdoche	τοῦ κόσμου	1		When Paul uses the world in this context, he is not referring primarily to everything that God has made. Rather, he uses the world to refer to human beings who do not believe in Jesus. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that refers to human beings in general. Alternate translation: “of human beings” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche)
505	1CO	4	13	ip6p	figs-possession	πάντων περίψημα	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe refuse that: (1) comes from all things. Alternate translation: “the refuse from all things” (2) all people consider to be garbage. Alternate translation: “what all people consider to be refuse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
506	1CO	4	13	z4tt	figs-idiom	ἕως ἄρτι	1		Here, Paul ends this sentence in a similar way to how he began his sentence in 4:11. In Paul’s culture, the phrase even until now means that what Paul speaks about has been happening and continues to happen up to the time when he writes this letter. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “to this very day” “all the time we serve Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
507	1CO	4	14	k1at	figs-infostructure	οὐκ ἐντρέπων ὑμᾶς γράφω ταῦτα, ἀλλ’ ὡς τέκνα μου ἀγαπητὰ, νουθετῶ	1	I do not write these things to shame you, but to correct you	If putting the negative statement before the positive statement would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “I correct {you} as my beloved children. I do not write these things as shaming you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
508	1CO	4	14	r9pj	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἐντρέπων ὑμᾶς	1		Here, the phrase as shaming you introduces what Paul did not write to do. If as shaming would be understood as a purpose in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does clearly indicate purpose. Alternate translation: “in order to shame you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
509	1CO	4	14	nlzx	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1		The word translated these things refers back to what Paul has already written, focusing on 4:6–13. If that meaning for these things would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers back to what Paul has just finished writing. Alternate translation: “what I have said about us apostles and you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
510	1CO	4	14	t8jc	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὡς τέκνα μου ἀγαπητὰ	1	correct	Here, the phrase as my beloved children introduces (1) the reason why Paul corrects the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “because you are my beloved children” (2) the way in which he corrects the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “as a father corrects his beloved children, so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
511	1CO	4	14	ruu5	figs-metaphor	τέκνα μου ἀγαπητὰ	1	my beloved children	Here, Paul speaks of the Corinthians as if they were his beloved children. He speaks in this way because he is their spiritual father, the one who first preached the good news to them. Also, he loves them in the same way a father loves his own children. If Paul calling the Corinthians his beloved children would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “my beloved younger siblings” or “fellow believers whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
512	1CO	4	15	ur1i	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ἐὰν…μυρίους παιδαγωγοὺς ἔχητε ἐν Χριστῷ	1		Here, Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that the Corinthians do not have myriads of guardians, but he speaks in this way to emphasize that they have only one spiritual father, no matter how many guardians they have. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “even if you somehow had myriads of guardians in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
513	1CO	4	15	n8c1	figs-hyperbole	μυρίους παιδαγωγοὺς	1	ten thousand guardians	Here, myriads of guardians is an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to mean a large number of guardians. If that would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a large number. Alternate translation: “many guardians” or “a large number of guardians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
514	1CO	4	15	nkcc	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1		Here, Paul uses the spatial metaphor in Christ to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being in Christ, or united to Christ, identifies: (1) that these guardians are helping the Corinthians in their union with Christ. Alternate translation: “who work to unite you more strongly to Christ” (2) the guardians as fellow believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “who believe in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
515	1CO	4	15	d25x	figs-ellipsis	οὐ πολλοὺς πατέρας	1		Here, Paul omits some words that may be essential in your language to create a complete thought. In English, these words are essential, so they have been included in the ULT in brackets. If you can translate this sentence without these words, you could do so here. Otherwise, you could retain these words as they appear in the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
516	1CO	4	15	yij4		οὐ πολλοὺς πατέρας	1		Alternate translation: “{you would have} only one father”
517	1CO	4	15	j01t	figs-exmetaphor	οὐ πολλοὺς πατέρας; ἐν γὰρ Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, ἐγὼ ὑμᾶς ἐγέννησα.	1		Here, Paul speaks of himself as a “father” to the Corinthian believers. He became their father through the gospel, which means that he is their spiritual father. He is the one who preached the gospel to them when they became united to Christ Jesus, and that makes him the one who fathered them. If how Paul speaks about fathers would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that Paul refers to “spiritual” fathers. Alternate translation: “{you would} not {have} many spiritual fathers; for I fathered you spiritually in Christ Jesus through the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
518	1CO	4	15	m9ek	figs-metaphor	ἐν…Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	2	I became your father in Christ Jesus through the gospel	Here, Paul uses the spatial metaphor in Christ Jesus to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being in Christ, or united to Christ, explains: (1) that the Corinthians became united to Christ when Paul preached the good news to them. Alternate translation: “when you were united to Christ Jesus” (2) Paul is their father in the Christian family, the family that is united to Christ. Alternate translation: “in the Christian family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
519	1CO	4	16	vkao	figs-abstractnouns	μιμηταί μου γίνεσθε	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind imitators, you could express the idea by using a verbal such as “imitate.” Alternate translation: “imitate me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
520	1CO	4	17	lrqn	writing-pronouns	διὰ τοῦτο	1		Here, this refers back to what Paul said in the previous verse about imitating him. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that it refers back to the previous verse. Alternate translation: “For that reason” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
521	1CO	4	17	r7z7		ἔπεμψα	1		Sometimes, Paul uses the past tense sent with reference to the person who carries the letter to its destination. However, Paul later speak of Timothy visiting them as only a possibility (see 16:10). Therefore, the visit to which Paul refers here could: (1) have already happened by the time Paul is writing this letter. Timothy would be visiting the Corinthians while Paul is writing this letter, since Paul uses the future tense to refer to how Timothy will remind them of Paul’s ways. Alternate translation: “I have sent” (2) be when Timothy brings the letter to them, at which time he will remind them of his ways. Alternate translation: “I am sending”
522	1CO	4	17	hi7w	figs-metaphor	ὅς ἐστίν μου τέκνον, ἀγαπητὸν καὶ πιστὸν	1	my beloved and faithful child in the Lord	Here, Paul speaks of Timothy as if he were his own child. This continues the metaphor about Paul as a spiritual father from 4:15. Paul is Timothy’s spiritual father, and Paul loves Timothy in the way a father loves his child. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “who is my beloved and faithful spiritual child” or “whom I love and who is faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
523	1CO	4	17	nwqz	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1		Here, Paul uses the spatial metaphor in the Lord to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being in the Lord, or united to the Lord, identifies Timothy as someone who faithfully does what he is called to do in his union with the Lord. Alternate translation: “in his union with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
524	1CO	4	17	oqd7	figs-metaphor	τὰς ὁδούς μου τὰς ἐν	1		Here, Paul speaks of how he lives and what he does as my ways, which refers to the paths that Paul walks on. This way of speaking is related to how Paul has already spoken of behavior as “walking” (see 3:3). The phrase my ways could identify: (1) how Paul thinks and lives. Alternate translation: “the way that I live in” (2) the principles that Paul follows concerning how to think and live. Alternate translation: “the principles that I follow in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
525	1CO	4	17	cq9z	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Here, Paul uses the spatial metaphor in Christ Jesus to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being in Christ Jesus, or united to Christ Jesus, describes Paul’s ways as ways that are appropriate for those united to Christ Jesus. Alternate translation: “appropriate in union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
526	1CO	4	17	j6gj	figs-explicit	καθὼς…διδάσκω	1		Here, Paul does not explicitly state what it is that he is teaching. From the previous words, however, it is clear that he teaches his ways, the same ways that Timothy will remind them about. If you need to clarify what Paul teaches, you could refer to the ways explicitly. Alternate translation: “the same ways that I teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
527	1CO	4	17	xs5y	figs-hyperbole	πανταχοῦ ἐν πάσῃ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1		Here, Paul speaks as if Paul has been everywhere and visited every church. The Corinthians would have understood this to refer to everywhere and every church that Paul has visited. If everywhere and every church would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that Paul refers to every place and church he has visited. Alternate translation: “everywhere I go and in every church that I visit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
528	1CO	4	18	v4fn	grammar-connect-time-sequential	δέ	1	Now	Here, the word translated Now introduces a development in the argument. Paul starts addressing some of the Corinthians who are proud. If Now does not introduce a new part of the argument in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does do this. Alternate translation: “Moving on,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
529	1CO	4	17	wdug	figs-doublet	πανταχοῦ ἐν πάσῃ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1		Here, the words everywhere and in every church have very similar meanings. Paul repeats the idea to emphasize that he teaches the ways in every church, not just among the Corinthians. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine the two phrases into one. Alternate translation: “in every church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
530	1CO	4	18	th6i	writing-pronouns	τινες	1		The word some refers to some of the Corinthians. If the reference of some would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that it identifies some Corinthian believers. Alternate translation: “some from among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
531	1CO	4	18	flbr	figs-activepassive	ἐφυσιώθησάν	1		If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with “themselves” as the object. Alternate translation: “have puffed themselves up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
532	1CO	4	18	gap0	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ὡς	1		Here, Paul speaks of him not coming as something that is a possibility. However, he is convinced that this is not true, since he will “come” to them. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “as if” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
533	1CO	4	19	jdk5	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	I will come to you	Here, But introduces a contrast with what some people are thinking in the previous verse, that is, that Paul is not going to visit them. In this verse, he says that he will visit them soon. Use a word or phrase in your language that introduces a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “Despite what they think,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
534	1CO	4	19	y1sl	figs-infostructure	ἐλεύσομαι…ταχέως πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ἐὰν ὁ Κύριος θελήσῃ	1		If your language would put the if statement first, you could rearrange these two clauses. Alternate translation: “if the Lord wills, I will come to you soon” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
535	1CO	4	19	eyq3	figs-hypo	ἐὰν ὁ Κύριος θελήσῃ	1		Here, Paul says that he will only visit the Corinthians if the Lord wills. He is not sure whether the Lord will “will” or not. Use a form in your language that indicates a true hypothetical. Alternate translation: “only if the Lord wills, of course” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
536	1CO	4	19	tdbk	figs-explicit	τὸν λόγον…τὴν δύναμιν	1		The contrast between word and power was well-known in Paul’s culture. The contrast states that people can say many things, but they cannot always do what they say they can. If your language has a way to express this contrast between “talk” and “action,” you could use it here. Alternate translation: “the talk … their deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
537	1CO	4	19	kbp1	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τῶν πεφυσιωμένων	1		Here, word figuratively represents what someone says in words. If word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what these who have been puffed up say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
538	1CO	4	19	fz8n	figs-activepassive	τῶν πεφυσιωμένων	1		If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with “themselves” as the object. Alternate translation: “of these people who have puffed themselves up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
539	1CO	4	19	m92u	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δύναμιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind power, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “how powerful they are” or “their powerful deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
540	1CO	4	20	iucw	figs-metaphor	οὐ…ἐν λόγῳ ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀλλ’ ἐν δυνάμει	1		Here, Paul speaks as if the kingdom of God exists in, not word, but power. By this, he means that the kingdom of God does not consist in what people say but in what they do. To say it another way, word, or what people say, by itself does not make people part of God’s kingdom. Rather, it takes God’s power working for and through people to make them part of God’s kingdom. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God consists not in word but in power” or “the kingdom of God is not about word but about power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
541	1CO	4	20	shgb	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν λόγῳ…ἀλλ’ ἐν δυνάμει	1		The contrast between word and power was well-known in Paul’s culture. The contrast states that people can say many things, but they cannot always do what they say they can. If your language has a way to express this contrast between “talk” and “action,” you could use it here. Alternate translation: “not in talk but in deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
542	1CO	4	20	gfhp	figs-metonymy	λόγῳ	1		Here, word figuratively represents what someone says in words. If word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what people say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
543	1CO	4	20	wzpo	figs-abstractnouns	δυνάμει	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind power, you could express the idea another way. Alternate translation: “powerful deeds” or “what people powerfully do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
544	1CO	4	21	ix5g	figs-rquestion	τί θέλετε?	1	What do you want?	Paul asks the Corinthians What they want because he wants them to realize that their behavior will show him how to respond to them. He does not want the Corinthians to tell him all their desires. Rather, he presents two options in the rest of the verse, and the question What do you want? shows the Corinthians that they can choose between those two options by listening to Paul or choosing not to listen to him. If your language does not use a question to express this idea, you could translate the question in statement form. Alternate translation: “Depending on what you do, I will behave towards you in one of two ways.” or “How you respond to me will tell me how to respond to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
545	1CO	4	21	wv61	figs-rquestion	ἐν ῥάβδῳ ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ἢ ἐν ἀγάπῃ, πνεύματί τε πραΰτητος?	1	Shall I come to you with a rod or with love and in a spirit of gentleness?	Here, Paul uses a question to present the two options for how he could act toward the Corinthians when he “comes” to them. He asks a question for the same reason he asked the first question in this verse. He wants them to realize that how they choose to respond to him will dictate how he will act when he visits. If they do not listen to him, he will come with a rod. If they do listen, he will come with love and a spirit of gentleness. If your language does not use a question to express this idea, you could translate the question in statement form. Alternate translation: “I will either come to you with a rod or with love and a spirit of gentleness.” or “If you do not listen, I will come to you with a rod. If you do listen, I will come to you with love and a spirit of gentleness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
546	1CO	4	21	bl1d	figs-metaphor	ἐν ῥάβδῳ	1		Paul speaks of coming with a rod as if he is going to physically beat the Corinthians to teach them to listen to him. This metaphor may continue the way in which he speaks of himself as a “father” in 4:14–15, since fathers could punish their children physically with a rod if they did not obey. By speaking in this way, Paul thus refers to discipline or punishment, but the discipline he threatens will not be physical. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that would describe discipline or punishment, or you could express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “to punish you” or “with a harsh rebuke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
547	1CO	4	21	h4oj	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀγάπῃ…τε	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind love, you could express the idea by using an adverb such as “lovingly” or a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “shall I love you with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
548	1CO	4	21	u7b9	figs-possession	πνεύματί…πραΰτητος	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a spirit that is characterized by gentleness. If your language would not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could express the idea by translating gentleness as an adjective, such as “gentle.” Alternate translation: “a gentle spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
549	1CO	4	21	hpmb	translate-unknown	πνεύματί	1		Here, spirit does not refer to God’s Spirit, the Holy Spirit. Rather, it refers to Paul’s spirit. In Paul’s culture, as spirit of something is a way to describe a person’s attitude that is characterized by that thing. Here, then, Paul speaks about an attitude that is gentle. If spirit would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word such as “attitude” to express the idea. Alternate translation: “an attitude” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
550	1CO	4	21	ix7l	figs-abstractnouns	πραΰτητος	1	of gentleness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind gentleness, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “gentle.” Alternate translation: “that is gentle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
551	1CO	5	intro	vb3l			0		1 Corinthians 5 General Notes Structure and formatting Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20) Paul condemns a sexually immoral man (5:1–5) Passover festival metaphor (5:6–8) Explanation of previous letter (5:9–13) Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 13. Verse 13 quotes from Deuteronomy 17:7. Special concepts in this chapter Sexual immorality This chapter deals mostly with what Paul calls “sexual immorality” (5:1, 9–11). The word Paul uses for “sexual immorality” is a general term for sexual behavior that is considered improper. The specific type of “sexual immorality” that Paul addresses in this chapter is a man having sex with his step-mother. In some languages, there is a specific word for this. English uses the word “incest.” However, since Paul uses a general term and then brings up a specific situation, you also should use a general term for “sexual immorality” in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fornication]]) Judgment Paul refers to “judgment” or “judging” in 5:3, 12–13. “Judging” refers to deciding whether someone is guilty or innocent. Paul emphasizes in this chapter that Christians should “judge” other Christians in the proper setting (see 5:3–5). However, they do not need to “judge” people who are not Christians. Paul states that “judging” them is God’s responsibility (5:12–13). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]]) Excommunication In 5:2, Paul speaks about “removing” the person who committed the sexual sin from among the Corinthians, and he makes a similar command in 5:13. The phrase “hand this man over to Satan” in 5:5 has a similar meaning. Finally, when Paul tells them to “clean out the old yeast” (5:7), this is a metaphor for the same action. Paul is commanding the Corinthians to stop including in their group the man who committed the sexual sin. It is not totally clear whether the man can be accepted back into the group if he stops committing the sin. Important figures of speech in this chapter Euphemisms As is the case in many cultures, sexual behavior is a delicate topic. Paul thus uses euphemisms to avoid sounding crude or nasty. When he says that “someone has his father’s wife” (5:1), this is a delicate way to refer to someone consistently having sex with his father’s wife, whether married or not. He later on calls this behavior “a deed” (5:2) or “such a thing” (5:3). These phrases are ways of referring back to the man having sex with his father’s wife without using crude words. If your language has similar euphemisms for delicately referring to sexual behavior, you could use them here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) Passover metaphor In 5:6–8, Paul speaks of “yeast” and “Passover.” Passover was Jewish festival in which the people celebrated how God delivered them from serving as slaves in Egypt. The Israelites sacrificed lambs and spread the blood on their doors, and they ate bread without yeast in it because they would have to leave quickly. Then, God sent a destroying angel who killed the firstborn child in every house that did not have blood on its door. When this happened, the ruler of Egypt told the Israelites to leave immediately. You can read about these events in Exodus 12. Later generations of Israelites celebrated this day by removing the yeast from their houses and by sacrificing a lamb. Paul refers to this festival in these verses. He uses the festival of Passover as a metaphor to encourage the Corinthians to remove sinful people (“yeast”) from their group (“their house”). There is even a “Passover lamb,” who is Jesus himself. Since this metaphor is drawn from the Old Testament, you should preserve it in your translation. If necessary you can include a footnote that gives some extra information, or you could refer your readers to Exodus 12 if they have access to the book of Exodus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/yeast]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]], and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Rhetorical questions In 5:6 and 5:12, Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) Present in spirit In 5:3–4, Paul speaks of being with the Corinthians “in spirit.” While this could be a reference to the Holy Spirit, who would connect Paul with the Corinthians, more likely Paul is referring to his own “spirit,” which refers to the aspect of Paul that can connect with the Corinthians even when he is not physically present. When he says that he is with them “in spirit,” that means that he is thinking about them and that they should act as they would if Paul was physically present. You could either use a comparable idiom in your language or explain in some other way what “spirit” means in these verses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter Structure of 5:3–5 In 5:3–5, Paul uses a long and complicated sentence structure. In 5:3, he describes how he has “passed judgment” as if he were present. In 5:5, he tells them what the response to that judgment should be: “hand this man over to Satan.” In 5:4, then, he describes the situation in which they should hand the man over: they should be gathered together and acting with the authority of both Paul and Jesus. Finally, in 5:4, “in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ” could describe how Paul has “passed judgment” in 5:3, or it could describe how the Corinthians have “assembled” in 5:4. In order to translate these verses clearly, you may need to rearrange some clauses or add explanatory information that clarifies what Paul is saying. For more details and translation options, see the notes on those verses. Structure of 5:12–13 In 5:12–13, Paul alternates between talking about judging “those outside” and “those inside.” If alternating between these two ideas would be confusing in your language, you could rearrange the clauses so that the verses deal with “those outside” first and then “those inside.” Here is an example of how you could do this: “For what to me to judge those outside? God will judge those outside. But do you not judge those inside? “Remove the evil from among yourselves.”
552	1CO	5	1	k55t	translate-unknown	ὅλως ἀκούεται	1		The word translated actually can: (1) emphasize that something is really true. Alternate translation: “It is really reported that” (2) emphasize that many people know about what is going on in the Corinthian church. Alternate translation: “It is everywhere reported that” or “It is reported by many people that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
553	1CO	5	1	wrj1	figs-activepassive	ὅλως ἀκούεται	1		Here, Paul intentionally uses a passive form to avoid stating who told him about the sexual immorality. If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea by making Paul the subject of a verb such as “learn” or by using a form that avoids naming a person. Alternate translation: “Some people have actually reported to me that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
554	1CO	5	1	dlj2	figs-doublet	ἐν ὑμῖν πορνεία, καὶ τοιαύτη πορνεία ἥτις οὐδὲ ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	which does not even exist among the Gentiles	Here, Paul repeats sexual immorality in order to emphasize how shocked and upset he is that people among the Corinthians are committing sexual sins. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these two statements and express Paul’s shock in another way. Alternate translation: “{there is} sexual immorality among you that even the Gentiles condemn” or “you overlook flagrant sexual immorality, a kind which even the Gentiles do not accept” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
555	1CO	5	1	bnnc	figs-explicit	ἥτις οὐδὲ ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		While Paul does not explicitly say why this immorality is not among the Gentiles, the Corinthians would have understood him to mean that the Gentiles do not permit such behavior and prohibit it by law or social practice. If this information would not be implied in your language, you could include a word or phrase that indicates that Paul refers to the attitude of Gentiles towards this kind of sexual immorality. Alternate translation: “which even the Gentiles avoid” or “which even the Gentiles find shocking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
556	1CO	5	1	q8p7	translate-unknown	τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		Here, Paul does not use the Gentiles primarily to refer to non-Jews, since there were non-Jewish members of the church. Rather, Paul uses the Gentiles to describe anyone who does not worship the true God. If the Gentiles would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies those who do not worship or serve God. Alternate translation: “the pagans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
557	1CO	5	1	b9xn		γυναῖκά τινα τοῦ πατρὸς ἔχειν	1	a man has his father’s wife	In Paul’s culture, if man has a woman, it refers to a long-term sexual relationship. Often this would be a marriage, but it could also be a sexual relationship without marriage. Here, it is not clear whether the person (someone) marries his father’s wife or not. What is clear is that he is in a long-term sexual relationship with his father’s wife. If possible use a word or phrase that indicates this kind of general relationship. Alternate translation: “someone is living with his father’s wife” or “someone is sleeping with his father’s wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
558	1CO	5	1	lxp1	translate-kinship	γυναῖκά…τοῦ πατρὸς	1	father’s wife	Here, his father’s wife identifies a woman who is married to a man’s father but who is not the man’s mother. If your language has a specific word for this relationship, you could use it here. If your language does not have a word for this relationship, you could describe the relationship with a phrase, much like the ULT does. Alternate translation: “his father’s wife who is not his mother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
559	1CO	5	2	idwe	figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς πεφυσιωμένοι ἐστέ	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form, with “yourselves” as the object. Alternate translation: “you puff yourselves up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
560	1CO	5	2	uwco	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα ἀρθῇ…ὁ, τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο ποιήσας	1		The word translated so that could introduce: (1) a purpose for the “mourning.” Alternate translation: “in order that the one who did this deed might be removed (2) a command. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add period before it. Alternate translation: “The one who did this deed should be removed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
561	1CO	5	2	rr93	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ἀρθῇ ἐκ μέσου ὑμῶν ὁ, τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο ποιήσας	1	The one who did this must be removed from among you	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form with the Corinthians as the subject. Alternate translation: “so that you remove the one who did this deed from among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
562	1CO	5	2	ffwt	figs-doublet	ὁ, τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο ποιήσας	1		In Paul’s culture, it was normal to use both did and deed to refer to performing an act. If your language would not use both did and deed here, you could express the idea with just one of these two words. Alternate translation: “the one who did this” or “the one who acted out this deed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
563	1CO	5	2	qwja	figs-idiom	ἀρθῇ ἐκ μέσου ὑμῶν	1		When someone is removed from among a group, it means that he or she is no longer part of the group. If your language has a specific word or phrase to describe expelling a member of a group, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “might be banned from your group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
564	1CO	5	3	rm6l	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		Here, the word For introduces the reason why the man who has committed the sexual sin should be “removed from among you” (5:2). The reason is because Paul has already passed judgment on him, and so the Corinthians should be enacting the punishment. Use a word or phrase in your language that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “He should be removed since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
565	1CO	5	3	u5a2	figs-idiom	ἀπὼν τῷ σώματι	1		In Paul’s culture, being absent in body is a figurative way to speak about not being present in person. If being absent in the body would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression or translate the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “not being there with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
566	1CO	5	3	xm4e		παρὼν…τῷ πνεύματι	1	I am present in spirit	In Paul’s culture, being present in spirit is a figurative way to speak of thinking about and caring about that person. If being present in spirit would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “still being connected to you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom)
567	1CO	5	3	gfep		τῷ πνεύματι	1		Here, spirit could refer to: (1) Paul’s spirit, which would be the part of him that connects with the Corinthians across a distance. Alternate translation: “in my spirit” (2) the Holy Spirit, which connects Paul with the Corinthians, even though they are not physically together. Alternate translation: “in God’s Spirit” or “by the power of God’s Spirit”
568	1CO	5	3	ax3u		ἤδη κέκρικα…τὸν οὕτως τοῦτο κατεργασάμενον	1	I have already passed judgment on the one who did this	Here, Paul has already passed judgment, which means that he has declared the man to be guilty. Two verses down (5:4), Paul specifies what the punishment that results from the judgment should be: the man should be “handed over to Satan.” Here, then, use a word or phrase that indicates a decision about guilt, not a punishment. Alternate translation: “have already judged the one who did such a thing to be guilty”
569	1CO	5	3	sac6	figs-abstractnouns	ἤδη κέκρικα	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind judgment, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “judge” instead of passed judgment on. Alternate translation: “have already judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
570	1CO	5	3	v4o9	figs-euphemism	τὸν οὕτως τοῦτο κατεργασάμενον	1		Paul does not wish to repeat the ugly details of the man having sex with his stepmother. Instead, Paul uses general words to refer back to what he has already said about the man. If possible, preserve how Paul avoids repeating the details of the sin in your translation. You could use vague language like Paul does, or you could use a similar euphemism. Alternate translation: “the man who committed this sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
571	1CO	5	3	g8b6	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ὡς παρὼν	1		Here, Paul makes a conditional statement that might sound hypothetical but that he knows is not true. He knows that he is not present with them, but he wants to emphasize that his judgment is just as effective as if he were present. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “even though I am absent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
572	1CO	5	4	xc3z	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	συναχθέντων ὑμῶν καὶ τοῦ ἐμοῦ πνεύματος	1		The phrase You and my spirit, having been assembled gives the time and situation in which the Corinthians should “hand this man over to Satan” (5:5). If this phrase would not indicate timing or a situation in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does indicate time or situation. Alternate translation: “One of the times when you and my spirit have been assembled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
573	1CO	5	4	m9yz	figs-activepassive	συναχθέντων	1	When you are assembled	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form by using a verb such as “gather together” or “meet.” Alternate translation: “meeting together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
574	1CO	5	4	t83d	figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	in the name of our Lord Jesus	Acting in the name of a person means representing that person. Representatives, those who do anything in the name of someone else, act with the authority of the people they represent. If in the name of would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom for representing someone or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “as representatives of our Lord Jesus Christ” or “as people who act for our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
575	1CO	5	4	fznv	figs-infostructure	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, συναχθέντων ὑμῶν καὶ τοῦ ἐμοῦ πνεύματος,	1		The phrase in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ could modify: (1) how Paul has “passed judgment” in 5:3. Alternate translation: “I passed this judgment in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ. You and my spirit, having been assembled,” (2) how they have been assembled. See ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
576	1CO	5	4	rhdc	figs-idiom	καὶ τοῦ ἐμοῦ πνεύματος	1		Just as in 5:3, Paul speaks of his “spirit.” Just as there, Paul’s spirit being assembled with them is a figurative way to speak of how Paul thinks about and cares about them. Here, it has the additional implication that what they do when assembled carries Paul’s own authority. If my spirit would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “and my thoughts” or “with my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
577	1CO	5	4	ku2d		τοῦ ἐμοῦ πνεύματος	1		Here, my spirit could refer to: (1) Paul’s spirit, which would be the part of him that connects with the Corinthians across a distance. Alternate translation: “my own spirit” (2) the Holy Spirit, which connects Paul with the Corinthians, even though they are not physically together. Alternate translation: “my share of God’s Spirit” or “I, by the power of God’s Spirit”
578	1CO	5	4	jz43	figs-abstractnouns	σὺν τῇ δυνάμει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind power, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “empower” or “authorize.” Alternate translation: “as people who are empowered by our Lord Jesus” or “as people whom our Lord Jesus has empowered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
579	1CO	5	5	pqbs	figs-infostructure	παραδοῦναι τὸν τοιοῦτον	1		hand this man over identifies the punishment that goes with the verdict that Paul reached when he “judged” him (5:3). If possible, express hand this man over as the result or the implication of Paul having “already judged” him. Alternate translation: “since I have declared this man guilty, hand him over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
580	1CO	5	5	xcf6	figs-metaphor	παραδοῦναι τὸν τοιοῦτον τῷ Σατανᾷ	1	hand this man over to Satan	The phrase hand someone over to someone else refers to transferring a person from one authority to another. Here, then, Paul wants the Corinthians to transfer this man from under the authority of the church to under the authority of Satan. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable idiom or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “turn this man over to Satan” or “put this man under Satan’s authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
581	1CO	5	5	xmig	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ὄλεθρον τῆς σαρκός	1		Here, for introduces the result of “handing this man over to Satan.” If for would not indicate result in your language, use a word or phrase that does introduce a result. Alternate translation: “with the result that his flesh is destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
582	1CO	5	5	nq4y	translate-unknown	εἰς ὄλεθρον τῆς σαρκός	1	for the destruction of the flesh	This phrase could be a reference to the destruction of: (1) the parts of the man that are weak and sinful, which would indicate cleansing or sanctification. Alternate translation: “so that he will not continue to live sinfully” (2) the man’s physical body, which would indicate either be physical suffering or death. Alternate translation: “so that he suffers in his body” or “for the death of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
583	1CO	5	5	jg1u	figs-possession	ὄλεθρον τῆς σαρκός	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to clarify that destruction will happen to the flesh. If your language does not use this form to express that idea, you could translate destruction with a verb such as “destroy.” Alternate translation: “destroying the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
584	1CO	5	5	nqn8	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ὄλεθρον τῆς σαρκός	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind destruction, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “destroy.” Alternate translation: “to destroy the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
585	1CO	5	5	tit6	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		While for the destruction of the flesh is the result of the “handing over,” the words so that introduce the purpose of the “handing over.” Use a word or phrase in your language that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that” or “with the goal that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
586	1CO	5	5	z2cl	figs-activepassive	τὸ πνεῦμα σωθῇ	1	so that his spirit may be saved on the day of the Lord	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God may save his spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
587	1CO	5	5	eibc	translate-unknown	τὸ πνεῦμα	1		Here, spirit refers to the parts of this man that are not flesh. Therefore, the spirit is not just the non-physical part of the person but rather a reference to the whole person apart from his or her sins and weaknesses. If that meaning of spirit would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the salvation of the whole person. Alternate translation: “he” or “his soul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
588	1CO	5	5	ny5b	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου	1		Here, Paul uses the words translated day of the Lord in the same way the Old Testament uses them: to refer to an event in which God saves his people and punishes his enemies. Paul specifically refers to the event in which Jesus returns to judge everyone. If that meaning of day of the Lord would be misunderstood in your language, you could include more words that clarify what Paul means by day. Alternate translation: “on the day when the Lord returns” or “when the Lord comes to judge everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
589	1CO	5	6	h2hk		οὐ καλὸν τὸ καύχημα ὑμῶν	1	Your boasting is not good	Alternate translation: “Your boasting is bad”
590	1CO	5	6	mucf	figs-explicit	μικρὰ ζύμη, ὅλον τὸ φύραμα ζυμοῖ	1		In 5:6–8, Paul speaks about yeast and “dough.” Verses 7–8 clarify that Paul is thinking about the “Passover.” In this Jewish festival, people would remove all the yeast from their houses and only bake dough that was not fermented (“unleavened bread”). See Exodus 12:1–28. In this verse, then, the yeast does not represent a good thing. Rather, it is supposed to be removed from the house, but any yeast that is left will still “leaven” a whole loaf. If your language would not consider yeast to be a bad thing when mixed into dough, you could include a word or phrase that indicates that the yeast is not wanted in the dough. Alternate translation: “a little yeast leavens a whole loaf that is meant to be unleavened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
591	1CO	5	6	n9w0	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι μικρὰ ζύμη, ὅλον τὸ φύραμα ζυμοῖ?	1		Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information or for agreement or disagreement. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing by reminding them of something that they should already know. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “you know that a little yeast leavens the whole loaf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
592	1CO	5	6	ng4m	figs-exmetaphor	μικρὰ ζύμη, ὅλον τὸ φύραμα ζυμοῖ	1	Do you not know that a little yeast leavens the whole loaf?	Here, the word translated yeast refers to anything that is added to bread dough to make it ferment and rise. This could be yeast itself or dough that is already fermented (“leaven”). Paul here uses this metaphor to indicate that, just like even a little bit of yeast will “leaven” the whole loaf, so a little bit of sin, or one person who sins, will affect the whole church. Therefore, the Corinthians believers should not “boast,” since the one person who is sinning among them denigrates the whole church. Since this metaphor is based on material from the Old Testament, you should try to preserve the form in your language. You could use a simile, or if necessary, you could use a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “sin is like yeast: a little yeast leavens the whole loaf” or “a bad apple spoils the whole barrel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
593	1CO	5	7	b8fi	figs-explicit	ἐκκαθάρατε τὴν παλαιὰν ζύμην, ἵνα ἦτε νέον φύραμα, καθώς ἐστε ἄζυμοι. καὶ γὰρ τὸ Πάσχα ἡμῶν ἐτύθη, Χριστός	1		Just as in 5:6 and 5:8, Paul is thinking about the Jewish festival of Passover. During this festival, people would remove all the yeast from their houses and only bake unleavened bread, that is, bread that is not fermented. Additionally, a lamb would be sacrificed and eaten. The lamb would remind the people about how God had delivered them from slavery in the land of Egypt. See Exodus 12:1–28. If your readers would not infer this information, you could include a footnote that explains Passover and how it relates to yeast and a Lamb. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
594	1CO	5	7	mpra	figs-exmetaphor	ἐκκαθάρατε τὴν παλαιὰν ζύμην, ἵνα ἦτε νέον φύραμα, καθώς ἐστε ἄζυμοι	1		Here, Paul speaks about Jews would clean out the old yeast during the festival of Passover and only bake with unleavened bread. Just like in 5:6, he compares sin to yeast. By speaking in this way, he urges the Corinthians to clean out the person who is sinning. Then, they will be like new dough, like unleavened bread, that is, without sin. Since this metaphor is based on material from the Old Testament, you should try to preserve the form in your language. You could use a simile, or if necessary, you could use a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “Clean out the old yeast, that is, sin, so that you may be new dough, just as you are unleavened bread” or “Clean out the bad apple so that you may be a fresh barrel, just as you are fresh apples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
595	1CO	5	7	z7vq	translate-unknown	καθώς ἐστε ἄζυμοι	1		When Paul says that they are unleavened bread, this means that they are danger of encountering the yeast, that is, sin. This is why they must clean out the old yeast. If they remain unleavened by avoiding contact with old yeast, they will be new dough. If you are unleavened bread would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that Paul calls them this because it shows that yeast is a threat to them. Alternate translation: “for you are currently unleavened bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
596	1CO	5	7	x3pt	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, Paul introduces the reason why his metaphor about yeast is appropriate. Christ is like the Passover lamb. Since Christ has been sacrificed like that lamb, the Corinthians are supposed to live as if it is Passover. This means avoiding sin in their group. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could make it more explicit. Alternate translation: “You should act like people observing Passover because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
597	1CO	5	7	ret3	figs-explicit	καὶ…τὸ Πάσχα ἡμῶν ἐτύθη, Χριστός	1	Christ, our Passover lamb, has been sacrificed	When God delivered the Jewish people from Egypt, he required them to sacrifice a lamb and spread its blood on their doors. God did not harm anyone who had the blood on their door, but the firstborn son of anyone who did not have the blood on their door died. Because of this, the lamb that was sacrificed at Passover represented God delivering the Jewish people by accepting the lamb’s death in place of the firstborn son. See Exodus 12:1–28. The implication here is that Christ’s death also functioned in this way, in place of those whom he delivers. If this implication would be misunderstood by your readers, you could add a footnote explaining the function of the lamb at Passover. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
598	1CO	5	7	qhrz	figs-exmetaphor	καὶ…τὸ Πάσχα ἡμῶν ἐτύθη, Χριστός	1		Here, Paul compares Christ to the Passover lamb, since both died to save someone else. Since this metaphor is based on material from the Old Testament, you should try to preserve the form in your language, or you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “Christ, who is like our Passover lamb, has also been sacrificed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
599	1CO	5	7	yzjl	figs-activepassive	καὶ…τὸ Πάσχα ἡμῶν ἐτύθη, Χριστός	1		Paul intentionally does not state who sacrificed the Passover lamb, who is Christ. If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in another way. If possible, do not state who sacrificed Christ. Alternate translation: “Christ, our Passover lamb, has also died as a sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
600	1CO	5	8	ouhj	figs-explicit	ὥστε ἑορτάζωμεν, μὴ ἐν ζύμῃ παλαιᾷ, μηδὲ ἐν ζύμῃ κακίας καὶ πονηρίας, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀζύμοις εἰλικρινείας καὶ ἀληθείας.	1		Just as in 5:6–7, here Paul speaks about yeast and “dough.” In this Jewish festival of Passover, people would remove all the yeast from their houses and only bake dough that was not fermented (unleavened bread). See Exodus 12:1–28. Here, then, the yeast is what is meant to be removed, and the unleavened bread is what is meant to be eaten. If your readers would not understand this background, you could include a footnote that gives extra information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
601	1CO	5	8	donb	figs-exmetaphor	ὥστε ἑορτάζωμεν, μὴ ἐν ζύμῃ παλαιᾷ, μηδὲ ἐν ζύμῃ κακίας καὶ πονηρίας, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀζύμοις εἰλικρινείας καὶ ἀληθείας.	1		Here, Paul finishes the metaphor about yeast and Passover that he began in 5:6. Paul encourages the Corinthians to celebrate the festival by getting rid of the old yeast. He then identifies that the yeast stands for evil and wickedness, while the unleavened bread that they are supposed to eat stands for sincerity and truth. With this metaphor Paul exhorts the Corinthians to expel the man who has sinned from their group, just as one would remove yeast from one’s house during the festival. Since this metaphor is based on material from the Old Testament, you should try to preserve the form in your language. You could use a simile, or you could include a footnote that explains the metaphor. Alternate translation: “So then, we should be like those who celebrate the festival, not with old yeast, nor with yeast of evil and wickedness, but with unleavened bread of sincerity and truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
602	1CO	5	8	hoew	figs-explicit	ἑορτάζωμεν	1		Because of what Paul has said in 5:7, this festival must be the festival connected with Passover. If your readers would not understand this from the context, you could include the name “Passover” here. Alternate translation: “we might celebrate the Passover festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
603	1CO	5	8	ph92	figs-doublet	μὴ ἐν ζύμῃ παλαιᾷ, μηδὲ ἐν ζύμῃ κακίας καὶ πονηρίας	1		Here, Paul repeats yeast in order to define what he means by old yeast. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine the two phrases and introduce the definition in another way. Alternate translation: “not with old yeast, which is evil and wickedness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
604	1CO	5	8	xvx4	figs-possession	ζύμῃ κακίας καὶ πονηρίας	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive from to identify the yeast as evil and wickedness. If your language does not use this form for that idea, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that renames or identifies something. Alternate translation: “yeast, that is, evil and wickedness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
605	1CO	5	8	fo1r	figs-abstractnouns	κακίας καὶ πονηρίας	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind evil and wickedness, you could express the ideas by using adjectives that describe actions or “behavior.” Alternate translation: “of evil and wicked behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
606	1CO	5	8	ymus	figs-doublet	κακίας καὶ πονηρίας	1		Here, the words evil and wickedness mean almost the same thing. The word evil refers to something that is morally “bad,” while the word wickedness refers to something that is characterized by “vice.” If your language does not have two words that are this similar, you could express the idea with one word. Alternate translation: “of evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
607	1CO	5	8	viwj	figs-possession	ἀζύμοις εἰλικρινείας καὶ ἀληθείας	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive from to identify the unleavened bread as sincerity and truth. If your language does not use this form for that idea, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that renames or identifies something. Alternate translation: “unleavened bread, that is, sincerity and truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
608	1CO	5	8	olbn	figs-abstractnouns	εἰλικρινείας καὶ ἀληθείας	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind sincerity and truth, you could express the ideas by using adjectives that describe actions or “behavior.” Alternate translation: “of sincere and true behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
609	1CO	5	8	mybu	translate-unknown	εἰλικρινείας	1		The word sincerity identifies people who act with only one intention or goal. They do not say or pretend one thing while doing something else. If this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that identifies someone who acts honestly and with one goal in mind. Alternate translation: “of integrity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
610	1CO	5	9	mcrl	figs-explicit	ἔγραψα ὑμῖν ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ	1		Here, Paul refers to a letter that he wrote and sent to the Corinthians before he began this letter. The phrase does not refer to this letter but to a previous letter. If I wrote to you in my letter would be misunderstood by your readers, you could include a word that clarifies that the letter is one that Paul has already sent. Alternate translation: “I already wrote to you in my previous letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
611	1CO	5	9	le8i	translate-unknown	συναναμίγνυσθαι	1		The word translated to associate with often refers to two groups of people meeting together. The idea here is that sexually immoral people should not be a part of the Corinthians’ group. If to associate with does not have this meaning in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that refers to including people in one’s group. Alternate translation: “to consistently meet with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
612	1CO	5	10	vkid	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὐ πάντως	1		Paul uses the words translated by no means to introduce a clarification about what he wrote to them previously (5:9). When he told “not to associate with sexually immoral people,” he did not mean people of this world. Rather, as the next verse clarifies, he meant fellow believers. If by no means would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a qualification to a previous statement. Alternate translation: “not that you should not associate at all with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
613	1CO	5	10	pgwb	translate-unknown	τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1		The phrase of this world clarifies that the immoral people are not part of the church. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that identifies the immoral people as unbelievers. Alternate translation: “who do not believe” or “who are not part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
614	1CO	5	10	grud	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς πλεονέκταις	1		Paul is using the adjective greedy as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “greedy people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
615	1CO	5	10	taf5	translate-unknown	ἅρπαξιν	1	the greedy	Here, swindlers identifies people who take money from others dishonestly. If swindlers would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that refers to such people. Alternate translation: “thieves” or “embezzlers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
616	1CO	5	10	m59j	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ἐπεὶ ὠφείλετε ἄρα ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου ἐξελθεῖν	1	you would need to go out of the world	Here, Paul draws the logical conclusion from what he did not mean in his letter. Thus, while Paul does not think that the basis for the exhortation is true, he does think that this is the logical result of that basis. He gives this exhortation to show that it is absurd, since they cannot go out from the world. Therefore, the basis for this exhortation is also absurd. If since then in your language would not introduce a result from a reason that Paul thinks is not true, you could use a word or phrase that would introduce such an idea. Alternate translation: “If that were what I had meant, then you would need to go out from the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
617	1CO	5	10	egcx	translate-unknown	ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου ἐξελθεῖν	1		This phrase is not a euphemism for dying. Instead, Paul is saying that the Corinthians would need to travel off earth to get away from the immoral people of this world. In his culture and time, this was impossible. If go out from the world would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to traveling off earth. Alternate translation: “to leave earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
618	1CO	5	11	nys9		νῦν δὲ ἔγραψα ὑμῖν	1		Here, Paul speaks about: (1) the letter he is writing now, in contrast to the letter he already wrote (5:9). He uses the past tense wrote because the “writing” will be in the past when the letter is read to the Corinthians. Use the tense that would be appropriate in your language for this situation. Alternate translation: “But now I have written to you” (2) the letter he already wrote, but he wants them to understand it correctly now. Alternate translation: “But what I really wrote to you was”
619	1CO	5	11	mi6t	translate-unknown	συναναμίγνυσθαι	1		The word translated to associate with often refers to two groups of people meeting together. The idea here is that sexually immoral people who claim to belong to the Corinthians’ group should not be considered part of the group. If to associate with does not have this meaning in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that refers to including people in one’s group. Alternate translation: “to consistently meet with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
620	1CO	5	11	cyrp	figs-distinguish	ἐάν τις ἀδελφὸς ὀνομαζόμενος	1		Here, who is called a brother distinguishes anyone from the people mentioned in the last verse. Paul did not require the Corinthians not to associate with those people, but he does require them not to associate with any person who is called a brother. Use a construction in your language that indicates that Paul is distinguishing, not informing. Alternate translation: “any person called a brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
621	1CO	5	11	w9w8	figs-activepassive	ὀνομαζόμενος	1	anyone who is called	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form with “you” or “the brother” as the subject. Alternate translation: “who calls himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
622	1CO	5	11	b4us	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφὸς	1	brother	Although the word translated brother is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to a man or a woman. If brother would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “a brother or a sister” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
623	1CO	5	11	xob7	translate-unknown	λοίδορος	1		Here, verbally abusive describes someone who shows anger by using vicious words to attack others. Use a word in your language that describes this kind of person. Alternate translation: “vocally vicious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
624	1CO	5	11	ypib	translate-unknown	ἅρπαξ	1		Here, swindler identifies a person who takes money from others dishonestly. If swindler would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that refers to such people. Alternate translation: “a thief” or “an embezzler” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
625	1CO	5	11	fq7j	figs-explicit	τῷ τοιούτῳ μηδὲ συνεσθίειν	1		In Paul’s culture, to eat with someone meant that you accepted them into your social group. Here, he wants the Corinthians not to accept such people into their group. If “eating with” someone does not signify accepting them in your culture, you may need to make that idea explicit. Alternate translation: “Do not even include such a person in your group’s meals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
626	1CO	5	12	kj1x	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		Here, For introduces further reasons why Paul wants the Corinthians to focus on “judging” fellow believers but not those outside. These reasons continue into the next verse (5:13). If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that would introduce further reasons. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “For more proof,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
627	1CO	5	12	xeu7	figs-rquestion	τί…μοι τοὺς ἔξω κρίνειν?	1	how am I involved with judging those who are outside the church?	Here, Paul asks what to me to judge those outside, but he is not really asking for information. Rather, the question assumes that the answer is “nothing” or “it does not matter to me,” and Paul uses the question to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “it is nothing to me to judge those outside” or “it is not my business to judge those outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
628	1CO	5	12	jmxt	figs-ellipsis	τί…μοι	1		Here, Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words such as “is it” or “does it matter” to complete the thought. Alternate translation: “what is it to me” or “what does it matter to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
629	1CO	5	12	n6on	figs-123person	μοι	1		Here, Paul speaks of himself only, but he wants the Corinthians to have the same opinion that he has. If to me would cause your readers to misunderstand this point, you could include the Corinthians in this question as well. Alternate translation: “to us” or “to you and me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
630	1CO	5	12	ncl1	figs-idiom	τοὺς ἔξω…τοὺς ἔσω	1		The phrase those outside identifies people who do not belong to the group of believers in Corinth. The phrase those inside identifies the opposite: people who do belong to the group of believers in Corinth. If these phrases would be misunderstood in your language, you could use words or phrases that refer to people who belong to and do not belong to a specific group. Alternate translation: “the outsiders … the insiders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
631	1CO	5	12	m4s6	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ τοὺς ἔσω ὑμεῖς κρίνετε?	1	Are you not to judge those inside?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation or statement of obligation. Alternate translation: “But you should judge those inside” or “You do indeed judge those inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
632	1CO	5	13	hvo1	figs-pastforfuture	κρίνει	1		Here, the word translated judges makes a general statement about what God does. The present tense does not mean that God is currently passing final judgment on those outside and will not do so in the future. Rather, Paul has the final judgment in mind. If the present tense of judges would be misunderstood in your language, you could use the future tense here. Alternate translation: “will judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
633	1CO	5	13	z45o	figs-idiom	τοὺς…ἔξω	1		The phrase those outside identifies people who do not belong to the group of believers in Corinth. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refer to people who do not belong to a specific group. Alternate translation: “the outsiders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
634	1CO	5	13	kx9j	writing-quotations	ἐξάρατε τὸν πονηρὸν ἐξ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν	1		Here, Paul quotes a command from the Old Testament book named Deuteronomy. If your readers would not recognize this command as a quotation, you could introduce it in the same way that you have already introduced quotations from the Old Testament (see 1:31). Alternate translation: “As it can be read in the Old Testament, ‘Remove the evil from among yourselves’” or “According to the book of Deuteronomy, ‘Remove the evil from among yourselves’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
635	1CO	5	13	al7v	figs-quotations	ἐξάρατε τὸν πονηρὸν ἐξ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate this command as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “The scripture says that you should remove the evil from among yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
636	1CO	5	13	h6ry	figs-nominaladj	τὸν πονηρὸν	1		Paul is using the adjective evil as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
637	1CO	6	intro	s6hb			0		1 Corinthians 6 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Lawsuits Paul teaches that a Christian should not take another Christian to court before a non-Christian judge. It is better to be cheated. Christians will judge the angels. So they should be able to solve problems among themselves. It is especially bad to use a court to cheat another believer. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]]) Important figures of speech in this chapter Metaphor The temple of the Holy Spirit is an important metaphor. It refers to the place where the Holy Spirit stays and is worshiped. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Rhetorical questions Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
638	1CO	6	1	gmy5	figs-rquestion	τολμᾷ τις ὑμῶν, πρᾶγμα ἔχων πρὸς τὸν ἕτερον, κρίνεσθαι ἐπὶ τῶν ἀδίκων, καὶ οὐχὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἁγίων?	1	does he dare to go … saints?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. Here, the answer to the question is “they are, but they should not.” Paul asks to question to get the Corinthians to realize how bad going to court before the unrighteous is. If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a “should” statement or a statement of fact. Alternate translation: “Some of you actually dare, having a dispute with another, to go to court before the unrighteous, and not before the saints.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
639	1CO	6	1	q5d3	translate-unknown	τολμᾷ	1	dispute	The word translated Do … dare refers to having confidence or boldness when one should not have confidence or boldness. Use a word or phrase in your language that indicates improper confidence. Alternate translation: “Do … have the audacity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
640	1CO	6	1	qi57	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	πρᾶγμα ἔχων πρὸς τὸν ἕτερον	1		The phrase having a dispute with another provides the situation in which they are going to court. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “if you have a dispute with another” or “whenever you have a dispute with another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
641	1CO	6	1	jsgt	figs-explicit	τὸν ἕτερον	1		Here, another identifies the other person as a fellow believer. If this would be misunderstood in your language you could add a word or phrase that identifies another as a believer. Alternate translation: “another believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
642	1CO	6	1	umgg	figs-idiom	κρίνεσθαι ἐπὶ…ἐπὶ	1		The phrase to go to court before refers to settling a lawsuit or other legal dispute before a judge. If go to court before would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom that refers to setting a dispute in a court of law. Alternate translation: “to resolve your lawsuit in the presence of … in the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
643	1CO	6	2	r8sj	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ	1		The word Or introduces an alternate to what Paul speaks about in 6:1. They currently think that going to court in public is fine. Paul gives the true alternative: they will judge the world and thus should not need to take their quarrels and lawsuits anywhere else. If Or would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
644	1CO	6	2	i1m5	figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι οἱ ἅγιοι τὸν κόσμον κρινοῦσιν?	1	Or do you not know that the believers will judge the world?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “You already know that the saints will judge the world.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
645	1CO	6	2	i67f	figs-rquestion	ἀνάξιοί ἐστε κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων?	1	If then, you will judge the world, are you not able to settle matters of little importance?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negative or positive statement. Alternate translation: “you are definitely not unworthy of the smallest cases” or “you are definitely worthy of the smallest cases (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
646	1CO	6	2	py6h	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος	1		Paul is speaking as if the world is judged by you were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because the world is judged by you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
647	1CO	6	2	yq8e	figs-activepassive	ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “you judge the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
648	1CO	6	2	jqvf	figs-pastforfuture	κρίνεται	1		Here, the word translated is judged makes a general statement about what you, that is, the saints, do. The present tense does not mean that the saints are currently passing final judgment will not do so in the future. Rather, Paul uses the present tense to state a general fact about the saints. The judgment itself will occur in the future. If the present tense of is judged would be misunderstood in your language, you could use the future tense here. Alternate translation: “will be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
649	1CO	6	2	stvc	figs-idiom	ἀνάξιοί…κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων	1		Here, to be unworthy of something means that one is not capable of doing that thing or is not qualified to do it. If unworthy of would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “unqualified concerning the smallest cases” “not able to judge the smallest cases” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
650	1CO	6	2	dmi6	translate-unknown	κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων	1		The word translated cases could refer to: (1) legal disputes that are resolved in a court of law. Alternate translation: “of the smallest legal disputes” (2) the court of law that decides the legal dispute. Alternate translation: “of the lowest courts of law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
651	1CO	6	3	us55	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ἀγγέλους κρινοῦμεν,	1	Do you not know that we will judge the angels?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you know that we will judge angels.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
652	1CO	6	3	x6h3	figs-rquestion	μήτι γε βιωτικά?	1	How much more, then, can we judge matters of this life?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the reader agrees. If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “How much more the matters of this life!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
653	1CO	6	3	hxzn	figs-ellipsis	μήτι γε βιωτικά	1		Here, Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words such as “can we judge” or “are we able to judge” to complete the thought. Alternate translation: “How much more can we judge the matters of this life” or “How much more are we able to judge the matters of this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
654	1CO	6	3	h3z0	grammar-connect-logic-result	μήτι γε	1		Here, Paul’s argument assumes that judging angels is a greater and more difficult thing than judging the matters of this life. The phrase How much more implies that people who can do a great and difficult thing like judging angels can easily do a less impressive and easier thing like judging the matters of this life. If How much more does not express that connection in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does express that connection. Alternate translation: “If we can do that, can we not judge” or “Should it not be easy, then, to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
655	1CO	6	3	h374	translate-unknown	βιωτικά	1	matters of this life	Here, the word translated the matters of this life refers to anything that is a part of people’s ordinary or daily lives. Paul uses the word to identify the lawsuits among the Corinthians as simply matters of ordinary life and insignificant in comparison with something like judging angels. If the matters of this life would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to features of daily or regular life. Alternate translation: “what happens in our daily lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
656	1CO	6	4	xn32	figs-hypo	βιωτικὰ…κριτήρια ἐὰν ἔχητε	1	If then you have to make judgments that pertain to daily life	Here, Paul uses if to introduce a true possibility. He means that they might have legal disputes, or they might not have legal disputes. He then specifies the result for if they do have legal disputes. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the if statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “when.” Alternate translation: “when you have legal disputes about things of this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
657	1CO	6	4	v80t	translate-unknown	κριτήρια…ἔχητε	1		The word translated cases could refer to: (1) legal disputes that are resolved in a court of law. Alternate translation: “you have lawsuits” (2) the court of law that decides the legal dispute. Alternate translation: “you participate in a court of law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
658	1CO	6	4	cu0s	figs-hypo	βιωτικὰ	1		Here, the word translated about things of this life refers to anything that is a part of people’s ordinary or daily lives. Paul uses the word to identify the lawsuits among the Corinthians as matters of ordinary life. If about things of this life would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to features of daily or regular life. Alternate translation: “about what happens in your daily lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
659	1CO	6	4	vw5t	figs-rquestion	τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, τούτους καθίζετε?	1	If then you have to make judgments that pertain to daily life, why do you lay such cases as these before those who have no standing in the church?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “there is no good reason.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea as an emphatic statement or a command. Alternate translation: “do not appoint as judges those who are of no account in the church!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
660	1CO	6	4	e791	translate-unknown	τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	why do you lay such cases as these before those who have no standing in the church?	Here, those who are of no account in the church could be: (1) people who are not members of the church in Corinth. Alternate translation: “who do not believe” (2) people who are members of the church in Corinth but whom other believers do not respect. Alternate translation: “whom the fellow believers do not respect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
661	1CO	6	5	dvq3	writing-pronouns	λέγω	1		The phrase I say this could refer: (1) to what Paul has already said, probably all of 6:1–4. Alternate translation: “I say those things” (2) to what Paul is saying throughout this whole section (6:1–8). Alternate translation: “I am saying these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
662	1CO	6	5	xnd7	figs-idiom	πρὸς ἐντροπὴν ὑμῖν	1		Here, to your shame means that the things that Paul has said should make the Corinthians feel shame. If to your shame would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “to embarrass you” or “to make you feel ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
663	1CO	6	5	ebh6	figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς ἐντροπὴν ὑμῖν λέγω	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind shame, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “shame.” Alternate translation: “to shame you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
664	1CO	6	5	hk4q	figs-idiom	οὕτως οὐκ ἔνι…οὐδεὶς σοφὸς	1		The phrase {Is it} thus {that} there is not any wise man identifies a situation in which no wise man can be found. If this phrase would be confusing or misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression that identifies a situation in which there are no wise people. Alternate translation: “Is there not a man wise man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
665	1CO	6	5	fue4	figs-rquestion	οὕτως οὐκ ἔνι ἐν ὑμῖν οὐδεὶς σοφὸς, ὃς δυνήσεται διακρῖναι ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ?	1	Is there no one among you wise enough to settle a dispute between brothers?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing, specifically by making them feel ashamed. The question assumes that the answer is “there should be.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a “should” statement or introduce a statement with “surely.” Alternate translation: “You should have a wise man among you who will be able to discern between his brothers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
666	1CO	6	5	xma9	figs-gendernotations	οὐκ ἔνι…σοφὸς…αὐτοῦ	1		Although the words translated wise man and his are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “there are not any wise people … their” or “there is not any wise man or woman … his or her” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
667	1CO	6	5	l1hd	figs-gendernotations	τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ	1	brothers	Although the word translated brothers is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
668	1CO	6	5	o28z	translate-unknown	διακρῖναι ἀνὰ μέσον	1		The phrase to discern between refers to making decisions about disputes between people. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to deciding which party is in the right in a dispute. Alternate translation: “to judge between” or “to settle disputes between” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
669	1CO	6	6	m7ls	figs-rquestion	ἀδελφὸς μετὰ ἀδελφοῦ κρίνεται, καὶ τοῦτο ἐπὶ ἀπίστων?	1	But brother goes to court against brother, and this before unbelievers!	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that there is verbal answer. Rather, the question is supposed to make the Corinthians answer by feeling ashamed. If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with statement that expresses shock or condemnation. Alternate translation: “brother really goes to court against brother, and this before unbelievers!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
670	1CO	6	6	fyq8	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφὸς…ἀδελφοῦ	1		Although the words translated brother are masculine, Paul is using these words to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If brother would be misunderstood in your language, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “a brother or sister … a brother or sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
671	1CO	6	6	dv5g	figs-ellipsis	καὶ τοῦτο ἐπὶ ἀπίστων	1		In this clause, Paul has omitted some words that might be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If this sentence would be misunderstood in your language, you could include what action is happening. Alternate translation: “and they do this before unbelievers” or “and they go to court before unbelievers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
672	1CO	6	7	kvva	figs-infostructure	ἤδη μὲν οὖν ὅλως ἥττημα ὑμῖν ἐστιν, ὅτι κρίματα ἔχετε μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν	1		Here, Paul gives the reason for the defeat after he mentions the defeat. If your language would state the reason first, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “Therefore, since you have lawsuits among yourselves, this is indeed already a complete defeat for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
673	1CO	6	7	topu		ἤδη…ὅλως ἥττημα ὑμῖν	1		Here, already refers to how the Corinthians do not suffer defeat in the court of law but rather before that, when the dispute begins. If already would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that the time in view is before the legal dispute is decided. Alternate translation: “a complete defeat for you even before you enter the court of law”
674	1CO	6	7	ugf7		ἤδη μὲν οὖν ὅλως ἥττημα ὑμῖν ἐστιν	1		Alternate translation: “Therefore, you are indeed already completely defeated”
675	1CO	6	7	lvc1	figs-metaphor	ὅλως ἥττημα	1		Here, complete defeat refers to total failure in attempting to accomplish some goal. The defeat does not require an opponent, since one can suffer defeat because of other obstacles. If complete defeat would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “a total derailing” or “a total failure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
676	1CO	6	7	tn9m	figs-rquestion	διὰ τί οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἀδικεῖσθε? διὰ τί οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἀποστερεῖσθε?	1	Why not rather suffer the wrong? Why not rather allow yourselves to be cheated?	Paul does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The questions assume that the reader agrees that it would be better to be wronged and cheated. If these questions would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the ideas as emphatic comparisons. Alternate translation: “It would be better to be wronged! It would be better to be cheated!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
677	1CO	6	7	ruiy	figs-doublet	διὰ τί οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἀδικεῖσθε? διὰ τί οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἀποστερεῖσθε?	1		Here, Paul repeats his first question with almost exactly the same words. He does this to emphasize the point he is making. If this repetition would be misunderstood in your language, you could combine the questions and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Why not rather be wronged or cheated?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
678	1CO	6	7	i5n5	figs-activepassive	ἀδικεῖσθε	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form with a “fellow believer” as the subject. Alternate translation: “let a fellow believer wrong you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
679	1CO	6	7	vpy9	figs-activepassive	ἀποστερεῖσθε	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form with a “fellow believer” as the subject. Alternate translation: “let a fellow believer cheat you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
680	1CO	6	8	yfos	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		Here, But introduces a contrast with what Paul wants them to do, which is to “be wronged” and “cheated” rather than take a fellow believer to court. Here, Paul says that they do the exact opposite. Rather than “be wronged” and “cheated,” they actually wrong and cheat fellow believers. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a phrase that clarifies what Paul is contrasting. Alternate translation: “But instead of being wronged and cheated,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
681	1CO	6	8	ixb9	figs-ellipsis	καὶ τοῦτο ἀδελφούς	1		In this clause, Paul has omitted some words that might be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could include what action is happening. Alternate translation: “and you do this to your brothers” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
682	1CO	6	8	kk7b	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφούς	1	your own brothers	Although the word translated brothers is masculine, Paul is using this word to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If brothers would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to your brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
683	1CO	6	9	i2ln			0		In 6:9–10, Paul lists people who do things that are unrighteous. Many of these words are the same words he used in the similar lists in 5:10–11. It may be helpful to refer to how you translated the words there.
684	1CO	6	9	ojaf	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ	1		The word Or introduces Paul’s question as an alternative to “wronging and cheating brothers” in 6:7. If they do indeed know that the unrighteous will not inherit the kingdom of God, they not be “wronging and cheating brothers.” Paul uses the word Or to show that these two things are not compatible. If Or would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an alternative. Alternate translation: “Against that,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
685	1CO	6	9	h17l	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ἄδικοι Θεοῦ Βασιλείαν οὐ κληρονομήσουσιν?	1	Or do you not know that	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, we know.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “surely you know that the unrighteous will not enter the kingdom of God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
686	1CO	6	9	slcx	figs-nominaladj	ἄδικοι	1		Paul is using the adjective unrighteous as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are unrighteous” or “unrighteous people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
687	1CO	6	9	t1rt	figs-metaphor	οὐ κληρονομήσουσιν	1	will inherit	Here, Paul speaks of the kingdom of God as if it were property that a parent could pass on to their child when the parent dies. Here, Paul uses the word inherit to refer to being able to live in the kingdom of God. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “will not live in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
688	1CO	6	9	eywd	figs-activepassive	μὴ πλανᾶσθε	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form by using a verb such as “gather together” or “meet.” Alternate translation: “When you meet together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
689	1CO	6	9	vtlq	figs-nominaladj	πόρνοι	1		Paul is using the adjective phrase sexually immoral as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are sexually immoral” or “sexually immoral people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
690	1CO	6	9	h2na	translate-unknown	οὔτε μαλακοὶ, οὔτε ἀρσενοκοῖται,	1	male prostitutes, those who practice homosexuality	The word translated male prostitutes identifies men who are penetrated during sexual acts with other men. The word translated those who practice homosexuality identifies men who penetrate other men during sexual acts. Your language may have specific words for these behaviors. If so, you could use them here. If your language does not have specific words for these behavior, you could either use descriptive phrases, or you could combine the two words and refer to homosexual activity in general. Alternate translation: “nor bottoms nor tops” or “nor men who practice homosexuality” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
691	1CO	6	9	blc7	figs-abstractnouns	ἀρσενοκοῖται	1	male prostitutes	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind homosexuality, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “homosexual,” or you could use a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “those who are homosexual” or “those who have same-sex intercourse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
692	1CO	6	10	zzb5	figs-nominaladj	πλεονέκται	1		Paul is using the adjective greedy as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are greedy” or “greedy people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
693	1CO	6	10	bgj9	translate-unknown	λοίδοροι	1	the greedy	Here, slanderers is the same word that is translated “verbally abusive” in 5:11. It describes someone who shows anger by using vicious words to attack others. Use a word in your language that describes this kind of person. Alternate translation: “vocally vicious people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
694	1CO	6	10	yzdx	translate-unknown	ἅρπαγες	1		Here, swindlers is the same word that is translated “swindler” in 5:11. It identifies a person who takes money from others dishonestly. If swindlers would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that refers to such people. Alternate translation: “embezzlers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
695	1CO	6	10	h6aa	figs-metaphor	κληρονομήσουσιν	1		Here, Paul speaks of the kingdom of God as if it were property that a parent could pass on to their child when the parent dies. Here, Paul uses the word inherit to refer to being able to live in the kingdom of God. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “will live in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
696	1CO	6	11	j49p	writing-pronouns	ταῦτά	1		Here, that refers to the list of unrighteous behaviors that Paul gave in 6:9–10. Paul identifies some of the Corinthians as people who behaved in those ways. If that would be misunderstood in your language, you could more clearly refer back to the list of unrighteous behaviors. Alternate translation: “those kinds of people {are what}” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
697	1CO	6	11	pxp6	figs-doublet	ἀλλὰ ἀπελούσασθε, ἀλλὰ ἡγιάσθητε, ἀλλὰ ἐδικαιώθητε	1		Here Paul repeats but you were in order to emphasize the contrast between what the Corinthians were and what they have now experienced. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could use one but you were and express the strong contrast in another way. Alternate translation: “But now you have been washed, sanctified, and justified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
698	1CO	6	11	v5yq	figs-activepassive	ἀπελούσασθε…ἡγιάσθητε…ἐδικαιώθητε	1	you have been cleansed	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form with “God” as the subject. Alternate translation: “God washed you … God sanctified you … God justified you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
699	1CO	6	11	rri7	figs-metaphor	ἀπελούσασθε	1		Here, Paul speaks as if the Corinthians had been washed with water. By speaking in this way, Paul emphasizes that they have been cleansed from sin, just like washing with water cleanses a person from dirt. Paul may have baptism in mind. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you were washed clean” or “you were purified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
700	1CO	6	11	s55x	figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	in the name of the Lord Jesus Christ	When something is done in the name of a person, it is done with the authority or power of that person. Here the cleansing, sanctification, and justification are done with the authority or power of Jesus, since they are done in the name of the Lord Jesus Christ. If in the name of would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “with the power of the Lord Jesus Christ” or “by the authority of the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
701	1CO	6	11	gzrh	figs-possession	τῷ Πνεύματι τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify the Spirit as our God, that is, as the Holy Spirit. He does not mean that the Spirit is something that belongs to our God. If your language would not use that form to identify the Spirit as our God, you could use a word or phrase that does identify the Spirit as our God or the “Holy Spirit.” Alternate translation: “the Spirit who is our God” or “the Holy Spirit, our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
702	1CO	6	12	c3bs	figs-doublet	πάντα μοι ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ οὐ πάντα συμφέρει. πάντα μοι ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐγὼ ἐξουσιασθήσομαι ὑπό τινος.	-1		Here Paul repeats Everything is lawful for me to make two separate comments on the statement. By repeating Everything is lawful for me, Paul emphasizes his qualifications or objections to this statement. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could state Everything is lawful for me once and include both comments after that. Alternate translation: ““Everything is lawful for me,’ but not everything is beneficial, and I will not be mastered by anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
703	1CO	6	12	sw2e	writing-quotations	πάντα μοι ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’	-1	Connecting Statement:	In this verse, Paul twice quotes what some people in the Corinthian church are saying. The ULT indicates that these claims are quotations by using quotation marks. If your readers would misunderstood Everything is lawful for me and think that Paul is claiming this, you could clarify that some of the Corinthians are saying this, and Paul is saying the words that occur after but. Alternate translation: “You say, ‘Everything is lawful for me,’ but I respond that … You say, ‘Everything is lawful for me,’ but I respond that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
704	1CO	6	12	r4mx	figs-explicit	πάντα	-1	Everything is lawful for me	Here, everything refers to any action or behavior that one might pursue. If everything would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that Paul is referring to any action or behavior. Alternate translation: “Every behavior … every behavior … Every behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
705	1CO	6	12	y6kn	figs-explicit	συμφέρει	-1		Here Paul does not say to whom everything is not beneficial. He means that everything is not beneficial to the person or people who say that Everything is lawful for them. If your language would include for whom everything is not beneficial, you could include a phrase such as “for you” here. Alternate translation: “is beneficial for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
706	1CO	6	12	c8vz	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐγὼ ἐξουσιασθήσομαι ὑπό τινος	1	I will not be mastered by any of them	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “nothing will master me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
707	1CO	6	12	p0d8	translate-unknown	οὐκ…ἐξουσιασθήσομαι ὑπό	1		Here, be mastered refers to being under the authority of something else. Paul here means that some things, when a person habitually does them, begin to have power or control over that person. Here, then, he wishes to tell the Corinthians that, while such things might be lawful, they should avoid doing these things because they will be mastered by these things. If be mastered would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using words that refer to “power” or “control.” Alternate translation: “will not be controlled by” or “will not be under the power of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
708	1CO	6	13	jz55	writing-quotations	τὰ βρώματα τῇ κοιλίᾳ, καὶ ἡ κοιλία τοῖς βρώμασιν;…δὲ	1	“Food is for the stomach, and the stomach is for food,” but God will do away with both of them	In this verse, Paul quotes what some people in the Corinthian church are saying, just like he did in 6:12. The ULT indicates that this claim is a quotation by using quotation marks. If your readers would misunderstood Food {is} for the stomach, and the stomach for food and think that Paul is claiming this, you could clarify that some of the Corinthians are saying this, and Paul is saying the words that occur after but. Alternate translation: “You say, ‘Food {is} for the stomach, and the stomach for food,’ but I respond that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
709	1CO	6	13	gt0n	figs-ellipsis	τὰ βρώματα τῇ κοιλίᾳ, καὶ ἡ κοιλία τοῖς βρώμασιν…τὸ…σῶμα οὐ τῇ πορνείᾳ, ἀλλὰ τῷ Κυρίῳ, καὶ ὁ Κύριος τῷ σώματι	1		In these two sentences, Paul omits is multiple times. If your language does not need to state is to express the idea, you could omit is throughout these two sentences. If your language does need to state is to express the idea, you could: (1) include is the first time it is needed in each sentence. See the ULT. (2) include is every time it is needed. Alternate translation: “Food {is} for the stomach, and the stomach {is} for food … the body {is} is not for sexual immorality, but {is} for the Lord, and the Lord {is} for the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
710	1CO	6	13	uc1v	translate-unknown	καταργήσει	1	do away with	Here, will do away with refers to making something ineffective, useless, or irrelevant. What Paul means is that God will make food and the stomach unimportant and without function. If will do away with would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that a God has acted so that food and the stomach are no longer important, useful, or effective. Alternate translation: “will render ineffective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
711	1CO	6	13	scrh	writing-pronouns	καὶ ταύτην καὶ ταῦτα	1		Here, this refers to stomach, and those refers to food, since food is plural here. If what this and those refer to would be misunderstood in your language, you could use the names stomach and food instead. Alternate translation: “both stomach and food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
712	1CO	6	13	pd10	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	2		Here, Now introduces a development based on what Paul has said about food and the stomach. While food is indeed for the stomach, the body is not for sexual immorality. Paul agrees with the Corinthians about food and the stomach, but he disagrees that sexual immorality and the body should be understood in the same way. Instead, the body exists for the Lord. Paul further explains in the next verse (6:14) that, unlike food and the stomach, God will not do away with the body, since we will be resurrected. If Now would not introduce a difference between the stomach and the body, you could use a word or phrase that does introduce such a contrast. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
713	1CO	6	13	r1co	writing-pronouns	τῇ πορνείᾳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind immorality, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “immoral.” Alternate translation: “for what is sexually immoral” or “sexually immoral behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
714	1CO	6	13	d9q7	figs-explicit	τῷ Κυρίῳ	1		Here Paul means that the body is meant to serve and please the Lord. If for the Lord would be misunderstood in your language, you could include a verbal phrase that indicates that the body should serve the Lord. Alternate translation: “it is intended to please the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
715	1CO	6	13	zpx9	figs-explicit	ὁ Κύριος τῷ σώματι	1		Here, the Lord for the body expresses the idea that: (1) the Lord works for the human body and not just the human “soul” or non-physical part. Alternate translation: “the Lord works for the body” (2) the Lord is human now and in a body, which would explain why Paul speaks about the resurrection of the Lord in the next verse. Alternate translation: “the Lord is in a human body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
716	1CO	6	14	tayy	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, Now introduces one way in which “the Lord is for the body” (). Human bodies are important and are not for sexual immorality because God will raise those who believe to new life, and this includes human bodies. If Now would not introduce a further development of the argument in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does function in this way. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
717	1CO	6	14	ev9l	figs-idiom	τὸν Κύριον ἤγειρεν, καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐξεγερεῖ	1	raised the Lord	Paul uses the words raised and raise up to refer to someone who had died coming back to life. If your language does not use these words to describe coming back to life, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “restored the Lord to life and will also restore us to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
718	1CO	6	14	jvng		ἤγειρεν…ἐξεγερεῖ	1		Here, raised and raise up have the same meaning. Paul uses a slightly different word for variety or because he is referring to the future. In your translation, you could use the same word for raised and raise up. Alternate translation: “raised … will … raise”
719	1CO	6	14	wgh4	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind power, you could express the idea by using an adverb such as “powerfully” or an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “by working powerfully” or “by his powerful action” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
720	1CO	6	15	gt2x	figs-metaphor	μέλη Χριστοῦ…τὰ μέλη τοῦ Χριστοῦ…πόρνης μέλη	1	Do you not know that your bodies are members of Christ?	(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
721	1CO	6	15	io5p	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν μέλη Χριστοῦ ἐστιν?	1		(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
722	1CO	6	15	agvy	figs-metaphor	ἄρας…τὰ μέλη τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
723	1CO	6	15	f4vd	figs-rquestion	ποιήσω πόρνης μέλη?	1	Shall I then take away the members of Christ and join them to a prostitute? May it not be!	(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
724	1CO	6	15	kmt2	figs-idiom	μὴ γένοιτο	1	May it not be!	(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
725	1CO	6	16	seg6	figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ὁ κολλώμενος τῇ πόρνῃ, ἓν σῶμά ἐστιν?	1	Do you not know that … her?	Paul begins to teach the Corinthians by emphasizing a truth that they already know. “I want to remind you the one who is joined to the prostitute is one body with her.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
726	1CO	6	16	z54k	figs-activepassive	ὁ κολλώμενος τῇ πόρνῃ, ἓν σῶμά ἐστιν	1	he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one flesh with her	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when a man joins his body to the body of a prostitute, it is as if their bodies become one body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
727	1CO	6	17	c2tb	figs-activepassive	ὁ…κολλώμενος τῷ Κυρίῳ, ἓν πνεῦμά ἐστιν	1	he who is joined to the Lord becomes one spirit with him	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the Lord joins his spirit to the spirit of a person, it is as if their spirits become one spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
728	1CO	6	18	ex92	figs-metaphor	φεύγετε τὴν πορνείαν	1	Flee from	Paul speaks of a person rejecting sexual sin as if that person were running away from danger. Alternate translation: “Get away from sexual sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
729	1CO	6	18	sc9d	figs-explicit	πᾶν ἁμάρτημα ὃ ἐὰν ποιήσῃ ἄνθρωπος ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματός ἐστιν, ὁ δὲ πορνεύων εἰς τὸ ἴδιον σῶμα ἁμαρτάνει	1	immorality! Every other sin that a person commits is outside the body, but	This could mean: (1) Paul is showing that sexual sin is especially bad because it is not only against others but against the sinner’s own body. (2) Paul is quoting what some Corinthians were thinking. Alternate translation: “immorality! Some of you are saying, ‘Every sin that a person commits is outside the body,’ but I say that the one who is sexually immoral sins against his own body.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
730	1CO	6	18	jr46		ἁμάρτημα ὃ ἐὰν ποιήσῃ ἄνθρωπος	1	sin that a person commits	“evil deed that a person does”
731	1CO	6	19	qy5j	figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι τὸ σῶμα ὑμῶν, ναὸς τοῦ ἐν ὑμῖν Ἁγίου Πνεύματός ἐστιν, οὗ ἔχετε ἀπὸ Θεοῦ?	1	Do you not know … God? … that you are not your own?	Paul is continuing to teach the Corinthians by emphasizing what they already know. Alternate translation: “I want to remind you that your body is a temple of the Holy Spirit in you, whom you have from God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
732	1CO	6	19	bb35		τὸ σῶμα ὑμῶν	1	your body	the body of each individual Christian
733	1CO	6	19	d2mc	figs-metaphor	ναὸς τοῦ…Ἁγίου Πνεύματός	1	temple of the Holy Spirit	A temple is dedicated to divine beings, and it is also where they dwell. In the same way, each Corinthian believer’s body is like a temple because the Holy Spirit is present within them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
734	1CO	6	20	qv47	figs-activepassive	ἠγοράσθητε γὰρ τιμῆς	1	For you were bought with a price	God paid for the freedom of the Corinthians from the slavery of sin. You can state this as active. Alternate translation: “for God paid for your freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
735	1CO	6	20	y7fe		δὴ	1	Therefore	“Because what I have just said is true”
736	1CO	7	intro	a25m			0		1 Corinthians 7 General Notes Structure and formatting Paul begins to answer a series of questions that the Corinthians may have asked him. The first question is about marriage. The second question is about a slave trying to become free, a Gentile becoming a Jew, or a Jew becoming a Gentile. Special concepts in this chapter Divorce Paul says married Christians should not divorce. A Christian married to an unbeliever should not leave their husband or wife. If the unbelieving husband or wife leaves, this is not a sin. Paul advises that, because of the difficult times and being near to time that Jesus will return, it is acceptable to remain unmarried. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) Important figures of speech in this chapter Euphemisms Paul uses many euphemisms to discreetly refer to sexual relations. This is often a sensitive topic. Many cultures do not wish to speak openly about these matters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
737	1CO	7	1	iue7			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul gives the believers some specific instructions on marriage.
738	1CO	7	1	y4lx		δὲ	1	Now	Paul is introducing a new topic in his teaching.
739	1CO	7	1	jq21		ὧν ἐγράψατε	1	the issues you wrote about	The Corinthians had written a letter to Paul to ask for answers to certain questions.
740	1CO	7	1	erl5		καλὸν ἀνθρώπῳ, γυναικὸς μὴ ἅπτεσθαι	1	“It is good for a man not to touch a woman.”	This could mean: (1) Paul is quoting what the Corinthians had written. Alternate translation: “you wrote, ‘It is good for a man not to touch a woman.’” (2) Paul is saying what he really thinks. Alternate translation: “my answer is that yes, it is good for a man not to touch a woman.”
741	1CO	7	1	ui5c		καλὸν	1	It is good	“It is most helpful”
742	1CO	7	1	cm7y		ἀνθρώπῳ	1	for a man	Here, a man could refer to: (1) a married man. Alternate translation: “a husband” (2) any man.
743	1CO	7	1	mx7w	figs-euphemism	γυναικὸς μὴ ἅπτεσθαι	1	not to touch a woman	Here, touch a woman is a euphemism for having sexual relations, upon which Paul elaborates in verses 3-5. However, it is also clear from verse 2 that Paul is specifically talking about sexual relations between a husband and his wife. Alternate translation: “not to have sexual relations with his wife for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
744	1CO	7	2	c3uq		διὰ δὲ	1	But because	This could mean: (1) Paul is responding to what the Corinthians had written. Alternate translation: “That is true, but because” (2) Paul is saying what he really thinks.
745	1CO	7	2	fys4		διὰ δὲ τὰς πορνείας	1	But because of temptations for many immoral acts, each	“But because Satan tempts people to commit sexual sin” or “But we desire to commit sexual sin because of our sinful nature”
746	1CO	7	3	mj8l	figs-euphemism	ὀφειλὴν	1	sexual rights	Both husbands and wives are obligated to regularly have sexual relations with their spouses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
747	1CO	7	3	vhv1	figs-ellipsis	ὁμοίως…καὶ ἡ γυνὴ τῷ ἀνδρί	1	likewise the wife to her husband	The words “should give” and “sexual rights” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “likewise the wife should give to her husband his sexual rights” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
748	1CO	7	5	qq7u	figs-explicit	μὴ ἀποστερεῖτε ἀλλήλους	1	Do not deprive each other	The word deprive means to keep from someone something that the other person has the right to receive. “Do not refuse to have marital relations with your spouse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
749	1CO	7	5	uq6x		ἵνα σχολάσητε τῇ προσευχῇ	1	so that you may devote yourselves to prayer	in order to have a period of especially deep prayer
750	1CO	7	5	s1ya		πάλιν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ἦτε	1	come together again	“sleep together again”
751	1CO	7	5	ii8n		διὰ τὴν ἀκρασίαν ὑμῶν	1	because of your lack of self-control	“because after some days, your sexual desires will be harder to keep under control”
752	1CO	7	6	xe7r		τοῦτο δὲ λέγω κατὰ συνγνώμην, οὐ κατ’ ἐπιταγήν	1	I say these things to you as a concession and not as a command	This could mean: (1) Paul is telling the Corinthians that he is allowing them, but not commanding them, to marry and sleep together. (2) Paul is telling the Corinthians that he is allowing them, but not commanding them, to stop sleeping together for a time.
753	1CO	7	7	rbe7		εἶναι ὡς καὶ ἐμαυτόν	1	were as I am	Either Paul had never married or his wife had died. It is unlikely that he had been through a divorce.
754	1CO	7	7	w9ld		ἀλλὰ ἕκαστος ἴδιον ἔχει χάρισμα ἐκ Θεοῦ; ὁ μὲν οὕτως, ὁ δὲ οὕτως	1	But each one has his own gift from God. One has this kind of gift, and another that kind	“God enables people to do different things. He enables one person to do one thing and another person to do something different”
755	1CO	7	8	r27x		καλὸν	1	it is good	See how you translated good in 1 Corinthians 7:1.
756	1CO	7	9	ty79		πυροῦσθαι	1	to burn with desire	“to live with the constant desire to sleep with someone”
757	1CO	7	10	hc5p		ἀπὸ…μὴ χωρισθῆναι	1	should not separate from	Paul’s readers knew no difference between separating and divorcing. To stop living with someone was to end the marriage. Alternate translation: “should not divorce”
758	1CO	7	11	lxf7	figs-activepassive	τῷ ἀνδρὶ καταλλαγήτω	1	be reconciled to her husband	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “she should make peace with her husband and return to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
759	1CO	7	11	jd5w		μὴ ἀφιέναι	1	should not divorce	Paul’s readers knew no difference between divorcing and simply separating. To do either was to end the marriage. Alternate translation: “should not separate from”
760	1CO	7	12	k9yd		συνευδοκεῖ	1	agrees	“is willing” or “is satisfied”
761	1CO	7	13	mw6k		ἄνδρα	1	husband	The word translated as husband is the same Greek word as for “man.”
762	1CO	7	14	l84p	figs-activepassive	ἡγίασται γὰρ ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ ἄπιστος ἐν τῇ γυναικί	1	For the unbelieving husband is set apart because of his wife	This could mean: (1) God has set apart the unbelieving husband for himself because of his believing wife. (2) God treats the unbelieving husband as he would treat a son for the sake of his believing wife. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
763	1CO	7	14	w5y9	figs-activepassive	ἡγίασται ἡ γυνὴ ἡ ἄπιστος ἐν τῷ ἀδελφῷ	1	the unbelieving wife is set apart because of the brother	This could mean: (1) God has set apart the unbelieving wife for himself because of her husband who believes. (2) God treats the unbelieving wife as he would treat a daughter for the sake of her husband who believes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
764	1CO	7	14	i1x4		τῷ ἀδελφῷ	1	the brother	the believing husband
765	1CO	7	14	fmu5	figs-activepassive	ἅγιά ἐστιν	1	they are set apart	This could mean: (1) God has set them apart for himself. (2) God treats them as he would treat his own children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
766	1CO	7	15	jef4	figs-metaphor	οὐ δεδούλωται ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἡ ἀδελφὴ ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις	1	In such cases, the brother or sister is not bound to their vows	Here, brother and sister refers to a Christian husband or wife. Here, not bound to their vows is a metaphor that mean the person is not obligated to do what they vowed to do. Alternate translation: “In such cases, the believing spouse is not obligated to continue to obey the marriage vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
767	1CO	7	15	q6k2	figs-activepassive	οὐ δεδούλωται ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἡ ἀδελφὴ ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις	1		You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “In such cases, God does not require the believing spouse to continue to obey the marriage vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
768	1CO	7	16	l559	figs-you	οἶδας, γύναι…τὸν ἄνδρα σώσεις…οἶδας, ἄνερ…τὴν γυναῖκα σώσεις	1	do you know, woman … you will save your husband … do you know, man … you will save your wife	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so all instances of you and your here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
769	1CO	7	16	h5td	figs-rquestion	τί γὰρ οἶδας, γύναι, εἰ τὸν ἄνδρα σώσεις?	1	how do you know, woman, whether you will save your husband?	Paul uses a question to cause women to think deeply about what he is saying. Alternate translation: “For you cannot know if you will save your unbelieving husband.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
770	1CO	7	16	dbz6	figs-rquestion	ἢ τί οἶδας, ἄνερ, εἰ τὴν γυναῖκα σώσεις?	1	how do you know, man, whether you will save your wife?	Paul uses a question to cause men to think deeply about what he is saying. Alternate translation: “And you cannot know if you will save your unbelieving wife.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
771	1CO	7	17	ya76		ἑκάστῳ	1	each one	“to each believer”
772	1CO	7	17	iid2		οὕτως ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις πάσαις διατάσσομαι	1	I direct in this way in all the churches	Paul was teaching believers in all the churches to act in this manner.
773	1CO	7	18	unc4	figs-rquestion	περιτετμημένος τις ἐκλήθη?	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	Paul was addressing the circumcised ones (the Jews). Alternate translation: “I am now speaking to the circumcised ones who had already been circumcised when God called you to believe.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
774	1CO	7	18	fqv6	figs-rquestion	ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ κέκληταί τις?	1	Was anyone called in uncircumcision?	Paul was now addressing the uncircumcised ones. Alternate translation: “I am now speaking to the uncircumcised ones who had not been circumcised when God called you to believe.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
775	1CO	7	20	yy8l	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the words us and we refer to all Christians and include Paul’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
776	1CO	7	20	hsz1		ἐν τῇ κλήσει ᾗ ἐκλήθη, ἐν ταύτῃ μενέτω	1	in the calling … he should remain	Here, calling refers to the work or social position in which you were involved. Alternate translation: “live and work in the same condition as when God called you to believe”
777	1CO	7	21	ag5a	figs-you	ἐκλήθης…σοι…δύνασαι	1	Were you … called you? Do not be … you can become	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so all instances of you and the command be here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
778	1CO	7	21	nli9	figs-rquestion	δοῦλος ἐκλήθης? μή σοι μελέτω	1	Were you a slave when God called you? Do not be concerned	You can state this as a statement. Alternate translation: “To those who were slaves when God called you to believe, I say this: do not be concerned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
779	1CO	7	22	l6vq		ἀπελεύθερος Κυρίου	1	the Lord’s freeman	This freedman is forgiven by God and therefore free from Satan and sin.
780	1CO	7	23	m53p	figs-activepassive	τιμῆς ἠγοράσθητε	1	You have been bought with a price	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Christ bought you by dying for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
781	1CO	7	24	qu1l		ἀδελφοί	1	Brothers	Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.
782	1CO	7	24	c83e	figs-activepassive	ἐκλήθη	1	was called	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he was when God called him to believe in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
783	1CO	7	25	f71a		περὶ δὲ τῶν παρθένων, ἐπιταγὴν Κυρίου οὐκ ἔχω	1	Now concerning those who never married, I have no commandment from the Lord	Paul knows no teaching of Jesus that speaks about this situation. Alternate translation: “The Lord has not commanded me to say anything to people who have never married”
784	1CO	7	25	vaa4		γνώμην…δίδωμι	1	I give my opinion	“I tell you what I think”
785	1CO	7	25	qqz7		ὡς ἠλεημένος ὑπὸ Κυρίου, πιστὸς εἶναι	1	as one who, by the Lord’s mercy, is trustworthy	“because, by the Lord’s mercy, I am trustworthy”
786	1CO	7	27	a77x	figs-you		0	General Information:	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if he were speaking to each person, so all these instances of “you” and the command “do not seek” here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
787	1CO	7	27	k9td	figs-rquestion	δέδεσαι γυναικί? μὴ ζήτει	1	Are you married to a wife? Do not	Paul uses this question to introduce a possible condition. You can translate the question as a phrase with “if.” Alternate translation: “If you are married, do not seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
788	1CO	7	27	x2lk		μὴ ζήτει λύσιν	1	Do not seek a divorce	“Do not try to divorce her” or “Do not separate from her”
789	1CO	7	27	d79c		μὴ ζήτει…γυναῖκα	2	do not seek a wife	“Do not try to get married”
790	1CO	7	28	whf5	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ…ὑμῶν φείδομαι	1	I want to spare you from this	The word this refers to the kinds of worldly trouble that married people might have. Alternate translation: “I want to help you not to have worldly trouble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
791	1CO	7	29	r594		ὁ καιρὸς συνεσταλμένος ἐστίν	1	The time is short	“There is little time” or “Time is almost gone”
792	1CO	7	30	vm8k		οἱ κλαίοντες	1	those who weep	people who cry or grieve with tears
793	1CO	7	31	t41v		οἱ χρώμενοι τὸν κόσμον	1	those using the world	“those who deal every day with unbelievers”
794	1CO	7	31	jl2r		ὡς μὴ καταχρώμενοι	1	as though they were not using it	“should show by their actions that they have their hope in God”
795	1CO	7	32	t4ab	figs-idiom	ἀμερίμνους	1	free from worries	Here, free is an idiom which means the ability to live without constantly thinking about.” Alternate translation: “without needing to worry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
796	1CO	7	32	d4zd		μεριμνᾷ	1	concerned about	“is focused on”
797	1CO	7	34	ug6n		ἡ δὲ γαμήσασα μεριμνᾷ τὰ τοῦ κόσμου, πῶς ἀρέσῃ τῷ ἀνδρί	1	is concerned about	“But the married woman is trying to please God and please her husband at the same time”
798	1CO	7	35	rp3w		βρόχον	1	constraint	any restriction
799	1CO	7	35	ffx4		εὐπάρεδρον τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	devoted	“can concentrate on the Lord”
800	1CO	7	36	jn8j		ἀσχημονεῖν ἐπὶ	1	he is acting improperly toward	“his is not being kind to” or “his is not honoring”
801	1CO	7	36	crb8		τὴν παρθένον αὐτοῦ	1	his virgin	Here, his virgin could refer to: (1) the woman whom he promised to marry. (2) his virgin daughter.
802	1CO	7	36	wdj5		γαμείτωσαν	1	let them marry	This could mean: (1) he should marry his fiancée. (2) he should let his daughter get married.
803	1CO	7	37	nm99	figs-metaphor	ὃς δὲ ἕστηκεν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ ἑδραῖος	1	But if he is standing firm in his heart	Here, standing firm is a metaphor for deciding something with certainty. Alternate translation: “But if he has decided firmly in his own heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
804	1CO	7	37	uthl	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, heart is metonym for a person’s mind or thoughts. Alternate translation: “in his own mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
805	1CO	7	39	d413	figs-metaphor	γυνὴ δέδεται ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ ὁ ἀνὴρ αὐτῆς	1	A wife is bound for as long as her husband lives	Here, bound is a metaphor for a close relationship between people in which they support each other emotionally, spiritually, and physically. Here it means the union of marriage. Alternate translation: “A woman is married to her husband” or “A woman is united with her husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
806	1CO	7	39	ms7z		ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ ὁ ἀνὴρ αὐτῆς	1	for as long as … lives	“until her husband dies”
807	1CO	7	39	y6rz		ᾧ θέλει	1	whomever she wishes	“anyone she wants”
808	1CO	7	39	rr2d		ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	in the Lord	“if the new husband is a believer”
809	1CO	7	40	hwz4		τὴν ἐμὴν γνώμην	1	my judgment	“my understanding of God’s word”
810	1CO	7	40	hd7f		μακαριωτέρα	1	happier	more contented, more joyful
811	1CO	7	40	pse4		οὕτως μείνῃ	1	lives as she is	“if she would remain unmarried”
812	1CO	8	intro	c8l6			0		1 Corinthians 8 General Notes Structure and formatting In Chapters 8-10, Paul answers the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?” Special concepts in this chapter Meat sacrificed to idols Paul answers this question by saying that idols are gods that do not really exist. Therefore nothing is wrong with the meat. Christians are free to eat it. However, someone who does not understand this may see a Christian eating it. They may then be encouraged to eat the meat as an act of worship to the idol.
813	1CO	8	1	jf6h	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	We and we refer to Paul and, though specifically writing to the Corinthian believers, include all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
814	1CO	8	1	nzt4			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul reminds the believers that though idols have no power, believers must be careful not to affect the weaker believers who might think they care about the idols. He tells believers to be careful with the liberty believers have in Christ.
815	1CO	8	1	cep1		περὶ δὲ	1	Now about	Paul uses the phrase Now about to move on to the next question the Corinthians had asked him.
816	1CO	8	1	g5t3		τῶν εἰδωλοθύτων	1	food sacrificed to idols	Gentile worshipers would offer grain, fish, fowl, or meat, to their gods. The priest would burn a portion of it on the altar. Paul is speaking of the portion the priest would give back for the worshiper to eat or sell in the market.
817	1CO	8	1	ri3s	figs-metaphor	ἡ γνῶσις φυσιοῖ	1	Knowledge puffs up	Here, puffs up is a metaphor for making someone proud. Alternate translation: “Knowledge makes people proud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
818	1CO	8	1	ytrf	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ γνῶσις φυσιοῖ,	1		The abstract noun knowledge can be expressed with the verb “know.” Alternate translation: “People who think that they know a lot become proud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
819	1CO	8	1	yw8s	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ δὲ ἀγάπη οἰκοδομεῖ	1	but love builds up	The abstract noun love can be expressed as a verb. Alternate translation: “but when we love people, we build them up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
820	1CO	8	1	an8s	figs-metaphor	ἀγάπη οἰκοδομεῖ	1	love builds up	Building people up represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. Alternate translation: “love strengthens people” or “when we love people, we strengthen them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
821	1CO	8	2	qbh9		δοκεῖ ἐγνωκέναι τι	1	thinks he knows something	“believes he knows everything about something”
822	1CO	8	3	etd6	figs-activepassive	οὗτος ἔγνωσται ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	that person is known by him	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God knows that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
823	1CO	8	4	v4gx	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	“We” and “us” here refer to all believers and include Paul’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
824	1CO	8	4	y3ee	figs-explicit	οἴδαμεν ὅτι οὐδὲν εἴδωλον ἐν κόσμῳ, καὶ ὅτι οὐδεὶς Θεὸς εἰ μὴ εἷς	1	We know that an idol in this world is nothing and that there is no God but one	Paul is probably quoting phrases that some Corinthians used. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
825	1CO	8	4	g67g	figs-metaphor	οἴδαμεν ὅτι οὐδὲν εἴδωλον ἐν κόσμῳ, καὶ ὅτι οὐδεὶς Θεὸς εἰ μὴ εἷς	1		Being nothing represents having no power. Alternate translation: “We all know, as you yourselves like to say, that an idol in this world has no power and that there is no God but one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
826	1CO	8	5	sl8j		λεγόμενοι θεοὶ	1	so-called gods	“things that people call gods”
827	1CO	8	5	l7ib		θεοὶ πολλοὶ καὶ κύριοι πολλοί	1	many “gods” and many “lords.”	Paul does not believe that many gods and many lords exist, but he recognizes that the pagans believe they do.
828	1CO	8	6	y6hq		ἀλλ’ ἡμῖν εἷς Θεὸς	1	Yet for us there is only one God	“yet we know that there is only one God”
829	1CO	8	7	th5p			0	General Information:	Paul is speaking here of weak brothers, people who cannot separate food sacrificed to idols from the worship of those idols. If a Christian eats food that has been sacrificed to an idol, weak brothers might think that God will allow them to worship the idol by eating the food. Even if the eater has not worshiped the idol and is simply eating the food, he has still corrupted his weak brothers’ conscience.
830	1CO	8	7	v7lt		πᾶσιν…τινὲς	1	everyone … some	“all people … some people who are now Christians”
831	1CO	8	7	ba7e		μολύνεται	1	is defiled	is ruined or harmed
832	1CO	8	8	ii4m	figs-personification	βρῶμα…ἡμᾶς οὐ παραστήσει τῷ Θεῷ	1	food will not present us to God	Paul speaks of food as though it were a person who could make God welcome us. Alternate translation: “food does not give us favor with God” or “the food we eat does not make God pleased with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
833	1CO	8	8	x91v	figs-doublenegatives	οὔτε ἐὰν μὴ φάγωμεν, ὑστερούμεθα; οὔτε ἐὰν φάγωμεν, περισσεύομεν	1	We are not worse if we do not eat, nor better if we do eat it	You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “Some people might think that if we do not eat some things, God will love us less. But they are wrong. Those who think that God will love us more if we do eat those things are also wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
834	1CO	8	9	f3ds		τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν	1	those who are weak	for believers who are not strong in their faith
835	1CO	8	10	usg7	figs-you	ἴδῃ τὸν ἔχοντα	1	sees the one who has	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the one is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
836	1CO	8	10	i6ej		ἡ συνείδησις αὐτοῦ	1	his … conscience	what he understands to be right and wrong
837	1CO	8	10	x5pa		οἰκοδομηθήσεται, εἰς τὸ…ἐσθίειν	1	built up so as to eat	“will … be encouraged to eat”
838	1CO	8	11	ez6t	figs-you	τῇ σῇ γνώσει	1	your knowledge	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word your here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
839	1CO	8	11	g5tn		ἀπόλλυται…ὁ ἀσθενῶν	1	the one who is weak … is destroyed	The brother or sister who is not strong in his or her faith will sin or lose his or her faith.
840	1CO	8	13	i8tb		διόπερ	1	Therefore	“Because what I have just said is true”
841	1CO	8	13	vf92	figs-metonymy	εἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου	1	if food causes to stumble	Here, food is a metonym for the person eating the food. Alternate translation: “if I cause by eating” or “if I, because of what I eat, cause my brother to stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
842	1CO	9	intro	z8d4			0		1 Corinthians 9 General Notes Structure and formatting Paul defends himself in this chapter. Some people claimed that he was trying to gain financially from the church. Special concepts in this chapter Earning money from the church People accused Paul of just wanting money from the church. Paul answered that he rightfully could get money from the church. The Old Testament taught that those who worked should get their living from their work. He and Barnabas purposefully never used this right and earned their own living. Important figures of speech in this chapter Metaphor Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. These metaphors teach complex truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter Contextualization This passage is important because Paul “contextualizes” ministering the gospel to different audiences. This means that Paul makes himself and the gospel understandable without his actions hindering the gospel being received. The translator should take extra care to preserve aspects of this “contextualization” if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]]) Rhetorical questions Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize various points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
843	1CO	9	1	fu7x			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul explains how he uses the liberty he has in Christ.
844	1CO	9	1	mdm4	figs-rquestion	οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐλεύθερος?	1	Am I not free?	Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of the rights he has. Alternate translation: “I am a free person.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
845	1CO	9	1	dbp9	figs-rquestion	οὐκ εἰμὶ ἀπόστολος?	1	Am I not an apostle?	Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of who he is and the rights he has. Alternate translation: “I am an apostle.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
846	1CO	9	1	re1t	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ Ἰησοῦν τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν ἑόρακα?	1	Have I not seen Jesus our Lord?	Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of who he is. Alternate translation: “I have seen Jesus our Lord.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
847	1CO	9	1	zd7e	figs-rquestion	οὐ τὸ ἔργον μου ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν Κυρίῳ?	1	Are you not my workmanship in the Lord?	Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of their relationship to him. Alternate translation: “You believe in Christ because I have worked the way the Lord wants me to.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
848	1CO	9	2	j6qz	figs-metonymy	ἡ…σφραγίς μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς, ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	you are the proof of my apostleship in the Lord	Here, proof is a metonym for the evidence needed to prove something. Alternate translation: “you are evidence I can use to prove that the Lord has chosen me to be an apostle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
849	1CO	9	3	b17x		ἡ ἐμὴ ἀπολογία τοῖς ἐμὲ ἀνακρίνουσίν ἐστιν αὕτη	1	This is my defense … me:	This could mean: (1) the words that follow are Paul’s defense. (2) the words in 1 Corinthians 9:1-2 are Paul’s defense.
850	1CO	9	4	mr4g	figs-rquestion	μὴ οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν φαγεῖν καὶ πεῖν?	1	Do we not have the right to eat and drink?	Paul uses a question to emphasize that he knows the Corinthians agree with what he is saying. Alternate translation: “We have the absolute right to receive food and drink from the churches.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
851	1CO	9	4	p4vq	figs-exclusive	ἔχομεν	1	we … have	Here, we refers to Paul and Barnabas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
852	1CO	9	5	s9k8	figs-rquestion	μὴ οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν ἀδελφὴν, γυναῖκα περιάγειν, ὡς καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ ἀπόστολοι, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τοῦ Κυρίου, καὶ Κηφᾶς?	1	Do we not have the right to take along with us a wife who is a believer, as do the rest of the apostles, and the brothers of the Lord, and Cephas?	Paul uses a question to emphasize that he knows the Corinthians agree with what he is saying. Alternate translation: “If we have believing wives, we have a right to take them with us just as the other apostles take them, and the brothers of the Lord, and Cephas.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
853	1CO	9	6	wx1p	figs-rquestion	ἢ μόνος ἐγὼ καὶ Βαρναβᾶς, οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν μὴ ἐργάζεσθαι?	1	Or is it only Barnabas and I who do not have the right not to work?	Paul is shaming the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “You seem to think that the only people you think need to work to earn money are Barnabas and me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
854	1CO	9	7	f3qf	figs-rquestion	τίς στρατεύεται ἰδίοις ὀψωνίοις ποτέ?	1	Who serves as a soldier at his own expense?	Paul uses a question to emphasize that he knows the Corinthians agree with what he is saying. Alternate translation: “We all know that no soldier has to buy his own supplies.” or “We all know that every soldier receives his supplies from the government.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
855	1CO	9	7	zh5m	figs-rquestion	τίς φυτεύει ἀμπελῶνα, καὶ τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἐσθίει?	1	Who plants a vineyard and does not eat its fruit?	Paul uses a question to emphasize that he knows the Corinthians agree with what he is saying. Alternate translation: “We all know that the one who plants a vineyard will always eat its fruit.” or “We all know that no one expects someone who plants a vineyard not to eat its fruits.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
856	1CO	9	7	r1ih	figs-rquestion	ἢ τίς ποιμαίνει ποίμνην, καὶ ἐκ τοῦ γάλακτος τῆς ποίμνης, οὐκ ἐσθίει?	1	Or who tends a flock and does not drink milk from it?	Paul uses a question to emphasize that he knows the Corinthians agree with what he is saying. Alternate translation: “And we all know that those who tend flocks get their drink from the flocks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
857	1CO	9	8	jld4	figs-rquestion	μὴ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, ταῦτα λαλῶ, ἢ καὶ ὁ νόμος ταῦτα οὐ λέγει?	1	Am I not saying these things according to human authority?	Paul is shaming the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “You seem to think that I am saying these things based on merely human authority, but the law of Moses also says the same thing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
858	1CO	9	8	vy1n	figs-rquestion	ἢ καὶ ὁ νόμος ταῦτα οὐ λέγει?	1	Or does not the law also say this?	Paul is shaming the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “You act as if you do not know that this is what is written in the law.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
859	1CO	9	9	h2d3	figs-you	οὐ φιμώσεις	1	Do not put a muzzle on	Moses was speaking to the Israelites as if they were one person, so this command is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
860	1CO	9	9	sxk2	figs-rquestion	μὴ τῶν βοῶν μέλει τῷ Θεῷ?	1	Is it really the oxen that God cares about?	Paul asks a question so that the Corinthians will think of what he is saying without him having to say it. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that it is not the oxen that God cares most about.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
861	1CO	9	10	x84t	figs-rquestion	ἢ δι’ ἡμᾶς πάντως λέγει?	1	Or is he speaking entirely for our sake?	Paul asks a question to emphasize the statement he is making. Alternate translation: “Instead, God was certainly speaking about us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
862	1CO	9	10	f8f4	figs-exclusive	δι’ ἡμᾶς	-1	for our sake	Here, both instances of our refer to Paul and Barnabas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
863	1CO	9	11	g1wh	figs-rquestion	ὑμῖν…μέγα εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῶν τὰ σαρκικὰ θερίσομεν?	1	is it too much for us to reap material things from you?	Paul asks a question so that the Corinthians will think of what he is saying without him having to say it. Alternate translation: “among you, you should know without me telling you that it is not too much for us to receive material support from you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
864	1CO	9	12	lld4	figs-rquestion	εἰ ἄλλοι τῆς ὑμῶν ἐξουσίας μετέχουσιν, οὐ μᾶλλον ἡμεῖς?	1	If others exercised this right over you, should we not even more?	Paul asks a question so that the Corinthians will think of what he is saying without him having to say it. Alternate translation: “Others exercised this right over you, so you know without me telling you that we have this right even more.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
865	1CO	9	12	v333		εἰ ἄλλοι τῆς…ἐξουσίας μετέχουσιν	1	If others exercised this right	Paul and the Corinthians both know that others exercised the right. “Since others exercised this right”
866	1CO	9	12	ybwy	figs-exclusive	οὐ μᾶλλον ἡμεῖς	1		Here, we refers to Paul and Barnabas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
867	1CO	9	12	nr6u		ἄλλοι	1	others	other workers of the gospel
868	1CO	9	12	q7vj		τῆς…ἐξουσίας	1	this right	the right to have the believers at Corinth provide for the living expenses of those who told them the good news
869	1CO	9	12	vt6t		μή τινα ἐνκοπὴν δῶμεν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ	1	to cause any hindrance	“we might now be a burden to the gospel” or “we would not stop the spread of the gospel”
870	1CO	9	13	slf9	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι οἱ τὰ ἱερὰ ἐργαζόμενοι, τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ ἐσθίουσιν; οἱ τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ παρεδρεύοντες, τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ συνμερίζονται?	1	Do you not know that those who serve in the temple eat from the things of the temple	Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they know so he can add new information. Alternate translation: “I want to remind you that those who serve in the temple get their food from the temple, and those who serve at the altar eat from the things presented on the altar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
871	1CO	9	14	rj38	figs-metonymy	ἐκ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ζῆν	1	get their living from the gospel	The words the gospel here are a metonym that refers to: (1) the people to whom they tell the gospel. Alternate translation: “receive their food and other things they need from those to whom they teach the good news” (2) the result of working to tell the gospel. Alternate translation: “receive their food and other things they need because they work to tell the good news.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
872	1CO	9	15	fs7a		οὐδενὶ τούτων	1	these rights	“of any of these things that I deserve”
873	1CO	9	15	sy42	figs-activepassive	ἵνα οὕτως γένηται ἐν ἐμοί	1	so that this might be done for me	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so you will do the same kind of things for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
874	1CO	9	15	fd69		τὸ καύχημά μου…κενώσει	1	deprive me of my boasting	“take away this opportunity I have to boast”
875	1CO	9	16	ecw2		ἀνάγκη…μοι ἐπίκειται	1	this necessity was placed upon me	“I must preach the gospel” or “God compels me to preach the gospel”
876	1CO	9	16	l7as		οὐαὶ…μοί ἐστιν	1	woe be to me if	“may I suffer misfortune”
877	1CO	9	17	x6s9		ἑκὼν τοῦτο πράσσω	1	if I do this willingly	“I preach willingly” or “I preach because I want to”
878	1CO	9	17	t8pm	figs-ellipsis	εἰ δὲ ἄκων	1	But if not willingly	The words “I do this” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “But if I do this unwillingly” or “But if I do this even though I do not want to” or “But if I do this because I was forced to do it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
879	1CO	9	17	xa5p	figs-activepassive	οἰκονομίαν πεπίστευμαι	1	I have been entrusted with a stewardship	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I must do this work that God trusted me to complete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
880	1CO	9	18	lg51	figs-rquestion	τίς οὖν μού ἐστιν ὁ μισθός?	1	What then is my reward?	Paul is preparing them for the new information he is going to give them. Alternate translation: “This is my reward.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
881	1CO	9	18	ia5x		ἵνα εὐαγγελιζόμενος ἀδάπανον, θήσω τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	That when I preach, I may offer the gospel without charge	“My reward for preaching is that I can preach without receiving payment”
882	1CO	9	18	dln7		θήσω τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	offer the gospel	“I might preach the gospel”
883	1CO	9	18	fn7i		εἰς τὸ μὴ καταχρήσασθαι τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ	1	so not take full use of my right in the gospel	“without asking people to support me as I travel and preach”
884	1CO	9	19	s48l	figs-metaphor	ἐλεύθερος…ὢν ἐκ πάντων	1	I am free from all	Here, being free from all is an idiom for having the ability to live without thinking of what one must do for others. Alternate translation: “although I am able to live without serving others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
885	1CO	9	19	mms9		τοὺς πλείονας κερδήσω	1	I might gain even more	“I might persuade others to believe” or “I might help others trust in Christ”
886	1CO	9	20	hh8t		ἐγενόμην…ὡς Ἰουδαῖος	1	I became like a Jew	“I acted like a Jew” or “I practiced Jewish customs”
887	1CO	9	20	s9tu		ὡς ὑπὸ νόμον	1	I became like one under the law	“I became like one committed to following the law of Moses”
888	1CO	9	21	qtu7		ἀνόμοις	1	outside the law	“who do not obey the laws of Moses”
889	1CO	9	24	vn1d			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul explains that he uses the liberty he has in Christ to discipline himself.
890	1CO	9	24	urh5	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι οἱ ἐν σταδίῳ τρέχοντες, πάντες μὲν τρέχουσιν, εἷς δὲ λαμβάνει τὸ βραβεῖον?	1	Do you not know that in a race all the runners run the race, but that only one receives the prize?	Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they know so he can add new information. Alternate translation: “Let me remind you that although all runners run the race, only one runner receives the prize.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
891	1CO	9	24	mq1d	figs-metaphor	τρέχουσιν	1	run	Paul compares living the Christian life and working for God to running a race and being an athlete. As in a race, the Christian life and work require strict discipline on the part of the runner, and, as in a race, the Christian has a specific goal. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
892	1CO	9	24	mh8z	figs-metaphor	οὕτως τρέχετε, ἵνα καταλάβητε	1	So run in such a way that you might obtain it	Paul is speaking of the reward God will give his faithful people as if it were a prize given for an athletic contest. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
893	1CO	9	25	bfe4	figs-metaphor	φθαρτὸν στέφανον…ἡμεῖς δὲ ἄφθαρτον	1	a wreath that is perishable … one that is imperishable	The word translated as wreath can either refer to the wreath of leaves that was given as prizes to athletes who won games and races. The same word can be translated as “crown.” Paul is using this double sense to compare the wreath which would dry up to a crown of eternal life that will never decay. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
894	1CO	9	26	k64n	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ…οὕτως τρέχω, ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως; οὕτως πυκτεύω, ὡς οὐκ ἀέρα δέρων	1	I do not run without purpose or box by beating the air	Here, run and boxing are both metaphors for living the Christian life and serving God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
895	1CO	9	26	muuc	figs-doublenegatives	ἐγὼ…οὕτως τρέχω, ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως; οὕτως πυκτεύω, ὡς οὐκ ἀέρα δέρων	1		You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “I know very well why I am running, and I know what I am doing when I box” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
896	1CO	9	26	m7gf	figs-doublenegatives	ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως	1		You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “with purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
897	1CO	9	27	blb7	figs-metaphor	αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι	1	I myself may not be disqualified	The judge of a race or competition is a metaphor for God. Alternate translation: “I would be disqualified by the judge” or “God would say that I failed to obey the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
898	1CO	9	27	s3sd	figs-activepassive	αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι	1		This passive sentence can be rephrased to an active form. Alternate translation: “the judge disqualify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
899	1CO	10	intro	abcd			0		1 Corinthians 10 General Notes Structure and formatting Chapters 8-10 together answer the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?” In this chapter, Paul uses the exodus to warn people not to sin. Then, he returns to discussing meat offered to idols. He uses the Lord’s Supper as an example. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) Special concepts in this chapter Exodus Paul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]]) Eating meat sacrificed to idol Paul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) Rhetorical questions Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
900	1CO	10	1	r66h			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul reminds them of the example of their ancient Jewish fathers’ experiences with immorality and idolatry.
901	1CO	10	1	g34f	figs-exclusive	οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν πάντες ὑπὸ τὴν νεφέλην ἦσαν, καὶ πάντες διὰ τῆς θαλάσσης διῆλθον	1	our fathers	Paul is referring to the time of Moses in the book of Exodus when Israel fled through the Red Sea as the Egyptian army pursued them. The word our refers to himself and the Corinthians and is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
902	1CO	10	1	v4c6		τῆς θαλάσσης	1	passed through the sea	This sea is known by two names, the Red Sea and the Sea of Reeds.
903	1CO	10	1	z5s9		διὰ…διῆλθον	1	passed through	“walked through” or “traveled through”
904	1CO	10	2	f7cq		πάντες εἰς τὸν Μωϋσῆν ἐβαπτίσαντο	1	All were baptized into Moses	“they all followed and were committed to Moses”
905	1CO	10	2	y72i		ἐν τῇ νεφέλῃ	1	in the cloud	The cloud represented the presence of God and led the Israelites during the day.
906	1CO	10	4	xut2		πάντες τὸ αὐτὸ πνευματικὸν ἔπιον πόμα; ἔπινον γὰρ ἐκ πνευματικῆς ἀκολουθούσης πέτρας	1	drank the same spiritual drink … spiritual rock	“drank the same water that God supernaturally brought out of the rock that followed them”
907	1CO	10	4	whj4	figs-metonymy	ἡ…πέτρα ἦν ὁ Χριστός	1	that rock was Christ	The rock was a literal, physical rock, so it would be best to translate this literally. If your language cannot say that a rock was a person’s name, treat the word rock as a metonym for the power of Christ that worked through the rock. Alternate translation: “it was Christ who worked through that rock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
908	1CO	10	5	lh93	figs-litotes	οὐκ…ηὐδόκησεν	1	not well pleased	Alternate translation: “was displeased” or “was angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
909	1CO	10	5	tnu4		τοῖς πλείοσιν αὐτῶν	1	most of them	“most of the Israelite fathers”
910	1CO	10	5	w673	figs-activepassive	κατεστρώθησαν	1	their corpses were scattered about	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God scattered their dead bodies around” or “God killed them and scattered their bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
911	1CO	10	5	b96g		ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ	1	in the wilderness	The wilderness is the desert land between Egypt and Israel through which the Israelites wandered for 40 years.
912	1CO	10	7	ukp4	figs-euphemism	παίζειν	1	to play	Paul is quoting the Jewish scriptures. His readers would have understood from the phrase to play that the people were worshiping an idol by singing and dancing and engaging in sexual activities, not simply enjoying innocent fun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
913	1CO	10	8	vw5g		ἔπεσαν μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες	1	In one day, twenty-three thousand people died	“God killed 23,000 people in one day”
914	1CO	10	9	l5h4	figs-activepassive	ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο	1	were destroyed by snakes	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, snakes destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
915	1CO	10	10	i3q3	figs-activepassive	ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ	1	were destroyed by the destroyer	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, an angel of death destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
916	1CO	10	11	u1mp		ταῦτα…συνέβαινεν ἐκείνοις	1	these things happened to them	“God punished our ancestors”
917	1CO	10	11	wmp1	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	as examples	Here, our refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
918	1CO	10	11	j3z1		τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν	1	the end of the ages	“the last days have come”
919	1CO	10	12	df2p		μὴ πέσῃ	1	does not fall	“he does not sin or reject God”
920	1CO	10	13	a8vj	figs-doublenegatives	πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν, εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος	1	No temptation has overtaken you that is not common to all humanity	You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “The temptations that affect you are temptations that all people experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
921	1CO	10	13	hc7q		ὃς οὐκ ἐάσει ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε	1	He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability	This can be stated as a positive. Alternate translation: “who will only allow you to be tempted in ways that you are strong enough to resist”
922	1CO	10	13	a72t	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐάσει ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι	1	will not let you be tempted	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “will not allow anyone to tempt you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
923	1CO	10	14	dab4			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues to remind them to be pure and to stay away from idolatry and immorality as he talks about communion, which represents the blood and body of Christ.
924	1CO	10	14	n5tb	figs-metaphor	φεύγετε ἀπὸ τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας	1	flee away from idolatry	Paul is speaking of the practice of worshiping idols as if it were a physical thing like a dangerous animal. Alternate translation: “do all you can to get away from worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
925	1CO	10	16	gi4s		τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας…τὸν ἄρτον	1	The cup of blessing	Paul is speaking of the cup of wine and the bread that were used in the ritual of the Lord’s Supper.
926	1CO	10	16	tv8e		ὃ εὐλογοῦμεν	1	that we bless	“for which we thank God”
927	1CO	10	16	y5uv	figs-rquestion	τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας, ὃ εὐλογοῦμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία ἐστὶν τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ?	1	is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ?	Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know, that the cup of wine that we share represents us sharing in the blood of Christ. Alternate translation: “When we bless the cup in the Lord's Supper, we share in the blood of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
928	1CO	10	16	ngf6	figs-rquestion	τὸν ἄρτον ὃν κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐστιν?	1	The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ?	Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know. Alternate translation: “When we break the bread of the Lord's Supper, we share in the body of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
929	1CO	10	17	g954		ἄρτος	1	loaf of bread	a single unit of baked bread that is sliced or broken into pieces before it is eaten
930	1CO	10	18	q9ng	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας, κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου εἰσίν?	1	Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar?	Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: “those who eat the sacrifices share in the activities and the blessings of the altar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
931	1CO	10	19	ix5q	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν φημι?	1	What am I saying then?	Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: “Let me review what I am saying.” or “This is what I mean.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
932	1CO	10	19	j8dj	figs-ellipsis	ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν?	1	Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything?	The words “I am saying” are understood from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Am I saying that food sacrificed to idols or idols themselves are important?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
933	1CO	10	19	l9t4	figs-rquestion	ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν?	1		Paul wants the Corinthians to answer the question in their minds so he does not have to tell them. Alternate translation: “You know that I am not saying that an idol is something real or that food sacrificed to idols is important.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
934	1CO	10	21	dy2g	figs-metonymy	οὐ δύνασθε ποτήριον Κυρίου πίνειν, καὶ ποτήριον δαιμονίων	1	You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons	Paul speaks of a person drinking from the same cup as the demon as evidence that that person is a friend of the demon. Alternate translation: “It is impossible for you to be true friends with both the Lord and demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
935	1CO	10	21	qwk7		οὐ δύνασθε τραπέζης Κυρίου μετέχειν, καὶ τραπέζης δαιμονίων	1	You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons	“It is impossible for you to be truly one with the Lord’s people and also with demons”
936	1CO	10	22	l8ik	figs-rquestion	ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον?	1	Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy?	Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this question in their minds. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that it is not right to make the Lord jealous.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
937	1CO	10	22	h9fh		παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον	1	provoke	to anger or irritate the Lord
938	1CO	10	22	zv17	figs-rquestion	μὴ ἰσχυρότεροι αὐτοῦ ἐσμεν?	1	We are not stronger than him, are we?	Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this question in their minds. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that we are not stronger than God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
939	1CO	10	23	ped1			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul again reminds them of the law of liberty and doing everything for the benefit of others.
940	1CO	10	23	tu2m		πάντα ἔξεστιν	1	Everything is lawful	This could mean: (1) Paul is answering what some Corinthians might be thinking, “Some say, ‘I can do anything’.” (2) Paul is actually saying what he thinks is true, “God allows me to do anything.” This should be translated as in 1 Corinthians 6:12.
941	1CO	10	23	jm4k		οὐ πάντα συμφέρει	1	not everything is beneficial	“some things are not beneficial”
942	1CO	10	23	ex6z	figs-metaphor	οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ	1	not everything builds people up	To build up people represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated “builds up” in 1 Corinthians 8:1. Alternate translation: “not everything strengthens people” or “some things do not strengthen people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
943	1CO	10	27	g31y		ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν	1	you without asking questions of conscience	“you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience”
944	1CO	10	28	q3zt	figs-you	ἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα	1	But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you	Some translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of you and eat here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” (1 Corinthians 10:27) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
945	1CO	10	28	qi77	figs-you	ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα	1	says to you … do not eat … informed you	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of the word you and the command do not eat it here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
946	1CO	10	29	v1d9	figs-you	συνείδησιν δὲ λέγω, οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ	1	the conscience of the other man, I mean, and not yours	Some translations put these words, along with the words in the verse before this one, in parentheses because (1) The forms of you and eat here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” (1 Corinthians 10:27) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
947	1CO	10	29	s1wk	figs-you	οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ	1	and not yours	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word your here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
948	1CO	10	29	k8xr		ἵνα τί γὰρ ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως?	1	For why … conscience?	Possible meanings for this question, along with the question in the next verse, are (1) The word For refers back to 1 Corinthians 10:27. Alternate translation: “I am not to ask questions of conscience, so why … conscience?” (2) Paul is quoting what some Corinthians were thinking. Alternate translation: “As some of you might be thinking, ‘For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?’”
949	1CO	10	29	d4q1	figs-rquestion	ἵνα τί γὰρ ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως?	1	why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience?	The speaker wants the hearer to answer the question in his mind. Alternate translation: “For you should know without me telling you that no one should be able to say I am doing wrong just because that person has ideas about right and wrong that are different from mine.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
950	1CO	10	30	dv5f	figs-rquestion	εἰ ἐγὼ χάριτι μετέχω, τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ?	1	If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks?	The speaker wants the hearer to answer the question in his mind. Alternate translation: “I partake of the meal with gratitude, so no one should insult me for that for which I gave thanks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
951	1CO	10	30	x2v5		εἰ ἐγὼ…μετέχω	1	If I partake	If Paul is not quoting what some Corinthians might be thinking, the I represents those who eat meat with thankfulness. “If a person partakes” or “When a person eats”
952	1CO	10	30	n89t		χάριτι	1	with gratitude	“and thank God for it” or “and thank the person who gave it to me for it”
953	1CO	10	32	ag47		ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν	1	Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks	“Do not displease Jews or Greeks” or “Do not make Jews or Greeks angry”
954	1CO	10	33	hd2z		τὸ τῶν πολλῶν	1	the many	as many people as possible
955	1CO	11	intro	abce			0		1 Corinthians 11 General Notes Structure and formatting This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord’s Supper (verses 17-34). Special concepts in this chapter Proper conduct in a church service Disorderly women Paul’s instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned. The Lord’s Supper There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord’s Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord’s Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ’s death if they participated in the Lord’s Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]]) Important figures of speech in this chapter Rhetorical questions Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) The head Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person’s actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
956	1CO	11	1	h5fg			0	Connecting Statement:	After reminding them to follow him the way he follows Christ, Paul gives some specific instructs in how women and men are to live as believers.
957	1CO	11	2	qsk9		πάντα μου μέμνησθε	1	you remember me in everything	“you think of me at all times” or “you always try act as I would want you to act” The Corinthians had not forgotten who Paul was or what he had taught them.
958	1CO	11	3	k5um		θέλω δὲ	1	Now I want	This could mean: (1) Paul is saying, “Because of this, I want.” (2) Paul is saying, “However, I want.”
959	1CO	11	3	hbt7		ἡ κεφαλὴ…ἐστιν	1	is the head	has authority over
960	1CO	11	3	en95		κεφαλὴ…γυναικὸς ὁ ἀνήρ	2	a man is the head of a woman	This could mean: (1) men are to have authority over women. (2) the husband is to have authority over the wife.
961	1CO	11	4	uuv2		προφητεύων κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων	1	having something on his head	“prophesying after placing a cloth or veil over his head”
962	1CO	11	4	lit3		καταισχύνει τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ	1	dishonors his head	This could mean: (1) this brings disgrace on the man. (2) this brings disgrace on Christ, who is the head of the man.
963	1CO	11	5	b7ku		γυνὴ προσευχομένη ἢ προφητεύουσα ἀκατακαλύπτῳ τῇ κεφαλῇ, καταισχύνει τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτῆς	1	woman who prays … dishonors her head	This could mean: (1) a woman who prays with her head uncovered brings disgrace on herself. (2) a woman who prays with her head uncovered brings disgrace on her husband.
964	1CO	11	5	k5yl		ἀκατακαλύπτῳ τῇ κεφαλῇ	1	with her head uncovered	That is, without the cloth that was worn on the top of the head and that covered the hair.
965	1CO	11	5	e1pz		τῇ ἐξυρημένῃ	1	as if her head were shaved	as if she had removed all the hair on her head with a razor
966	1CO	11	6	s4r5		εἰ…αἰσχρὸν γυναικὶ	2	If it is disgraceful for a woman	It was a mark of disgrace or humiliation for a woman to have her hair shaved off or cut short.
967	1CO	11	7	aa4r	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ὀφείλει κατακαλύπτεσθαι τὴν κεφαλήν	1	should not have his head covered	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: This could mean: (1) a man must not cover his head. (2) a man does not need to cover his head. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
968	1CO	11	7	t5jn		δόξα ἀνδρός	1	glory of the man	Just as man reflects God’s greatness, the woman reflects the man’s character.
969	1CO	11	8	s5ns	figs-activepassive	οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἀνὴρ ἐκ γυναικός, ἀλλὰ γυνὴ ἐξ ἀνδρός.	1	For man was not made from woman. Instead, woman was made from man	God made the woman by taking a bone from the man and making the woman from that bone. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God did not make the man from the woman. Instead, he made the woman from the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
970	1CO	11	8	w8jm		οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἀνὴρ ἐκ γυναικός, ἀλλὰ γυνὴ ἐξ ἀνδρός.	1	For neither … for man	All of 1 Corinthians 11:8-9 could be put in parentheses so that the reader can see that “This is why” in 1 Corinthians 11:10 refers back to the words “the woman is the glory of the man” in 1 Corinthians 11:7.
971	1CO	11	10	wh4c		ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς	1	have a symbol of authority on her head	This could symbolize that: (1) she has man as her head.” (2) she has the authority to pray or prophesy.
972	1CO	11	11	pir4		πλὴν…ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	Nevertheless, in the Lord	“While what I have just said is all true, the most important thing is this: in the Lord”
973	1CO	11	11	h9t4		ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	in the Lord	This could mean: (1) “among Christians, who belong to the Lord.” (2) “in the world as created by God.”
974	1CO	11	11	hqy4	figs-doublenegatives	οὔτε γυνὴ χωρὶς ἀνδρὸς, οὔτε ἀνὴρ χωρὶς γυναικὸς ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	the woman is not independent from the man, nor is the man independent from the woman	You can state this positively. Alternate translation: “the woman depends on the man, and the man depends on the woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
975	1CO	11	12	i8qu		τὰ…πάντα ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	all things come from God	“God created everything”
976	1CO	11	13	eex3		ἐν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς κρίνατε	1	Judge for yourselves	“Judge this issue according to the local customs and church practices you know”
977	1CO	11	13	hp13	figs-rquestion	πρέπον ἐστὶν γυναῖκα ἀκατακάλυπτον, τῷ Θεῷ προσεύχεσθαι?	1	Is it proper for a woman to pray to God with her head uncovered?	Paul expects the Corinthians to agree with him. You can state this in active form. “To honor God, a woman should pray to God with a covering on her head.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
978	1CO	11	14	v5b5	figs-rquestion	οὐδὲ ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ διδάσκει ὑμᾶς, ὅτι ἀνὴρ μὲν ἐὰν κομᾷ, ἀτιμία αὐτῷ ἐστιν;	1	Does not even nature itself teach you … for him?	This is the first part of a rhetorical question that continues into the next verse. Paul expects the Corinthians to agree with him. Alternate translation: “Even nature teaches you that if a man might have long hair, it is a disgrace for him;” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
979	1CO	11	14	gyw9	figs-personification	οὐδὲ ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ διδάσκει ὑμᾶς, ὅτι ἀνὴρ μὲν ἐὰν κομᾷ, ἀτιμία αὐτῷ ἐστιν	1	Does not even nature itself teach you … for him?	He is speaking of nature as if it were a person who teaches. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
980	1CO	11	15	s7ys	figs-activepassive	ὅτι ἡ κόμη…δέδοται αὐτῇ	1	For her hair has been given to her	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “For God created woman with long hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
981	1CO	11	17	id4f			0	Connecting Statement:	As Paul talks about communion, the Lord’s supper, he reminds them to have right attitudes as well as unity. He reminds them that if they fail in those things when taking communion, they will become sick and die, as has already happened to some of them.
982	1CO	11	17	vt5a		τοῦτο δὲ παραγγέλλων	1	in the following instructions, I do not praise you. For	“But as I give you these instructions”
983	1CO	11	17	du1a		οὐκ εἰς τὸ κρεῖσσον, ἀλλὰ εἰς τὸ ἧσσον	1	it is not for the better but for the worse	“you do not help each other; instead, you harm each other”
984	1CO	11	18	iu3q		ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	in the church	“as believers.” Paul is not talking about being inside a building.
985	1CO	11	18	l9vx		σχίσματα ἐν ὑμῖν ὑπάρχειν	1	there are divisions among you	“you divide yourselves into opposing groups”
986	1CO	11	19	s9sy	figs-irony	δεῖ γὰρ καὶ αἱρέσεις ἐν ὑμῖν εἶναι, ἵνα καὶ οἱ δόκιμοι φανεροὶ γένωνται ἐν ὑμῖν	1	For there must also be factions among you	This could mean: (1) the phrase it is necessary indicates that this situation is likely to happen. Alternate translation: “For there will probably be factions among you” (2) Paul was using irony to shame them for having factions. Alternate translation: “For you seem to think that there must be factions among you” or “For you seem to think that you must divide yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
987	1CO	11	19	kcr7		αἱρέσεις	1	factions	opposing groups of people
988	1CO	11	19	j7db		δόκιμοι	1	who are approved	This could refer to: (1) the ones whom God approves” (2) the ones whom the church approves.
989	1CO	11	20	x9h5		συνερχομένων…ὑμῶν	1	come together	“when you gather together”
990	1CO	11	20	dse7		οὐκ ἔστιν Κυριακὸν δεῖπνον φαγεῖν	1	it is not the Lord’s Supper that you eat	“you may believe you are eating the Lord’s Supper, but you do not treat it with respect”
991	1CO	11	22	f8ht	figs-rquestion	μὴ γὰρ οἰκίας οὐκ ἔχετε εἰς τὸ ἐσθίειν καὶ πίνειν?	1		Paul is rebuking the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “For if you just want to eat and to drink, you certainly have houses where you can do that!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
992	1CO	11	22	zl1h		εἰς τὸ ἐσθίειν καὶ πίνειν	1	to eat and to drink in	“in which to gather for a meal”
993	1CO	11	22	am33	figs-rquestion	ἢ τῆς ἐκκλησίας τοῦ Θεοῦ καταφρονεῖτε, καὶ καταισχύνετε τοὺς μὴ ἔχοντας?	1		Paul is rebuking the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “You are acting in such a way that despises the church of God and humiliates those who have nothing!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
994	1CO	11	22	d2cm		καταφρονεῖτε	1	despise	hate or treat with dishonor and disrespect
995	1CO	11	22	nz88	figs-rquestion	τί εἴπω ὑμῖν? ἐπαινέσω ὑμᾶς ἐν τούτῳ?	1	What should I say to you? Should I praise you?	Paul is rebuking the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “I can say nothing good about this. I cannot praise you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
996	1CO	11	23	av31		ἐγὼ γὰρ παρέλαβον ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου, ὃ καὶ παρέδωκα ὑμῖν, ὅτι ὁ Κύριος	1	For I received from the Lord what I also passed on to you, that the Lord	“For it was from the Lord that I heard what I told you, and it was this: the Lord”
997	1CO	11	23	c197	figs-activepassive	ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ᾗ παρεδίδετο	1	on the night when he was betrayed	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “on the night that Judas Iscariot betrayed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
998	1CO	11	24	e19d		ἔκλασεν	1	he broke it	“he pulled pieces from it”
999	1CO	11	24	f6hn		τοῦτό μού ἐστιν τὸ σῶμα	1	This is my body	“The bread I am holding is my body”
1000	1CO	11	25	gr2k		τὸ ποτήριον	1	the cup	It is best to translate this literally. The Corinthians knew which cup he took, so it is not simply “a cup” or “some cup” or “any cup.” This could refer to: (1) the cup of wine that one would expect him to use. (2) the third or fourth of the four cups of wine that the Jews drank at the Passover meal.
1001	1CO	11	25	z54e		τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, ὁσάκις ἐὰν πίνητε	1	Do this as often as you drink it	“Drink from this cup, and as often as you drink from it”
1002	1CO	11	26	m89f	figs-explicit	ἄχρι οὗ ἔλθῃ	1	until he comes	Where Jesus comes to can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “until Jesus comes back to the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1003	1CO	11	27	as6y		ἐσθίῃ τὸν ἄρτον ἢ πίνῃ τὸ ποτήριον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	eats the bread or drinks the cup of the Lord	“the bread of the Lord or drinks the cup of the Lord”
1004	1CO	11	28	nhx7	figs-metaphor	δοκιμαζέτω…ἄνθρωπος	1	examine	Paul speaks of a person looking at his relationship to God and how he has been living his life as if that person is looking over something he wants to buy. See how “test the quality” is translated in 1 Corinthians 3:13. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1005	1CO	11	29	gqd2		μὴ διακρίνων τὸ σῶμα	1	without discerning the body	This could mean: (1) that person does not recognize that the church is the body of the Lord. (2) that person does not consider that he is handling the Lord’s body.
1006	1CO	11	30	kbi6		ἀσθενεῖς καὶ ἄρρωστοι	1	weak and ill	These words mean almost the same thing and can be combined, as in UST.
1007	1CO	11	30	vx5t	figs-euphemism	κοιμῶνται ἱκανοί	1	and many of you have fallen asleep	Here, fallen asleep is a euphemism for death. Alternate translation: “and some of you have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]).
1008	1CO	11	30	bh6j	figs-explicit	ἱκανοί	1	many of you	If this would sound like Paul is talking to those who have died, you may need to make explicit that he is not. Alternate translation: “many of the members of your group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1009	1CO	11	31	j6ml	figs-metaphor	διεκρίνομεν	1	examine	Paul speaks of a person looking at his relationship to God and how he has been living his life as if that person is looking over something he wants to buy. See how this is translated in 1 Corinthians 11:28. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1010	1CO	11	31	egl8	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἂν ἐκρινόμεθα	1	we will not be judged	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God would not judge us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1011	1CO	11	32	ruq5	figs-activepassive	κρινόμενοι…ὑπὸ Κυρίου, παιδευόμεθα, ἵνα μὴ…κατακριθῶμεν	1	we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined, so that we may not be condemned	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the Lord judges us, he disciplines us, so that he will not condemn us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1012	1CO	11	33	maa7		συνερχόμενοι εἰς τὸ φαγεῖν	1	come together to eat	gather to eat a meal together before celebrating the Lord’s Supper
1013	1CO	11	33	nky5		ἀλλήλους ἐκδέχεσθε	1	wait for one another	“allow the others to arrive before beginning the meal”
1014	1CO	11	34	v2uh		ἐν οἴκῳ ἐσθιέτω	1	let him eat at home	“let him eat before attending this gathering”
1015	1CO	11	34	x1l8	figs-metonymy	μὴ εἰς κρίμα συνέρχησθε	1	not be for judgment	“it will not be an occasion for God to discipline you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1016	1CO	12	intro	abcf			0		1 Corinthians 12 General Notes Structure and formatting Gifts of the Holy Spirit This chapter begins a new section. Chapters 12-14 discuss spiritual gifts within the church. Special concepts in this chapter The Church, the body of Christ This is an important metaphor in Scripture. The Church has many different parts. Each part has different functions. They combine to make one church. All of the different parts are necessary. Each part is to be concerned for all the other parts, even those that seem less important. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “No one can say, ‘Jesus is Lord,’ except by the Holy Spirit.” In reading the Old Testament, the Jews would have substituted the word “Lord” for the word “Yahweh.” This sentence probably means that no one can say that Jesus is Yahweh, God in the flesh, without the Holy Spirit’s influence drawing them to accept this truth. If this statement is translated poorly, it can have unintended theological consequences.
1017	1CO	12	1	da2e			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul lets them know that God has given special gifts to believers. These gifts are to help the body of believers.
1018	1CO	12	1	i3k7	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν	1	I do not want you to be uninformed	You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1019	1CO	12	2	hbt8	figs-metaphor	ἔθνη ἦτε, πρὸς τὰ εἴδωλα τὰ ἄφωνα ὡς ἂν ἤγεσθε, ἀπαγόμενοι	1	you were led astray to idols who could not speak, in whatever ways you were led by them	Here, led astray is a metaphor for being persuaded to do something wrong. Being led astray to idols represents being wrongly persuaded to worship idols. Alternate translation: “you were persuaded in some way to worship idols who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1020	1CO	12	2	xnw1	figs-activepassive	ἔθνη ἦτε, πρὸς τὰ εἴδωλα τὰ ἄφωνα ὡς ἂν ἤγεσθε, ἀπαγόμενοι	1		You can state the phrases “were led astray” and “you were led by them” in active form. Alternate translation: “you believed lies somehow and so you worshiped idols who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1021	1CO	12	3	zg4j		οὐδεὶς ἐν Πνεύματι Θεοῦ λαλῶν, λέγει	1	no one who speaks by the Spirit of God can say	This could mean: (1) “no Christian who has the Spirit of God in him can say.” (2) “no one who is prophesying by the power of the Spirit of God can say.”
1022	1CO	12	3	jak6		ἀνάθεμα Ἰησοῦς	1	Jesus is accursed	“God will punish Jesus” or “God will make Jesus suffer”
1023	1CO	12	6	eth3		ὁ ἐνεργῶν τὰ πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν	1	who is working all things in everyone	“who causes everyone to have them”
1024	1CO	12	7	x7mv	figs-activepassive	ἑκάστῳ…δίδοται	1	to each one is given	You can state this in active form. God is the one who does the giving (1 Corinthians 12:6). Alternate translation: “God gives to each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1025	1CO	12	8	c9ak	figs-activepassive	ᾧ μὲν…διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος δίδοται λόγος	1	to one is given by the Spirit a word	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “by means of the Spirit God gives to one person a word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1026	1CO	12	8	us1k		λόγος	1	a word	“a message”
1027	1CO	12	8	pe8s	figs-activepassive	δίδοται	1	is given	You can state this in active form. See how this is translated in 1 Corinthians 12:8. Alternate translation: “God gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1028	1CO	12	9	d7qg	figs-ellipsis	ἄλλῳ…χαρίσματα ἰαμάτων ἐν τῷ ἑνὶ Πνεύματι	1	to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit	The words are given are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit are given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1029	1CO	12	10	x572	figs-ellipsis	ἄλλῳ προφητεία	1	to another prophecy	The phrase “is given by the same Spirit” is understood from the previous phrases. Alternate translation: “to another prophecy is given by the same Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1030	1CO	12	10	v7xy	figs-ellipsis	ἑτέρῳ γένη γλωσσῶν	1	to another various kinds of tongues	The phrase “are given by the same Spirit” is understood from the previous phrases. Alternate translation: “to another various kinds of tongues are given by the same Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1031	1CO	12	10	skl8	figs-metonymy	γένη γλωσσῶν	1	various kinds of tongues	Here, tongues represents languages. Alternate translation: “the ability to speak different languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1032	1CO	12	10	j8qk	figs-ellipsis	ἄλλῳ…ἑρμηνία γλωσσῶν	4	to another the interpretation of tongues	The phrase “is given by the same Spirit” is understood from the previous phrases. Alternate translation: “to another the interpretation of tongues is given by the same Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1033	1CO	12	10	c14y		ἑρμηνία γλωσσῶν	1	the interpretation of tongues	This refers to the ability to listen to what someone says in one language and use another language to tell people what that person is saying. Alternate translation: “the ability to interpret what is said in other languages”
1034	1CO	12	11	z383		τὸ ἓν καὶ τὸ αὐτὸ Πνεῦμα	1	one and the same Spirit	God gives the gifts through the work of the one and only Holy Spirit. See how this is translated in 1 Corinthians 12:8.
1035	1CO	12	12	j3xl			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues to talk of the variety of gifts God gives believers, God gives different gifts to different believers, but Paul wants them to know that all believers are made into one body, which is called the body of Christ. For this reason believers should have unity.
1036	1CO	12	13	g8uk	figs-activepassive	ἐν ἑνὶ Πνεύματι ἡμεῖς πάντες…ἐβαπτίσθημεν	1	For by one Spirit we were all baptized	This could mean: (1) the Holy Spirit is the one who baptizes us. Alternate translation: “one Spirit baptized us” (2) the Spirit, like the water of baptism, is the medium through which we are baptized into the body. Alternate translation: “God baptized is all with the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1037	1CO	12	13	r9hm	figs-metonymy	εἴτε…δοῦλοι, εἴτε ἐλεύθεροι	3	whether bound or free	Here, bound is a metonym for “enslaved.” Alternate translation: “whether slave-people or free-people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1038	1CO	12	13	r5kw	figs-metaphor	πάντες ἓν Πνεῦμα ἐποτίσθημεν	1	all were made to drink of one Spirit	Here the Spirit is spoken of as something that a person can drink. Alternate translation: “we were made to drink the Spirit as people might share a drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1039	1CO	12	13	ju15	figs-activepassive	πάντες ἓν Πνεῦμα ἐποτίσθημεν	1		You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God gave all of us the same Spirit to drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1040	1CO	12	17	rsl6	figs-rquestion	εἰ ὅλον τὸ σῶμα ὀφθαλμός, ποῦ ἡ ἀκοή? εἰ ὅλον ἀκοή, ποῦ ἡ ὄσφρησις?	1	where would the sense of hearing be? … where would the sense of smell be?	Paul asks these two questions to help the Corinthians to realize the importance of each part of the body. You can translate these as statements. Alternate translation: “If your whole body were an eye, you would not be able to hear anything! If your whole were an ear, you would not be able to smell anything!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1041	1CO	12	19	y4vg	figs-rquestion	εἰ δὲ ἦν τὰ πάντα ἓν μέλος, ποῦ τὸ σῶμα?	1	where would the body be?	Paul asks this question to help the Corinthians to understand that the body must have many different kinds of members. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “But if all the parts of the body were the same, there would be no body!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1042	1CO	12	19	zw6k		τὰ…ἓν μέλος	1	the same member	The word member is a general word for the parts of the body, like the head, arm, or knee. Alternate translation: “the same part of the body”
1043	1CO	12	23	id5z	figs-euphemism	τὰ ἀσχήμονα ἡμῶν	1	our unpresentable members	Here, unpresentable members probably refers to the private parts of the body, which people keep covered. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1044	1CO	12	25	z4kk		μὴ ᾖ σχίσμα ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἀλλὰ	1	there may be no division within the body, but	“the body may be unified, and”
1045	1CO	12	26	da97	figs-activepassive	δοξάζεται μέλος	1	one member is honored	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone gives honor to one member” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1046	1CO	12	27	z2ct		ὑμεῖς δέ ἐστε	1	Now you are	Here the word Now is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
1047	1CO	12	28	ll3s		πρῶτον ἀποστόλους	1	first apostles	This could mean: (1) the first gift Paul will mention is apostles. (2) the most important gift Paul will mention is apostles.
1048	1CO	12	28	unh1		ἀντιλήμψεις	1	those who provide helps	“those who provide help to other believers”
1049	1CO	12	28	l6p1		κυβερνήσεις	1	those who do the work of administration	“those who govern the church”
1050	1CO	12	28	w726		γένη γλωσσῶν	1	those who have various kinds of tongues	people who can speak in one or more foreign languages without having studied that language
1051	1CO	12	29	aq64	figs-rquestion	μὴ πάντες ἀπόστολοι? μὴ πάντες προφῆται? μὴ πάντες διδάσκαλοι? μὴ πάντες δυνάμεις?	1	Are all of them apostles? Are all prophets? Are all teachers? Do all do powerful deeds?	Paul uses these questions to remind his readers of what they already know. Alternate translation: “Only some of them are apostles. Only some of them are prophets. Only some of them are teachers. Only some of them do powerful deeds.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1052	1CO	12	30	p919	figs-rquestion	μὴ πάντες χαρίσματα ἔχουσιν ἰαμάτων? μὴ πάντες γλώσσαις λαλοῦσιν? μὴ πάντες διερμηνεύουσιν?	1	Do all of them have gifts of healing?	Paul continues to use questions to remind his readers of what they already know. Alternate translation: “Only some have gifts of healing. Only some speak with tongues. Only some interpret tongues.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1053	1CO	12	30	ab9e		διερμηνεύουσιν	1	interpret	To interpret means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how this is translated in 1 Corinthians 2:13.
1054	1CO	12	31	vb1m		ζηλοῦτε…τὰ χαρίσματα τὰ μείζονα	1	earnestly desire the greater gifts.	This could mean: (1) they must eagerly seek from God the gifts that best help the church. (2) they are eagerly looking for gifts that they think are greater because they think those are more exciting to have.
1055	1CO	13	intro	abcg			0		1 Corinthians 13 General Notes Structure and formatting Paul seems to interrupt his teaching about spiritual gifts. However, this chapter probably serves a larger function in his teaching. Special concepts in this chapter Love Love is the most important characteristic of the believer. This chapter fully describes love. Paul tells why love is more important than the gifts of the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/love]]) Important figures of speech in this chapter Metaphor Paul uses many different metaphors in this chapter. He uses these metaphors to instruct the Corinthians, especially on difficult topics. Readers often need spiritual discernment to understand these teachings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1056	1CO	13	1	n8lm			0	Connecting Statement:	Having just talked about the gifts that God gave to believers, Paul emphasizes what is more important.
1057	1CO	13	1	cm2n	figs-hyperbole	ταῖς γλώσσαις…τῶν ἀγγέλων	1	the tongues of … angels	This could mean: (1) Paul is exaggerating for the sake of effect and does not believe that people speak the language that angels use. (2) Paul thinks that some who speak in tongues actually speak the language that angels use. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1058	1CO	13	1	k2gk	figs-metaphor	γέγονα χαλκὸς ἠχῶν ἢ κύμβαλον ἀλαλάζον	1	I have become a noisy gong or a clanging cymbal	A person speaking without love is compared to musical instruments that make loud, annoying sounds. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1059	1CO	13	1	krt1	translate-unknown	χαλκὸς	1	gong	A gong is a large, thin, round metal plate that is hit with a padded stick to make a loud sound. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1060	1CO	13	1	qbx6	translate-unknown	κύμβαλον ἀλαλάζον	1	a clanging cymbal	A cymbal is a thin, round metal plate that is hit with something—or two cymbals are struck together—to make a loud sound. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1061	1CO	13	3	ar2q	figs-explicit	παραδῶ τὸ σῶμά μου	1	I give my body	The phrase had over my body refers to giving up one's own body to be abused or killed. Alternate translation: “I allow people to persecute or kill me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1062	1CO	13	4	m671	figs-personification	ἡ ἀγάπη μακροθυμεῖ, χρηστεύεται; ἡ ἀγάπη οὐ ζηλοῖ; ἡ ἀγάπη οὐ περπερεύεται, οὐ φυσιοῦται	1	Love is patient and kind … It is not arrogant	Here Paul speaks about Love as if it were a person who could do these actions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1063	1CO	13	5	cp6x	figs-personification		0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues speaking about love as if it were a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1064	1CO	13	5	xt3v	figs-activepassive	οὐ παροξύνεται	1	It is not easily angered	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “no one will be able to make it angry quickly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1065	1CO	13	6	wl5y	figs-personification		0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues speaking about love as if it were a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1066	1CO	13	6	tpz6	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ χαίρει ἐπὶ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ, συνχαίρει δὲ τῇ ἀληθείᾳ	1	It does not rejoice in unrighteousness. Instead, it rejoices in the truth	You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “It rejoices only in righteousness and truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1067	1CO	13	7	vf6x	figs-personification		0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues speaking about love as if it were a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1068	1CO	13	12	bn3h		βλέπομεν γὰρ ἄρτι δι’ ἐσόπτρου ἐν αἰνίγματι	1	For now we see indirectly in a mirror	In Paul’s day, a mirror was made of polished metal rather than glass and provided a dim, vague reflection.
1069	1CO	13	12	w2eu		βλέπομεν…ἄρτι	1	now we see	This could mean: (1) they now see Christ. (2) they now see God.
1070	1CO	13	12	xx1g	figs-ellipsis	τότε δὲ πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον	1	but then face to face	The words “we will see” are implied here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1071	1CO	13	12	tjq9	figs-synecdoche	τότε δὲ πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον	1		Here, face to face means that we will be physically present with Christ. Alternate translation: “but then we will see Christ face to face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1072	1CO	13	12	qp7g	figs-ellipsis	ἐπιγνώσομαι	1	I will know fully	The word “Christ” is understood. Alternate translation: “I will know Christ fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1073	1CO	13	12	i28w	figs-activepassive	καθὼς καὶ ἐπεγνώσθην	1	just as I have also been fully known	You can state this as active. Alternate translation: “just as Christ has known me fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1074	1CO	13	13	nt1y	figs-abstractnouns	πίστις, ἐλπίς, ἀγάπη	1	faith, hope, and love	The abstract nouns faith, hope, and love can be expressed in phrases with verbs. Alternate translation: “we must trust the Lord, be confident that he will do what he has promised, and love him and others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1075	1CO	14	intro	abch			0		1 Corinthians 14 General Notes Structure and formatting In this chapter, Paul returns to discussing spiritual gifts. Some translations set what is quoted from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the words of verse 21. Special concepts in this chapter Tongues Scholars disagree on the exact meaning of the gift of tongues. Paul describes the gift of tongues as a sign for unbelievers. It does not serve the whole church, unless someone interprets what is spoken. It is very important that the church uses this gift properly. Prophecy Scholars disagree on the exact meaning of prophecy as a spiritual gift. Paul says prophets can build up the entire church. He describes prophecy as a gift for believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
1076	1CO	14	1	vl57			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul wants them to know that though teaching is more important because it instructs people, it must be done with love.
1077	1CO	14	1	x938	figs-personification	διώκετε τὴν ἀγάπην	1	Pursue love	Paul speaks of love as if it were a person. Alternate translation: “Follow after love” or “Work hard to love people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1078	1CO	14	1	ki3l		μᾶλλον…ἵνα προφητεύητε	1	especially that you may prophesy	“work especially hard to be able to prophesy”
1079	1CO	14	3	r1nx	figs-metaphor	οἰκοδομὴν	1	to build them up	Here, building up represents helping people become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated “builds up” in 1 Corinthians 8:1. Alternate translation: “for strengthening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1080	1CO	14	4	b2mg	figs-metaphor	ἑαυτὸν οἰκοδομεῖ	1	builds up	Here, builds up represents helping himself become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated “builds up” in 1 Corinthians 8:1. Alternate translation: “strengthens himself in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1081	1CO	14	5	z5my	figs-synecdoche	μείζων δὲ ὁ προφητεύων	1	Now the one who prophesies is greater	Paul is emphasizing that the gift of prophecy is greater than the gift of speaking in tongues. Alternate translation: “The one who prophesies has a greater gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1082	1CO	14	5	g9k1		διερμηνεύῃ	1	he would interpret	This means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how this is translated in 1 Corinthians 2:13.
1083	1CO	14	6	l71k	figs-rquestion	ἐὰν ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς γλώσσαις λαλῶν, τί ὑμᾶς ὠφελήσω, ἐὰν μὴ ὑμῖν λαλήσω, ἢ ἐν ἀποκαλύψει, ἢ ἐν γνώσει, ἢ ἐν προφητείᾳ, ἢ διδαχῇ?	1	how will I benefit you?	This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “if I come to you speaking in tongues, I will not benefit you, unless I speak to you either in revelation or in knowledge or in prophecy or teaching.” or “if I come to you speaking in tongues, I will not have done anything that helps you, unless I speak to you either in revelation or in knowledge or in prophecy or teaching.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1084	1CO	14	7	t3rb		διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ	1	they do not make different sounds	Here, sounds refers to different pitches that make up the melody, not to the difference between a flute sound and a harp sound.
1085	1CO	14	7	hq2u	figs-rquestion	ἐὰν διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ, πῶς γνωσθήσεται τὸ αὐλούμενον ἢ τὸ κιθαριζόμενον?	1	how will it be known what is being played on the flute	Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this themselves. Alternate translation: “if they would not give different sounds, no one will know what tune the flute or harp is playing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1086	1CO	14	8	z6jg	figs-rquestion	ἐὰν ἄδηλον σάλπιγξ φωνὴν δῷ, τίς παρασκευάσεται εἰς πόλεμον?	1	who will prepare for battle?	Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this themselves. Alternate translation: “if a trumpet gives an uncertain sound, no one would know when it is time to prepare for battle.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1087	1CO	14	10	im7a	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδὲν ἄφωνον	1	none is without meaning	You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “they all have meaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1088	1CO	14	12	j1h7	figs-metaphor	πρὸς τὴν οἰκοδομὴν τῆς ἐκκλησίας, ζητεῖτε ἵνα περισσεύητε	1	try to excel in the gifts that build up the church	Paul speaks of the church as if it were a house that one could build and of the work of building the church as if it were something one could harvest. Alternate translation: “to succeed greatly in making God’s people more able to serve God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1089	1CO	14	13	j87g		διερμηνεύῃ	1	interpret	To interpret means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how this is translated in 1 Corinthians 2:13.
1090	1CO	14	14	kjh6	figs-metaphor	ὁ…νοῦς μου ἄκαρπός ἐστιν	1	my mind is unfruitful	The mind not understanding what is being prayed and, therefore, receiving no benefit from the prayer is spoken of as if the mind is unfruitful. Alternate translation: “I do not understand it in my mind” or “my mind does not benefit from the prayer, because I do not understand the words I am saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1091	1CO	14	15	vm6p	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐστιν?	1	What should I do?	Paul is introducing his conclusion. Alternate translation: “This is what I will do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1092	1CO	14	15	r11f		προσεύξομαι τῷ Πνεύματι, προσεύξομαι δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ. ψαλῶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ψαλῶ δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ	1	pray with my spirit … pray with my mind … sing with my spirit … sing with my mind	Prayers and songs must be in a language that the people present can understand.
1093	1CO	14	15	fi2f		τῷ νοΐ	1	with my mind	“with words that I understand”
1094	1CO	14	16	niu5	figs-you	εὐλογῇς…τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ…λέγεις	1	you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying	Though you and your are singular here, Paul is addressing everyone who prays only in the spirit, but not with the mind. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1095	1CO	14	16	r4w5	figs-rquestion	ἐὰν εὐλογῇς πνεύματι, ὁ ἀναπληρῶν τὸν τόπον τοῦ ἰδιώτου, πῶς ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν, ἐπὶ τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ, ἐπειδὴ τί λέγεις, οὐκ οἶδεν?	1	how will the outsider say “Amen” … saying?	This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “if you bless with the spirit, the outsider will never be able to say ‘Amen’ at your thanksgiving, since he does not know what you are saying.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1096	1CO	14	16	j3e3		τοῦ ἰδιώτου	1	the ungifted	This could refer to: (1) another person. (2) people who are new to their group.
1097	1CO	14	16	ev63	figs-synecdoche	ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν	1	say “Amen”	“will … be able to agree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1098	1CO	14	17	a7wr	figs-you	σὺ μὲν…εὐχαριστεῖς	1	you certainly give	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word you here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1099	1CO	14	17	w25k	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἕτερος οὐκ οἰκοδομεῖται	1	the other person is not built up	Building people up represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated “builds up” in 1 Corinthians 8:1. Alternate translation: “the other person is not strengthened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1100	1CO	14	17	m7cj	figs-activepassive	ἀλλ’ ὁ ἕτερος οὐκ οἰκοδομεῖται	1		You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what you say does not strengthen any outsider who might hear you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1101	1CO	14	19	cbw8	figs-hyperbole	ἢ μυρίους λόγους	1	than ten thousand words in a tongue	Paul was not counting words, but used exaggeration to emphasize that a few understandable words are far more valuable than even a great number of words in a language that people cannot understand. Alternate translation: “10,000 words” or “a great many words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1102	1CO	14	20	luu4			0	General Information:	Paul tells them that speaking in different languages was told ahead of time by the prophet Isaiah many years before this speaking in other languages happened at the start of Christ’s church.
1103	1CO	14	20	mh5t	figs-metaphor	μὴ παιδία γίνεσθε ταῖς φρεσίν	1	do not be children in your thinking	Here, children is a metaphor for being spiritually immature. Alternate translation: “do not think like children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1104	1CO	14	21	jx6l	figs-activepassive	ἐν τῷ νόμῳ γέγραπται	1	In the law it is written,	You can state this in active form: Alternate translation: “The prophet wrote these words in the law:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1105	1CO	14	21	l9xz	figs-parallelism	ἐν ἑτερογλώσσοις καὶ ἐν χείλεσιν ἑτέρων	1	By men of strange tongues and by the lips of strangers	These two phrases mean basically the same thing and are used together for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1106	1CO	14	22	bp4j			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul gives specific instructions on an orderly way to use gifts in the church.
1107	1CO	14	22	qj5f	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν, ἀλλὰ τοῖς ἀπίστοις	1	not for unbelievers, but for believers	This can be expressed positively and combined with the other positive statement. Alternate translation: “only for believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1108	1CO	14	23	hj3d	figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἐροῦσιν ὅτι μαίνεσθε?	1	would they not say that you are insane?	This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “they would say that you are insane.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1109	1CO	14	24	xxy5	figs-parallelism	ἐλέγχεται ὑπὸ πάντων, ἀνακρίνεται ὑπὸ πάντων	1	he would be convicted by all and examined by all	Paul says basically the same thing twice for emphasis. Alternate translation: “he would realize that he is guilty of sin because he hears what you are saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1110	1CO	14	25	ma47	figs-metonymy	τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς καρδίας αὐτοῦ φανερὰ γίνεται	1	The secrets of his heart would be revealed	Here, heart is a metonym for a person’s thoughts. Alternate translation: “his own private inner thoughts will be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1111	1CO	14	25	l62f	figs-activepassive	τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς καρδίας αὐτοῦ φανερὰ γίνεται	1		You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God would reveal to him the secrets of his heart” or “He would recognize his own private inner thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1112	1CO	14	25	w31w	figs-idiom	πεσὼν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον, προσκυνήσει τῷ Θεῷ	1	he would fall on his face and worship God	Here, having fallen on his face is an idiom, meaning he has bowed down. Alternate translation: “he would bow down and worship God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1113	1CO	14	26	bv9k	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐστιν, ἀδελφοί?	1	What is tp be then, brothers?	Paul uses a question to introduce the next part of his message. Alternate translation: “Because everything I have just told you is true, this is what you need to do, my fellow believers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1114	1CO	14	26	xzz2		ἑρμηνίαν	1	interpretation	Here, an interpretation means a telling of what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how “interpret” is translated in 1 Corinthians 2:13.
1115	1CO	14	27	wc1z		καὶ ἀνὰ μέρος	1	and each one in turn	“and they should speak one after another” or “and they should speak one at a time”
1116	1CO	14	27	ari2		διερμηνευέτω	1	must interpret	To interpret means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how “interpret” is translated in 1 Corinthians 2:13.
1117	1CO	14	29	a9iz		προφῆται…δύο ἢ τρεῖς λαλείτωσαν	1	Let two or three prophets speak	This could mean: (1) only two or three prophets should speak at any one meeting. (2) only two or three prophets should take turns speaking at any one time.
1118	1CO	14	30	sl1q	figs-activepassive	ἐὰν…ἄλλῳ ἀποκαλυφθῇ	1	if a revelation is given to another	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “if God gives insight to another person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1119	1CO	14	31	xr69		καθ’ ἕνα…προφητεύειν	1	prophesy one by one	Only one person should prophesy at a time.
1120	1CO	14	31	nrq1	figs-activepassive	πάντες…παρακαλῶνται	3	all may be encouraged	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you may encourage all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1121	1CO	14	33	my65		οὐ…ἐστιν ἀκαταστασίας ὁ Θεὸς	1	God is not a God of confusion	God does not create confusing situations by making people all speak at the same time.
1122	1CO	14	34	gjv2		αἱ γυναῖκες…σιγάτωσαν	1	let be silent	This could mean: (1) they should stop speaking. (2) they should stop speaking when someone is prophesying. (3) they should be absolutely silent during the church service.
1123	1CO	14	36	h8lp	figs-rquestion	ἢ ἀφ’ ὑμῶν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐξῆλθεν, ἢ εἰς ὑμᾶς μόνους κατήντησεν?	1	Did the word of God come from you? Are you the only ones it has reached?	Paul uses these questions to emphasize that the Corinthians are not the only ones who understand what God wants Christians to do. Alternate translation: “The word of God did not come from you in Corinth; you are not the only people who understand God’s will.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1124	1CO	14	36	mj6b	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the word of God	Here, the word of God is a metonym for the message from God. Alternate translation: “God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1125	1CO	14	37	ab6u		ἐπιγινωσκέτω	1	he should acknowledge	A true prophet or truly spiritual person will accept Paul’s writings as coming from the Lord.
1126	1CO	14	39	jvr7		τὸ λαλεῖν μὴ κωλύετε γλώσσαις	1	do not forbid anyone from speaking in tongues	Paul makes it clear that speaking in tongues at a church gathering is permissible and acceptable.
1127	1CO	14	40	d7ia	figs-activepassive	πάντα δὲ εὐσχημόνως καὶ κατὰ τάξιν γινέσθω	1	But let all things be done properly and in order	Paul is stressing that church gatherings should be held in an orderly manner. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But do all things properly and in order” or “But do everything in an orderly, appropriate way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1128	1CO	15	intro	abci			0		1 Corinthians 15 General Notes Structure and formatting Resurrection This chapter includes a very important teaching about the resurrection of Jesus. The Greek people did not believe that a person could live after they died. Paul defends the resurrection of Jesus. He teaches why it is important to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]]) Special concepts in this chapter Resurrection Paul presents the resurrection as the ultimate proof that Jesus is God. Christ is the first of many who God will raise to life. The resurrection is central to the gospel. Few doctrines are as important as this one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]]) Important figures of speech in this chapter Paul uses many different figures of speech in this chapter. He uses them to express difficult theological teachings in a way that people can understand.
1129	1CO	15	1	gc6n			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul reminds them that it is the gospel that saves them and he tells them again what the gospel is. Then he gives them a short history lesson, which ends with what will yet happen.
1130	1CO	15	1	la9v		γνωρίζω…ὑμῖν	1	make known to you	“I am helping you remember”
1131	1CO	15	1	xv53	figs-metaphor	ἐν ᾧ καὶ ἑστήκατε	1	on which you stand	Paul is speaking of the Corinthians as if they were a house and the gospel as if it were the foundation on which the house was standing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1132	1CO	15	2	xh29	figs-activepassive	σῴζεσθε	1	you are being saved	You can state this in active form. “God is saving you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1133	1CO	15	2	le2k		τίνι λόγῳ εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν	1	the word I preached to you	“to the message I preached to you”
1134	1CO	15	3	sp4p		ἐν πρώτοις	1	as of first importance	This could mean: (1) this is the most important of many things. (2) this is the first in time (3) this was done previously.
1135	1CO	15	3	azw6		ὑπὲρ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν	1	for our sins	“to pay for our sins” or “so that God could forgive our sins”
1136	1CO	15	3	inj2		κατὰ τὰς Γραφάς	1	according to the scriptures	Here, the Scriptures refers to the writings of the Old Testament.
1137	1CO	15	4	wa7m	figs-activepassive	ἐτάφη	1	he was buried	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they buried him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1138	1CO	15	4	n7c7	figs-activepassive	ἐγήγερται	1	he was raised	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God raised him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1139	1CO	15	4	d6ew		ἐγήγερται	1	was raised	“was caused to live again”
1140	1CO	15	5	rhd3			0	Connecting Statement:	If you need for verse 5 to be a complete sentence, end 1 Corinthians 15:4 with a comma so that verse 5 completes the sentence begun in 1 Corinthians 15:3.
1141	1CO	15	5	q3nb		ὤφθη Κηφᾷ	1	he appeared	“showed himself to Cephas”
1142	1CO	15	6	q8bl	figs-euphemism	τινὲς…ἐκοιμήθησαν	1	some have fallen asleep	Here, have fallen asleep is a euphemism for death. Alternate translation: “some have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1143	1CO	15	8	n9c6		ἔσχατον…πάντων	1	Last of all	“finally, after he had appeared to the others”
1144	1CO	15	8	vg7t	figs-idiom	τῷ ἐκτρώματι	1	a child born at the wrong time	This is an idiom by which Paul may mean that he became a Christian much later than the other apostles. Or perhaps he means that, unlike the other apostles, he did not witness Jesus’ three-year-long ministry. Alternate translation: “someone who missed the experiences of the others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1145	1CO	15	10	xiq6		χάριτι…Θεοῦ, εἰμι ὅ εἰμι	1	by the grace of God I am what I am	God’s grace or kindness has made Paul as he is now.
1146	1CO	15	10	n45h	figs-litotes	ἡ χάρις αὐτοῦ ἡ εἰς ἐμὲ, οὐ κενὴ ἐγενήθη	1	his grace in me was not in vain	Paul is emphasizing through litotes that God worked through Paul. Alternate translation: “because he was kind to me, I was able to do much good work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1147	1CO	15	10	xh95	figs-metaphor	ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ σὺν ἐμοί	1	the grace of God that is with me	Paul speaks of the work he was able to do because God was kind to him as if that grace were actually doing the work. Alternate translation: This could mean: (1) this is literally true, and God actually did the work and kindly used Paul as a tool. (2) Paul is using a metaphor and saying that God was kind to let Paul do the work and to make Paul’s work have good results. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1148	1CO	15	12	ub2p	figs-rquestion	πῶς λέγουσιν ἐν ὑμῖν τινες, ὅτι ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν?	1	how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead?	Paul is using this question to begin a new topic. Alternate translation: “you should not be saying that there is no resurrection of the dead!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1149	1CO	15	12	jbi8		ἐγήγερται	1	raised	he was made alive again
1150	1CO	15	13	cn2m	figs-hypo	εἰ…ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν, οὐδὲ Χριστὸς ἐγήγερται	1	if there is no resurrection of the dead, then not even Christ has been raised	Paul is using a hypothetical case to argue that there is a resurrection of the dead. He knows that Christ has been raised and so infers that there is a resurrection. To say that there is no resurrection is to say that Christ has not been raised, but this is false because Paul has seen the resurrected Christ (1 Corinthians 15:8). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
1151	1CO	15	13	mi12	figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ Χριστὸς ἐγήγερται	1	not even Christ has been raised	You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has not even raised Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1152	1CO	15	15	gi99			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul wants them assured that Christ rose from the dead.
1153	1CO	15	15	ctn5		εὑρισκόμεθα…ψευδομάρτυρες τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	we are found to be false witnesses about God	Paul is arguing that if Christ did not rise from the dead, then they are bearing false witness or lying about Christ’s coming alive again.
1154	1CO	15	15	aq5s	figs-activepassive	εὑρισκόμεθα	1	we are found to be	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone will realize that we are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1155	1CO	15	17	v6vz		ματαία ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν, ἔτι ἐστὲ ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν	1	your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins	Their faith is based on Christ having risen from the dead, so if that did not happen, their faith will do them no good.
1156	1CO	15	19	d9nq		πάντων ἀνθρώπων	1	of all people	“of everyone, including believers and non-believers”
1157	1CO	15	19	ts7u		ἐλεεινότεροι πάντων ἀνθρώπων ἐσμέν	1	of all people we are most to be pitied	“people should feel sorry for us more than they do for anyone else”
1158	1CO	15	20	cxp9		νυνὶ…Χριστὸς	1	now Christ	“as it is, Christ” or “this is the truth: Christ”
1159	1CO	15	20	zw31	figs-metaphor	ἀπαρχὴ	1	the firstfruits	Here, firstfruit is a metaphor, comparing Christ to the first of the harvest, which would be followed by the rest of the harvest. Christ was the first to be raised from the dead. Alternate translation: “who is like the first part of the harvest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1160	1CO	15	20	n6cl	figs-idiom	Χριστὸς ἐγήγερται ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Christ has been raised from the dead, the firstfruit of those who have fallen asleep	Here, has been raised is an idiom for “caused to live again.” Alternate translation: “Christ has been caused to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1161	1CO	15	20	a385	figs-activepassive	Χριστὸς ἐγήγερται ἐκ νεκρῶν	1		You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has raised Christ from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1162	1CO	15	21	uca8	figs-abstractnouns	δι’ ἀνθρώπου θάνατος	1	death came by a man	The abstract noun death can be expressed with the verb “die.” Alternate translation. “people die because of what one man did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1163	1CO	15	21	gf8p	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ δι’ ἀνθρώπου ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν	1	by a man also came the resurrection of the dead	The abstract noun resurrection can be expressed with the verb “raise.” Alternate translation: “people are raised from the dead because of another man” or “people will become alive again because of what one man did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1164	1CO	15	23	p4g9	figs-metaphor	ἀπαρχὴ	1	the firstfruits	Here, firstfruit is a metaphor, comparing Christ to the first of the harvest, which would be followed by the rest of the harvest. Christ was the first to be raised from the dead. Alternate translation: “who is like the first part of the harvest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1165	1CO	15	24	u298			0	General Information:	Here the words he and his refer to Christ.
1166	1CO	15	24	uwh3		καταργήσῃ πᾶσαν ἀρχὴν, καὶ πᾶσαν ἐξουσίαν, καὶ δύναμιν	1	he will abolish all rule and all authority and power	“he will stop those people who rule, who have authority, and who have power from doing what they are doing”
1167	1CO	15	25	t8mk	figs-idiom	ἄχρι οὗ θῇ πάντας τοὺς ἐχθροὺς ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ	1	until he has put all his enemies under his feet	Kings who won wars would put their feet on the necks of those whom they had defeated. Alternate translation: “until God has completely destroyed all of Christ’s enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1168	1CO	15	26	x49h	figs-personification	ἔσχατος ἐχθρὸς καταργεῖται ὁ θάνατος	1	The last enemy to be destroyed is death	Paul speaks of death here as if it were a person whom God will kill. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1169	1CO	15	26	n32f	figs-activepassive	ἔσχατος ἐχθρὸς καταργεῖται ὁ θάνατος	1		You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The final enemy that God will destroy is death itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1170	1CO	15	27	df59	figs-idiom	πάντα…ὑπέταξεν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ	1	he has put everything under his feet	Kings who won wars would put their feet on the necks of those whom they had defeated. See how “put … under his feet” is translated in 1 Corinthians 15:25. Alternate translation: “God has completely destroyed all of Christ’s enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1171	1CO	15	28	xm8u	figs-activepassive	ὑποταγῇ αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα	1	all things are subjected to him	This can stated as active. Alternate translation: “God has made all things subject to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1172	1CO	15	28	a1cd	figs-activepassive	αὐτὸς ὁ Υἱὸς, ὑποταγήσεται	1	the Son himself will be subjected	This can stated as active. Alternate translation: “the Son himself will become subject” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1173	1CO	15	28	ksj4		αὐτὸς ὁ Υἱὸς	1	the Son himself	In the previous verses he was referred to as “Christ.” Alternate translation: “Christ, that is, the Son himself”
1174	1CO	15	28	im2j	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς	1	the Son	This is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1175	1CO	15	29	a4d4	figs-rquestion	ἐπεὶ τί ποιήσουσιν, οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι ὑπὲρ τῶν νεκρῶν?	1	Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead?	Paul uses this question to teach the Corinthians. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Otherwise it would be useless for Christians to receive baptism for the dead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1176	1CO	15	29	lw86	figs-hypo	εἰ ὅλως νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται, τί καὶ βαπτίζονται ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν?	1	If the dead are not raised at all, why are they baptized for them?	Paul uses a hypothetical situation to argue that the dead are raised. To say that the dead are not raised is to say that people should not be baptized for the dead. But some people, probably some members of the church in Corinth, are baptized for the dead, so he infers those people are baptized for the dead because they believe that the dead are raised. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
1177	1CO	15	29	jdc9	figs-activepassive	νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται	1	the dead are not raised	You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “God does not raise the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1178	1CO	15	29	t3yc		οὐκ ἐγείρονται	1	are not raised	“are not caused to live again”
1179	1CO	15	29	s7kx	figs-rquestion	τί καὶ βαπτίζονται ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν	1	why then are they baptized for them?	Paul uses this question to teach the Corinthians. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “there would be no reason for them to have people baptize them on behalf of dead people.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1180	1CO	15	30	h4ra	figs-rquestion	τί καὶ ἡμεῖς κινδυνεύομεν πᾶσαν ὥραν?	1	Why then, are we in danger every hour?	Paul uses this question to teach the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “We gain nothing by being in danger every hour.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1181	1CO	15	30	t593	figs-explicit	τί καὶ ἡμεῖς κινδυνεύομεν πᾶσαν ὥραν?	1		The reason he and others were in danger is that some people were angry that they taught that Jesus will raise people from death. Alternate translation: “If people will not rise from the dead, we gain nothing by being in danger every hour for teaching that people will rise.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1182	1CO	15	31	i7d7	figs-hyperbole	καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀποθνῄσκω	1	I die every day!	This exaggeration means he was in danger of dying. He knew that some people wanted to kill him because they did not like what he was teaching. Alternate translation: “Every day I am in danger of dying” or “Every day I risk my life!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1183	1CO	15	31	d51t		καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀποθνῄσκω, νὴ τὴν ὑμετέραν καύχησιν	1	I swear by my boasting in you	Paul uses this statement as evidence that he faces death every day. Alternate translation: “You can know I die every day, because you know about my boasting in you”
1184	1CO	15	31	znl3	figs-explicit	τὴν ὑμετέραν καύχησιν, ἀδελφοί, ἣν ἔχω ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, τῷ Κυρίῳ ἡμῶν	1	my boasting in you, brothers, which I have in Christ Jesus our Lord	Paul boasted in them because of what Christ Jesus had done for him. Alternate translation: “my boasting in you, which I do because of my relationship with Christ Jesus our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1185	1CO	15	31	p3ym		τὴν ὑμετέραν καύχησιν	1	my boasting in you	“telling other people how good you are”
1186	1CO	15	32	q6mb	figs-rquestion	εἰ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, ἐθηριομάχησα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ, τί μοι τὸ ὄφελος?	1	What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised	Paul wants the Corinthians to understand without him having to tell them. This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “If Christ was not raised, I gained nothing, according to the opinion of most people, by fighting with beasts at Ephesus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1187	1CO	15	32	lm3v	figs-metaphor	ἐθηριομάχησα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ	1	I fought with beasts at Ephesus	This could mean: (1) Paul was speaking figuratively about his arguments with learned pagans or other conflicts with people who wanted to kill him. (2) Paul was actually put into the arena to fight against dangerous animals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1188	1CO	15	32	c36a		φάγωμεν καὶ πίωμεν, αὔριον γὰρ ἀποθνῄσκομεν	1	Let us eat and drink, for tomorrow we die	Paul concludes that if there is no further life after death, it is better for us to enjoy this life as we can, for tomorrow our life will end without any further hope.
1189	1CO	15	33	q7uc		φθείρουσιν ἤθη χρηστὰ ὁμιλίαι κακαί	1	Bad company corrupts good morals	If you live with bad people, you will act like them. Paul is quoting a common saying.
1190	1CO	15	34	gr3v		ἐκνήψατε	1	Sober up	“You must think seriously about this”
1191	1CO	15	35	w4hk			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul gives some specifics about how the resurrection of the believers’ bodies will take place. He gives a picture of natural and spiritual bodies and compares the first man Adam with the last Adam, Christ.
1192	1CO	15	35	hw4a	figs-rquestion	ἀλλ’ ἐρεῖ τις, πῶς ἐγείρονται οἱ νεκροί? ποίῳ δὲ σώματι ἔρχονται?	1	But someone will say, “How are the dead raised, and with what kind of body will they come?”	This could mean: (1) the person is asking sincerely. (2) the person is using the question to mock the idea of a resurrection. Alternate translation: “But some will say that they cannot imagine how God will raise the dead, and what kind of body God would give them in the resurrection.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1193	1CO	15	35	ty4t		ἐρεῖ τις	1	someone will say	“perhaps someone will ask”
1194	1CO	15	35	e5lv		ποίῳ…σώματι ἔρχονται	1	with what kind of body will they come	That is, will it be a physical body or a spiritual body? What shape will the body have? What will the body be made of? Translate using the most general question that someone who wants to know the answers to these questions would ask.
1195	1CO	15	36	ha84	figs-you	ἄφρων! σὺ ὃ σπείρεις	1	You are so foolish! What you sow	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of you here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1196	1CO	15	36	jnf9		ἄφρων! σὺ	1	You are so foolish! What you sow	“You do not know about this at all!”
1197	1CO	15	36	q2zd	figs-metaphor	ὃ σπείρεις, οὐ ζῳοποιεῖται, ἐὰν μὴ ἀποθάνῃ	1	What you sow will not start to grow unless it dies	A seed will not grow unless it is first buried underground. In the same way, a person has to die before God can resurrect him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1198	1CO	15	37	pw6v	figs-metaphor	ὃ σπείρεις, οὐ τὸ σῶμα τὸ γενησόμενον	1	What you sow is not the body that will be	Paul uses the metaphor of the seed again to say that God will resurrect the dead body of the believer, but that body will not appear as it was. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1199	1CO	15	37	h6zi	figs-you	ὃ σπείρεις	1	What you sow	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word you here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1200	1CO	15	38	dmx1		ὁ…Θεὸς δίδωσιν αὐτῷ σῶμα, καθὼς ἠθέλησεν	1	God will give it a body as he chooses	“God will decide what kind of body it will have”
1201	1CO	15	39	qi8y		σὰρξ	1	flesh	In the context of animals, flesh may be translated as “body,” “skin,” or “meat.”
1202	1CO	15	40	d9k2		σώματα ἐπουράνια	1	heavenly bodies	This could refer to: (1) the sun, moon, stars, and other visible lights in the sky. (2) heavenly beings, such as angels and other supernatural beings.
1203	1CO	15	40	k9pg		σώματα ἐπίγεια	1	earthly bodies	This refers to humans.
1204	1CO	15	40	qg3p		ἑτέρα μὲν ἡ τῶν ἐπουρανίων δόξα, ἑτέρα δὲ ἡ τῶν ἐπιγείων	1	the glory of the heavenly body is one kind and the glory of the earthly is another	“the glory that heavenly bodies have is different from the glory of human bodies”
1205	1CO	15	40	j1kb		δόξα	1	glory	Here, glory refers to the relative brightness to the human eye of objects in the sky.
1206	1CO	15	42	s12t	figs-metaphor	σπείρεται…ἐγείρεται	1	What is sown … what is raised	The writer speaks of a person’s body being buried as if it were a seed that is scattered on the ground. And he speaks of a person’s body being raised from the dead as if it were a plant growing from the seed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1207	1CO	15	42	b6ob	figs-activepassive	σπείρεται…ἐγείρεται	1		You can state the passive verbs in active form. Alternate translation: “What goes into the ground … what comes out of the ground” or “What people bury … what God raises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1208	1CO	15	42	ay76		ἐγείρεται	1	is raised	“is caused to live again”
1209	1CO	15	42	rw3k		ἐν φθορᾷ, ἐγείρεται ἐν ἀφθαρσίᾳ	1	in decay … in immortality	“that can rot, cannot rot when it is raised”
1210	1CO	15	43	h4u5	figs-metaphor	σπείρεται…ἐγείρεται	1	It is sown … it is raised	The writer speaks of a person’s body being buried as if it were a seed that is scattered on the ground. And he speaks of a person’s body being raised from the dead as if it were a plant growing from the seed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1211	1CO	15	43	zo03	figs-activepassive	σπείρεται…ἐγείρεται	1		You can state the passive verbs in active form. Alternate translation: “It goes into the ground … it comes out of the ground” or “People bury it … God raises it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1212	1CO	15	44	u856	figs-metaphor	σπείρεται…ἐγείρεται	1	It is sown … it is raised	The writer speaks of a person’s body being buried as if it were a seed that is planted in the ground. And he speaks of a person’s body being raised from the dead as if it were a plant growing from the seed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1213	1CO	15	44	b4dm	figs-activepassive	σπείρεται…ἐγείρεται	1		You can state the passive verbs in active form. Alternate translation: “It goes into the ground … it comes out of the ground” or “People bury it … God raises it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1214	1CO	15	46	fc51		ἀλλ’ οὐ πρῶτον τὸ πνευματικὸν, ἀλλὰ τὸ ψυχικόν, ἔπειτα τὸ πνευματικόν	1	But the spiritual did not come first but the natural, and then the spiritual	“The natural being came first. The spiritual being is from God and came later.”
1215	1CO	15	46	nd64		ψυχικόν	1	natural	created by earthly processes, not yet connected to God
1216	1CO	15	47	m2pj	figs-explicit	ὁ πρῶτος ἄνθρωπος ἐκ γῆς, χοϊκός	1	The first man is of the earth, made of dust	God made the first man, Adam, from the dust of the earth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1217	1CO	15	48	r9be	figs-explicit	ὁ ἐπουράνιος	1	ὁ ἐπουράνιος	This refers to Jesus Christ, who is from heaven. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1218	1CO	15	48	s9pn		οἱ ἐπουράνιοι	1	those who are of heaven	“those who belong to God”
1219	1CO	15	49	mq8z		εἰκόνα τοῦ χοϊκοῦ, φορέσωμεν καὶ τὴν εἰκόνα τοῦ ἐπουρανίου	1	have borne the image … will also bear the image	“have been just like Adam, we will also be just like Jesus”
1220	1CO	15	50	jub2			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul wants them to realize that some believers will not die physically but will still get a resurrected body through Christ’s victory.
1221	1CO	15	50	mwy3	figs-parallelism	σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα Βασιλείαν Θεοῦ κληρονομῆσαι οὐ δύναται, οὐδὲ ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν κληρονομεῖ	1	flesh and blood cannot inherit the kingdom of God. Neither does what is perishable inherit what is imperishable	This could mean: (1) the two sentences mean the same thing. Alternate translation: “human beings who will surely die cannot inherit the permanent kingdom of God” (2) the second sentence finishes the thought begun by the first. Alternate translation: “weak human beings cannot inherit the kingdom of God. Neither do those who will certainly die inherit a kingdom that will last forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1222	1CO	15	50	nz7s	figs-metonymy	σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα	1	flesh and blood	Here, flesh and blood refers to people, who inhabit a physical body. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1223	1CO	15	50	e4gd	figs-metaphor	κληρονομῆσαι	1	inherit	Receiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1224	1CO	15	50	b9hc		ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν	1	the perishable … the imperishable	“what can rot … what cannot rot.” See how these words are translated in 1 Corinthians 15:42.
1225	1CO	15	51	k5dw	figs-activepassive	πάντες…ἀλλαγησόμεθα	2	we will all be changed	You can state this as active. Alternate translation: “God will change us all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1226	1CO	15	52	p8f8	figs-activepassive	ἀλλαγησόμεθα	1	We will be changed	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will change us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1227	1CO	15	52	r4ix		ἐν ῥιπῇ ὀφθαλμοῦ	1	in the twinkling of an eye	It will happen as fast as it takes for a person to blink his or her eye.
1228	1CO	15	52	h668	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ σάλπιγγι	1	at the last trumpet	Here, the last trumpet refers to the sounding of trumpets before the return of Christ and the final judgment of those who have not believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “when the last trumpet sounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1229	1CO	15	52	l66q	figs-activepassive	οἱ νεκροὶ ἐγερθήσονται	1	the dead will be raised	You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will raise the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1230	1CO	15	52	ymk9		ἐγερθήσονται	1	raised	“will be caused to live again”
1231	1CO	15	52	bmx2		ἄφθαρτοι	1	imperishable	“in a form that cannot rot.” See how a similar phrase is translated in 1 Corinthians 15:42.
1232	1CO	15	53	nua2		τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο…ἀφθαρσίαν	1	this perishable body … is imperishable	“this body that can rot … the inability to rot.” See how similar phrases are translated in 1 Corinthians 15:42.
1233	1CO	15	53	iyd2	figs-metaphor	ἐνδύσασθαι ἀφθαρσίαν	1	must put on	Paul is speaking of God making our bodies so they will never die again as if God were putting new clothes on us. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1234	1CO	15	54	qq5m	figs-personification	τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο ἐνδύσηται ἀφθαρσίαν, καὶ τὸ θνητὸν τοῦτο ἐνδύσηται ἀθανασίαν	1	when this perishable body has put on what is imperishable	Here the body is spoken of as if it were a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1235	1CO	15	54	od10	figs-metaphor	τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο ἐνδύσηται ἀφθαρσίαν	1		Here becoming imperishable is spoken of as if being imperishable was clothing that a body would wear. Alternate translation: “when this perishable body has become imperishable” or “when this body that can rot can no longer rot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1236	1CO	15	54	j9zs	figs-metaphor	τὸ θνητὸν τοῦτο ἐνδύσηται ἀθανασίαν	1	this mortal body has put on immortality	Here becoming immortal is spoken of as if being immortal was clothing that a body would wear. Alternate translation: “when this mortal body has become immortal” or “when this body that can die can no longer die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1237	1CO	15	55	c9zw	figs-apostrophe	θάνατε	1	Death, where is your victory? Death, where is your sting?	Paul speaks as if death were a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
1238	1CO	15	55	pdxo	figs-rquestion	ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον?	1		Paul uses this question to mock the power of death, which Christ has defeated. Alternate translation: “Death has no victory. Death has no sting.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1239	1CO	15	55	gg3d	figs-you	σου…σου	1	your … your	Both possessive pronouns your are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1240	1CO	15	56	iyd3		τὸ…κέντρον τοῦ θανάτου ἡ ἁμαρτία	1	the sting of death is sin	It is through sin that we are destined to face death, that is, to die.
1241	1CO	15	56	pf4e		ἡ…δύναμις τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ νόμος	2	the power of sin is the law	God’s law that was passed down by Moses defines sin and shows us how we sin before God.
1242	1CO	15	57	ztj6		τῷ διδόντι ἡμῖν τὸ νῖκος	1	gives us the victory	“who has defeated death for us”
1243	1CO	15	58	k4c4			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul wants believers, while they work for the Lord, to remember the changed, resurrected bodies that God is going to give them.
1244	1CO	15	58	j1pl	figs-metaphor	ἑδραῖοι γίνεσθε, ἀμετακίνητοι	1	be steadfast and immovable	Paul speaks of someone who lets nothing stop him from carrying out his decisions as if he could not be physically moved. Alternate translation: “be determined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1245	1CO	15	58	zn8f	figs-metaphor	περισσεύοντες ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ τοῦ Κυρίου πάντοτε	1	Always abound in the work of the Lord	Paul speaks of efforts made in working for the Lord as if they were objects that a person could acquire more of. Alternate translation: “Always work for the Lord faithfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1246	1CO	16	intro	abcj			0		1 Corinthians 16 General Notes Structure and formatting Paul briefly covers many topics in this chapter. It was common in the ancient Near East for the last part of letters to have personal greetings. Special concepts in this chapter Preparation for his coming Paul gave practical instructions to help prepare the Corinthian church for his visit. He told them to start collecting money every Sunday for the believers in Jerusalem. He hoped to come and spend the winter with them. He told them to help Timothy when he came. He had hoped Apollos would go to them, but Apollos did not think it was the right time. Paul also told them to obey Stephanus. Finally, he sent his greetings to everyone.
1247	1CO	16	1	zh6u			0	Connecting Statement:	In his closing notes, Paul reminds the Corinthian believers to collect money for the needy believers in Jerusalem. He reminds them that Timothy will come to them before he goes to Paul.
1248	1CO	16	1	yer5		εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους	1	for the saints	Paul was collecting money from his churches for the poor Jewish Christians in Jerusalem and Judea.
1249	1CO	16	1	kh6h		ὥσπερ διέταξα	1	as I directed	“as I gave specific instructions to”
1250	1CO	16	2	h8n9		θησαυρίζων	1	storing up	This could mean: (1) “keep it at home.” (2) “leave it with the church.”
1251	1CO	16	2	wc3w		ἵνα μὴ ὅταν ἔλθω, τότε λογεῖαι γίνωνται	1	so that there will be no collections when I come	“so that you will not have to collect more money while I am with you”
1252	1CO	16	3	yj6c		οὓς ἐὰν δοκιμάσητε	1	whomever you approve	Paul is telling the church to choose some of their own people to take their offering to Jerusalem. “whomever you choose” or “the people you appoint”
1253	1CO	16	3	j612		δι’ ἐπιστολῶν…πέμψω	1	I will send with letters	This could mean: (1) Paul will send with letters that he will write. (2) Paul will send with letters that they will write.
1254	1CO	16	6	w94k		ὑμεῖς με προπέμψητε, οὗ ἐὰν πορεύωμαι	1	you may help me on my way, wherever I go	This means the Corinthians might give Paul money or other things he needs so that he and his ministry team could continue to travel.
1255	1CO	16	7	xr88	figs-litotes	οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἄρτι ἐν παρόδῳ ἰδεῖν	1	I do not wish to see you now	Paul is stating that he wants to visit for a long time later, not just for a short time soon. You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “I want to spend a longer time with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1256	1CO	16	8	qkw9		τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	Pentecost	Paul would stay in Ephesus until the festival of Pentecost, which came in May or June, 50 days after Passover. He would then travel through Macedonia, and later try to arrive in Corinth before winter started in November.
1257	1CO	16	9	fyj3	figs-metaphor	θύρα…ἀνέῳγεν μεγάλη καὶ ἐνεργής	1	a wide door has opened	Paul speaks of the opportunity God has given him to win people to the gospel as if it were a door that God had opened so he could walk through it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1258	1CO	16	10	p6vb		βλέπετε ἵνα ἀφόβως γένηται πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	see that he is with you unafraid	“see that he has no cause to fear being with you”
1259	1CO	16	11	f4mw		μή τις…αὐτὸν ἐξουθενήσῃ	1	Let no one despise him	Because Timothy was much younger than Paul, sometimes he was not shown the respect he deserved as a minister of the gospel.
1260	1CO	16	12	is6j	figs-exclusive	Ἀπολλῶ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ	1	our brother Apollos	Some languages such as English require the word our for clarity. If added, you would refer to Paul and his readers, so it is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1261	1CO	16	13	p2la	figs-parallelism	γρηγορεῖτε, στήκετε ἐν τῇ πίστει, ἀνδρίζεσθε, κραταιοῦσθε	1	Stay alert; stand firm in the faith; act like men; be strong	Paul is describing what he wants the Corinthians to do as if he was giving four commands to soldiers in war. These four commands mean almost the same thing and are used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1262	1CO	16	13	ng8n	figs-metaphor	γρηγορεῖτε	1	Stay alert	Paul speaks of people being aware of what is happening as if they were guards keeping watch over a city or vineyard. You can state this more clearly. Alternate translation: “Be careful whom you trust” or “Watch out for danger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1263	1CO	16	13	uys8	figs-metaphor	στήκετε ἐν τῇ πίστει	1	stand firm in the faith	Paul speaks of people continuing to believe in Christ according to his teaching as if they were soldiers refusing to retreat when the enemy attacks. This could mean: (1) they should keep strongly believing what Paul and his companions have taught them. (2) they should keep strongly trusting in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1264	1CO	16	13	a3fs	figs-metaphor	ἀνδρίζεσθε	1	act like men	In the society in which Paul and his audience lived, men usually provided for families by doing the heavy work and fighting against invaders. You can state this more clearly. Alternate translation: “be responsible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1265	1CO	16	14	rij5		πάντα ὑμῶν ἐν ἀγάπῃ γινέσθω	1	Let all that you do be done in love	“Everything you do, you should do because you love people” or “Everything you do, you should do because you love God”
1266	1CO	16	15	fy4e			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul begins to close his letter and sends greetings from other churches, as well as from Prisca, Aquila, and Paul himself.
1267	1CO	16	15	asp2	translate-names	τὴν οἰκίαν Στεφανᾶ	1	the household of Stephanas	Stephanas was one of the first believers in the church at Corinth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1268	1CO	16	15	na2p	translate-names	Ἀχαΐας	1	Achaia	Achaia is the name of a province in Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1269	1CO	16	17	iju8		Στεφανᾶ, καὶ Φορτουνάτου, καὶ Ἀχαϊκοῦ	1	Stephanas, and Fortunatus, and Achaicus	Stephanas and Fortunatus were either some of the first Corinthian believers or church elders who were co-workers with Paul.
1270	1CO	16	17	e79z	translate-names	Στεφανᾶ, καὶ Φορτουνάτου, καὶ Ἀχαϊκοῦ	1	Stephanas, and Fortunatus, and Achaicus	Stephanas and Fortunatus are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1271	1CO	16	17	an3e		τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα οὗτοι ἀνεπλήρωσαν	1	They have made up for your absence	“they made up for the fact that you were not here”
1272	1CO	16	18	f3kg		ἀνέπαυσαν γὰρ τὸ ἐμὸν πνεῦμα	1	For they have refreshed my spirit	Paul is saying he was encouraged by their visit.
1273	1CO	16	21	izu6		ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ, Παύλου	1	I, Paul, write this with my own hand	Paul was making it clear that the instructions in this letter are from him, even though one of his co-laborers wrote what Paul was saying in the rest of the letter. Paul wrote this last part with his own hand.
1274	1CO	16	22	c1kx		ἤτω ἀνάθεμα	1	may he be accursed	“may God curse him.” See how accursed was translated in 1 Corinthians 12:3.